Skip to main content

Full text of "Beekeeping in the Midwest"

See other formats


tf 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 

University  of  Illinois  Urbana-Champaign 


http://www.archive.org/details/beekeepinginmidw1125jayc 


'■%'' 


CiR 


UNIVERSITY  OF  W-INOtt 
AGRICULTURE  I1BRARJ 


I3ST  THE  MID"WEST 


elbert  r..  jaycox 


BEEKEEFHSTGt  IKT  THE  MUD-WEST 


UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS 
SERICULTURE  LIBRARY 


BE3EKEEPING 

insr  the  nunncrw^iEST 


ELBERT  K,.  JAYCOX 
Professor  of  Apiculture 


CIRCULAR  1125 


University  of  Illinois  at  Urbana-Champaign 
College  of  Agriculture  •  Cooperative  Extension  Service 


This  publication  includes  information  about  insecticides,  chemi- 
cals, drugs,  and  other  materials  whose  usage  is  regulated  by 
state  and  federal  agencies.  Every  effort  has  been  made  to  pro- 
vide information  that  is  current  and  correct  as  of  the  date  of 
publication.  However,  the  status  of  some  materials  is  not  clear, 
and  that  of  others  may  change  at  any  time.  Anyone  using 
regulated  materials,  or  planning  to  do  so,  should  read  and 
follow  the  label  directions.  If  there  is  any  question  about  the 
use  of  such  materials,  contact  the  extension  apiculturist  or 
extension  entomologist  in  your  state,  or  the  local  extension 
adviser  or  county  agent.  Beekeeping  periodicals  often  include 
announcements  about  changes  in  the  accepted  uses  of  regulated 
materials  by  beekeepers. 

So  that  the  information  in  this  publication  may  be  more  easily 
understood,  trade  names  of  products  or  equipment  have  been 
used  in  place  of  complicated  descriptions  or  chemical  identifica- 
tion. No  endorsement  of  named  products  is  intended,  nor  is 
criticism  implied  of  similar  products  that  are  not  mentioned. 


Photographs  by  the  author. 


©  1976  by  the  Board  of  Trustees  of  the  University  of  Illinois 
Manufactured  in  the  United  States  of  America 


CONTENTS 


BEES:  THE  INDIVIDUAL  AND  THE  COLONY 3 

Kinds  of  Adult  Bees 3 

The  Workers  4 

The  Drones 7 

The  Queen  9 

Length  of  Development 12 

The  Races  of  Bees 12 

The  Colony 12 

Honeymaking 17 

BEEKEEPING  EQUIPMENT 20 

Hive  Parts  and  Selection  of  Equipment 21 

Assembly  of  Equipment 27 

Tools,  Specialized  Equipment,  and  Clothing 32 

Making  Your  Own  Equipment 36 

SPRING  MANAGEMENT:  STARTING  WITH  BEES 52 

When  and  How  to  Start 52 

Location  and  Arrangement  of  Colonies 56 

Handling  the  Colony 58 

What  to  Look  for  in  the  Colony 62 

The  Need  for  Space  in  the  Spring 65 

Spring  Management  of  Overwintered  Colonies 66 

Pollen  Feeding 68 

SUMMER  MANAGEMENT:  HONEY  PRODUCTION 69 

Nectar  and  Pollen  Plants 69 

Swarming  and  Swarm  Prevention 73 

Excluders 75 

Supering  for  Honey 76 

Removing  the  Honey  Crop 79 

Processing  the  Honey 84 

Marketing  the  Honey 90 

FALL  AND  WINTER  MANAGEMENT 95 


MISCELLANEOUS  TECHNIQUES  IN  BEEKEEPING.  ...   99 

Caring  for  Extracting  Combs 99 

Confining  Bees 99 

Dividing  Colonies 101 

Feeding  Bees 103 

Fumigating  Stored  Combs 108 

Handling  Beeswax 109 

Handling  Queen  Bees Ill 

Hiving  Swarms 119 

Identifying  Apiaries  and  Equipment 120 

Keeping  Records 121 

Killing  Bees  122 

Moving  Bees 123 

Repelling  Bees 127 

Saving  Queenless  Colonies  and  Helping  Weak  Ones.  . .  .127 

Transferring  Bees 129 

Trapping  Pollen 129 

Uniting  Bees 131 

DISEASES,  PESTS,  AND  PESTICIDES 

AFFECTING  HONEY  BEES 133 

Brood  Diseases 133 

Adult  Bee  Diseases 140 

Pests  of  Honey  Bees 142 

Pesticides  and  Honey  Bees 145 

POLLINATION  BY  HONEY  BEES 149 

SELECTED  SOURCES  OF  INFORMATION 

ON  BEEKEEPING  AND  EQUIPMENT 154 

Books,  Handbooks,  and  Manuals 154 

Periodicals 155 

Beekeeping  Organizations 155 

Beekeeping  Supplies  and  Equipment 155 

Apiary  Inspection,  Registration,  and  Beekeeping 

Information 155 

GLOSSARY 157 

INDEX 165 


eekeeping  has  been  an  important  part  of  agriculture  in  the 
Midwest  since  about  1840.  Early  settlers  and  farmers  kept  bees 
in  primitive  hives  or  cut  down  bee  trees  to  get  honey  for  home  use  and 
for  sale.  In  fact  a  dispute  over  bees  once  triggered  the  brief  "Honey 
War"  involving  troops  from  Missouri  and  Iowa.  A  Missouri  farmer 
set  off  the  dispute  when  he  cut  three  bee  trees  in  the  border  area  claimed 
by  Iowa. 

Honey  bees  have  been  selected  and  managed  by  man  for  many  cen- 
turies. Nevertheless,  they  are  still  wild  insects  capable  of  living  on 
their  own  without  any  assistance  or  special  equipment.  Probably  because 
of  this  "resistance"  to  becoming  domesticated,  honey  bees  respond  to 
beekeeping  management  practices  in  much  the  same  way  wherever  they 
are  kept.  For  this  reason,  the  techniques  discussed  in  this  book  are  of 
use  whether  you  live  in  the  Midwest,  in  another  section  of  the  United 
States,  or  even  in  another  country.  Management  must  always  be  adapted 
to  fit  local  conditions  and  to  take  into  account  the  somewhat  variable 
behavior  of  different  geographical  strains,  or  races,  of  honey  bees. 
Differences  in  climate  and  sources  of  nectar  and  pollen,  even  over 
short  distances,  will  force  you  to  adjust  your  beekeeping  methods, 
especially  their  timing,  to  the  area  in  which  you  live.  Wherever  possible, 
the  timing  recommended  in  this  manual  relates  to  natural  events  such 
as  plant  bloom  and  seasonal  temperature  changes,  which  can  be  used 
as  guidelines  in  temperate  areas.  They  are  not  useful,  however,  in 
tropical  or  semitropical  climates.  Beekeepers,  beekeeping  organizations, 
and  departments  of  agriculture  are  good  sources  of  information  about 
local  conditions  affecting  honey  bee  management. 

Beekeeping  is  continually  changing,  reflecting  changes  in  cropping 
practices  and  agricultural  land  use.  Commercial  honey  production  now 
requires  more  extensive  operations  than  in  earlier  days  because  nectar 
sources  are  more  widely  scattered.  Fruit  and  vegetable  growers,  pressed 
by  increasing  production  costs,  are  becoming  more  aware  that  the 
quality  and  quantity  of  insect-pollinated  crops  can  be  improved  by 
renting  bees  for  pollination.  Providing  bees  for  pollination  is  hard 
work,  but  it  reduces  the  commercial  beekeeper's  dependence  upon  honey 
as  the  main  source  of  income.  After  a  period  of  decline,  interest  in 
keeping  bees  in  urban  areas  has  been  renewed.  Bees  kept  in  cities  im- 
prove yields  in  home  gardens  and  orchards.  Such  colonies  are  often 
good  honey  producers  because  of  the  diversity  of  flowering  plants 
available  to  them. 


Learning  to  handle  and  manage  bees  is  fun.  It  can  also  be  confusing 
because  advice  given  by  any  two  authorities  on  bees  is  rarely  the  same. 
Fortunately,  bees  will  usually  prosper  if  you  make  sure  they  always 
have  enough  hive  space  and  enough  food.  By  joining  state  and  local 
beekeeping  organizations,  you  can  share  your  experiences  with  others 
and  increase  your  pleasure  from  keeping  bees.  For  young  people  who 
are  interested  in  starting  to  keep  bees,  there  are  beekeeping  projects  in 
4-H  and  Future  Farmers  of  America  clubs. 


BEES:    THE    INDIVIDUAL 
.A.2STD   THE  COLONY 


The  first  step  in  studying  bees  is  to  learn  as  much  as  possible  about 
their  biology.  This  information  about  their  life  and  needs  is  required  to 
manage  and  maintain  the  colonies  properly.  It  is  even  more  important 
when  you  must  diagnose  an  ailing  colony  that  may  have  lost  its  queen 
or  become  infected  with  disease. 

Kinds  of  Adult  Bees 

The  honey  bee  colony  includes  both  male  and  female  bees  for  only 
a  portion  of  the  year.  The  males,  or  drone  bees,  are  normally  present 
in  spring  and  summer.  Female  bees,  the  queen  and  her  workers,  are 
present  all  year.  Naturally,  all  three  types  of  individuals  are  important 
to  the  colony  and  to  the  survival  of  the  species. 

The  beginning  beekeeper  needs  to  learn  to  recognize  these  different 
bees  as  quickly  as  possible.  They  are  shown  together  in  Figure  1.  Close 
observation,  repeated  at  frequent  intervals,  will  make  it  easy  to  dis- 
tinguish the  two  sexes  and  the  two  female  castes.*  The  workers  are  the 
smallest  bees  in  the  colony.  Their  abdomens  are  pointed  at  the  end  but 
may  vary  somewhat  in  length.  The  abdomens  of  workers  with  full 
honey  stomachs  are  longer  than  those  of  workers  carrying  little  food, 
but  they  are  always  shorter  than  the  queen's  abdomen.  Before  the 
young  queen  mates,  her  body  is  similar  in  appearance  to  a  worker's, 
except  that  its  overall  size  is  noticeably  larger.  As  she  begins  to  lay, 
the  queen's  abdomen  becomes  greatly  elongated,  so  much  that  her  wings 
look  short.  They  cover  only  about  two-thirds  of  her  abdomen.  In  con- 
trast, the  wings  of  both  workers  and  drones  nearly  reach  the  tip  of  the 
abdomen  when  folded.  Queens'  and  workers'  large,  compound  eyes  are 
separated  by  areas  of  hair  in  which  their  three,  small,  simple  eyes, 
called  ocelli,  are  located.  Drones  have  large,  stout  bodies  with  blunt 
abdomens.  A  conspicuous  brush  of  hairs  is  visible  at  the  end  of  their 
abdomens.  This  character  is  not  present  on  the  female  castes.  The 
drones'  large,  compound  eyes  can  be  easily  distinguished  from  those  of 
the  other  bees  because  they  are  the  largest  and  they  meet  on  top  of  the 
head.  The  drones'  ocelli  are  located  below  the  compound  eyes,  close  to 
the  antennae. 


*  All  specialized  terms  are  defined  in  the  Glossary. 


Bees:  The  Individual  and  the  Colony 


The  three  kinds  of  adult  honey  bees.  The  worker  bee  is  at  the  top  left,  the 
drone  is  below  the  worker,  and  a  marked  queen  is  the  large  bee  at  the  right. 

(Fig.  1) 

The  Workers 

The  worker  bees  (Fig.  2)  are  the  largest  group  of  bees  in  the  hive 
—  up  to  60,000  in  midsummer.  They  develop  in  the  smallest  cells  in  the 
comb  of  the  colony  from  fertilized  eggs  laid  by  a  queen.  They  are  im- 
perfect females  and  under  normal  hive  conditions  they  do  not  lay  eggs. 
The  young,  grublike  or  wormlike  larvae  receive  large  quantities  of  food 
that  surround  and  support  them  for  the  first  few  days  after  they  hatch 
from  the  egg.  As  the  larvae  grow,  they  consume  all  the  excess  food. 
The  nurse  bees  then  feed  them  small  quantities  of  food  at  frequent 
intervals.  About  5  days  after  hatching,  the  larva  is  sealed  in  its  cell 
where  it  spins  a  partial  cocoon  and  begins  the  body  changes,  or  meta- 
morphosis, that  produce  the  pupa  and  finally  the  adult  worker  bee.  The 
cell  capping  on  worker  cells  is  flat  or  only  slightly  convex.  There  are 
about  55  worker  cells  to  the  square  inch,  including  both  sides  of  the 
comb. 

From  19  to  22  days  after  the  egg  was  laid,  depending  on  conditions 
in  the  hive,  an  adult  bee  emerges  from  the  comb  by  chewing  a  hole  in 
the  capping  of  her  cell.  She  is  soft  and  downy,  and  is  not  yet  capable  of 


A  worker  bee.  (Fig.  2) 


!  making  wax,  stinging,  or  flying.  She  will  spend  more  than  half  her 
life  doing  hive  duties  in  a  rather  flexible  sequence  that  is  governed  by 
the  colony's  needs.  Usually  this  begins  with  cleaning  cells  and  feeding 
and  caring  for  the  brood  (the  immature  stages  of  bees)  (Fig.  3).  Other 
typical  duties  include  building  comb,  removing  debris,  and  guarding 
the  entrance  (Fig.  4).  Although  we  think  of  bees  as  being  very  indus- 
trious, the  workers  spend  many  hours  patrolling  the  hive  and  sitting 
idle  on  combs.  The  patrolling  probably  serves  to  inform  bees  of  the 

!  needs  of  the  colony  and  also  produces  heat  to  maintain  the  warmth  of 

I  the  brood  nest  where  the  young  bees  are  reared. 

Young  workers  begin  to  fly  from  the  hive  when  they  are  10  to  20 
days  old,  and  in  some  cases  even  earlier.  At  first  they  take  short  flights 
in  front  of  the  colony,  often  on  warm  afternoons.  These  flights  acquaint 
the  bee  with  the  appearance  of  the  hive  and  its  immediate  vicinity. 
The  term  "play  flights"  has  been  given  to  this  activity  because  the  bees 
bob  and  weave  in  the  air  while  facing  the  hive. 

Workers  forage  first  for  either  pollen  or  nectar.  They  may  change 
from  one  to  the  other  but  usually  collect  pollen  first  and  nectar  later. 
The  nectar  collectors  may  also  collect  water  when  the  colony  needs  it, 
and  a  few  bees  collect  plant  resins  called  propolis  or  bee  glue. 

Workers  live  4  to  6  weeks  during  the  active  season.  Those  reared  in 
the  fall  may  live  as  long  as  6  months,  allowing  a  new  generation  to 
develop  in  the  spring  before  they  die.  These  differences  in  length  of 
life  have  not  been  completely  explained,  but  they  are  probably  brought 
about  by  changes  in  glandular  activity,  diet,  and  the  amount  of  brood 
reared  by  the  colony  in  the  fall. 


Bees :  The  Individual  and  the  Colony 


A  young  worker  bee  feeding  a  larva. 


(Fig.  3) 


Worker  bees  on  guard  at  the  hive  entrance. 


(Fig.  4) 


The  colony  uses  large  quantities  of  honey  and  pollen  as  food,  but 
the  bees  usually  store  more  honey  than  the  colony  needs.  Only  this 
surplus  production  should  be  removed  by  the  beekeeper  (see  page  79). 
The  young  worker  bee  needs  pollen  to  develop  the  glands  that  are  used 
to  make  the  secretions  fed  to  developing  larvae  and  to  the  queen.  Adult 
bees  can  survive  without  pollen,  but  they  are  soon  unable  to  rear  young 
bees.  Wax  is  produced  by  glands  on  the  underside  of  the  abdomen  of 
house  bees.  It  is  secreted  only  when  the  colony  is  obtaining  considerable 
quantities  of  nectar  or  is  being  fed  sugar  or  honey  by  the  beekeeper. 

The  Drones 

The  male  bees,  or  drones,  appear  in  the  colony  in  late  spring  (Fig. 
5).  No  certain  number  is  produced  and  colonies  may  have  only  a  few 
hundred  or  as  many  as  several  thousand.  They  help  to  produce  heat  in 
the  colony  and  may  be  of  value  by  affecting  the  "morale"  of  the  colony 
or  in  other  ways  that  are  still  not  known.  However,  since  they  consume 
food  and  take  up  space,  their  numbers  should  be  kept  at  a  minimum. 
Colonies  allowed  to  build  combs  without  foundation  or  to  repair  dam- 
aged combs  will  produce  large  numbers  of  drone  cells  as  well  as  worker 
cells.  You  can  reduce  drone  production  by  using  full  sheets  of  comb 
foundation  and  by  culling  combs  with  large  areas  of  drone  cells. 


WWH&.-MBWSM 


The  drone.  Note  the  blunt  ab- 
domen and  the  eyes  that  meet 
on  the  top  of  the  head.  (Fig.  5) 


Bees :  The  Individual  and  the  Colony 

The  drones  are  produced  from  unfertilized  eggs  usually  laid  by  a 
queen  but  occasionally  by  workers  whose  ovaries  have  developed  (lay- 
ing workers).  A  normal  queen  lays  drone  eggs  in  cells  that  are  larger 
than  worker  cells.  When  sealed,  the  cells  have  distinct,  rounded  cap- 
pings  (Fig.  6).  Both  laying  workers  and  queens  unable  to  lay  fertilized 
eggs  produce  drones  in  worker-sized  cells.  Those  that  complete  their 
development  are  normal,  small  drones,  but  many  of  them  do  not  survive 
to  maturity  in  the  smaller  cells.  Drones  require  from  24  to  25  days  to 
develop  from  egg  to  adult. 

Another  type  of  drone  is  produced  in  some  honey  bee  colonies. 
However,  they  are  never  seen  as  adults  because  the  worker  bees  remove 
them  from  the  comb  a  day  or  two  after  the  larvae  hatch.  These  drone 
larvae  hatch  from  fertilized  eggs  that  have  a  matching  pair  of  hereditary 
factors  called  sex  alleles.  The  eggs  are  laid  in  worker-sized  cells  by  a 
queen  that  mated  with  one  or  more  drones  having  a  sex  allele  the  same 
as  one  of  hers.  Eggs  with  a  single  allele  are  unfertilized  and  usually 
laid  by  the  queen  in  large  cells  of  the  comb  where  they  produce  normal 
drones.  Fertilized  eggs  with  two  different  sex  alleles  produce  normal 
worker  bees. 

The  production  and  loss  of  these  drones,  called  diploid  drones,  is 
detrimental  to  a  colony  because  as  many  as  half  of  the  fertilized  eggs 
do  not  produce  worker  bees.  The  colony  fails  to  develop  the  large  pop- 
ulation needed  for  honey  production.  A  spotty  brood  pattern  when  no 
disease  is  present  may  indicate  this  problem,  and  the  colony  should  be 
requeened. 

Young  drones  are  fed  by  workers  for  the  first  few  days  of  their 
lives.  After  that  time  they  help  themselves  to  the  stored  honey  and  fly 
in  search  of  queens  on  warm  afternoons.  Drones  are  attracted  to  cer- 
tain small  areas,  at  a  considerable  distance  from  their  hives,  where  they 
congregate  and  patrol  while  flying  30  to  50  feet  above  the  ground.  It 
is  here  that  they  usually  meet  and  mate  with  queen  bees. 

When  flowers  cease  to  provide  nectar  for  the  colony,  either  in  the 
fall  or,  more  rarely,  at  any  time  of  the  year,  the  workers  no  longer  tol- 
erate the  drones.  Workers  remove  developing  drones  from  the  comb 
and  begin  to  harass  the  adults,  the  oldest  ones  first.  The  drones  are 
rarely  stung  but  they  are  pushed  and  pulled  so  much  that  they  have 
difficulty  eating.  Ultimately,  all  the  drones  in  a  queenright  colony  are 
driven  from  the  hive  and  die.  The  Italian  race  tolerates  them  longer 
than  the  Caucasians,  and  queenless  colonies  allow  them  to  stay  for  an 
indefinite  period. 


Worker  bees  on  sealed  brood.   The  worker  cells  are  at  the  top  left  and  the 
drone  cells  at  the  bottom  right.  (Fig.  6) 

The  Queen 

The  queen  (Fig.  7)  is  responsible  for  all  the  qualities  of  her  colony. 
She  mates  with  several  drones  and  stores  their  spermatozoa  within  her 
body.  These  drones  die,  leaving  the  queen  as  their  representative  within 
the  colony.  The  workers  share  the  queen's  motherly  duties  by  caring  for 
the  young,  but  her  genetic,  or  hereditary,  makeup  and  that  of  the  drones 
she  has  mated  with  determine  the  size  and  temper  of  the  colony,  the 
color  of  the  workers  and  drones,  disease  resistance,  honey-producing 
ability,  and  all  the  other  characteristics  of  the  colony. 

Queens  develop  from  fertilized  eggs  or  from  young  female  (worker) 
larvae  not  over  3  days  old.  In  a  colony  that  wants  to  swarm  or  needs 
to  replace  a  failing  queen,  the  old  queen  lays  several  eggs  destined  to 
become  new  queens  in  special  cells,  or  cell  cups,  that  hang  vertically  on 
the  comb  (Fig.  8).  Worker  and  drone  cells  lie  on  a  horizontal  plane. 
When  an  old  queen  is  lost,  killed,  or  removed  from  a  colony,  the  bees 


Bees:  The  Individual  and  the  Colony 

can  produce  a  new  queen  from  any  worker  larva  not  over  3  days  old. 
To  do  this  they  modify  the  worker  cell  containing  such  a  larva  so  that 
the  queen  develops  in  a  vertical  cell  similar  to  those  built  from  queen 
cell  cups.  Several  queens  usually  are  started  at  the  same  time.  Regard- 
less of  the  method  by  which  she  begins  her  development,  the  young 
queen  larva  develops  much  like  a  worker  but  does  so  more  completely 
and  more  quickly,  in  only  15  to  17  days.  She  receives  glandular  secre- 
tions, called  royal  jelly,  in  excess  quantity  throughout  her  life.  Queen 
larvae  float  in  a  bed  of  food.  This  greater  quantity  of  food,  together 
with  other  differences  in  quality  and  content,  brings  about  the  differ- 
ences between  worker  and  queen  bees,  and  produces  a  queen  that  is  a 
perfect  female  with  a  complete  reproductive  system. 

When  she  emerges  from  her  cell,  the  young  queen  is  practically  ig- 
nored by  the  workers.  Very  quickly,  however,  they  are  attracted  to  her 
and  begin  to  feed  and  groom  her.  They  even  bite  and  chase  her  within 
the  hive  during  the  first  few  days.  After  about  a  week  the  queen  is 
agile  and  physically  ready  for  her  mating  flight.  She  leaves  by  herself, 
usually  between  noon  and  4  p.m.,  and  probably  flies  a  considerable  dis- 
tance from  the  hive.  It  seems  likely  that  queens  visit  drone-congrega- 
tion areas  because  they  mate  with  many  drones  in  a  short  period.  The 
average  queen  makes  more  than  one  mating  flight  and  mates  with  as 
many  as  10  different  drones.  This  system  of  mating  reduces  inbreeding 
and  thereby  increases  the  efficiency  of  the  colony. 

The  mated  queen  begins  to  lay  a  few  days  after  completion  of  her 
flights.  Her  egg  production  increases  rapidly  to  as  many  as  2,000  eggs 
per  day.  This  high  output,  equal  to  the  queen's  own  weight,  is  made 
possible  by  the  high-protein  diet  of  glandular  secretions  provided  in 
large  quantity  by  the  worker  attendants. 

Queens  lay  eggs  in  greatest  numbers  in  the  spring  and  early  sum- 
mer. They  gradually  cease  to  lay  in  the  fall  and  do  not  begin  again 
until  January  or  February.  Winter  brood  rearing  is  normal  and  takes 
place  in  most  colonies  that  have  adequate  stores  of  honey  and  pollen  and 
a  good  population  of  worker  bees. 

Queens  may  live  as  long  as  5  years  but  are  most  productive  during 
the  first  2  years.  A  common  cause  of  failure  is  inadequate  mating  that 
results  in  the  production  of  too  many  drones  when  the  queen  is  unable 
to  fertilize  the  eggs  she  lays  in  worker  cells.  At  that  time  the  colony 
usually  tries  to  replace  her  by  a  process  called  supersedure.  An  old, 
failing  queen  and  her  young  daughter  may  continue  to  live  and  lay  eggs 
in  the  same  colony  for  a  considerable  period. 


10 


Honey  bee   queen,   marked   on   the 
thorax.  (Fig.  7) 


wmsm 


Queen  cell  cup  being  prepared  by  worker  bees. 


(Fig.  8) 


11 


Bees :  The  Individual  and  the  Colony 

Length  of  Development 

The  three  kinds  of  honey  bees  undergo  the  same  type  of  develop- 
ment, known  as  complete  metamorphosis.  Each  one  takes  a  different 
length  of  time  to  develop  as  follows: 

Oueen      Worker     Drone 


Day 

0 

0 

3 

3-5 

7-9 

9-10 

[9-22 

24-25 

Egg  is  laid 0 

Egg  hatches 3 

Cell  is  capped 7-9 

Adult  emerges 15-17 

The  Races  of  Bees 

Throughout  the  world  there  are  many  races  of  bees  that  have  devel- 
oped slightly  different  body  characteristics,  biology,  and  behavior.  In 
the  United  States  two  races  of  bees  are  most  common  ■ —  the  Italian 
and  the  Caucasian.  The  Italian  bees  have  yellow  or  brown  bodies  with 
varying  numbers  of  dark  bands  toward  the  end  of  their  abdomens. 
They  tend  to  raise  young  bees  early  and  late  in  the  year  and  need  more 
honey  for  maintenance  than  do  the  dark  races.  The  Caucasian  bees  are 
black  with  gray  bands  of  hair.  They  conserve  their  honey  somewhat 
better  and  use  more  propolis  than  the  Italian  bees.  Both  races  are 
usually  gentle  and  the  bees  are  quiet  on  the  combs.  Carniolan  bees  are 
a  dark  race  with  characteristics  somewhat  similar  to  the  Caucasians. 

The  honey  bees  available  in  the  United  States  are  the  result  of 
crossing  and  selection  of  bees  from  many  different  races  in  addition  to 
those  mentioned  above.  Beekeepers  should  try  queens  from  different 
queen  breeders  to  learn  more  about  the  behavior  and  honey  production 
of  different  strains  of  the  same  race.  Most  strains  are  gentle  when 
handled  under  the  proper  conditions.  If  you  have  bees  that  are  not 
gentle,  requeen  them  immediately  with  a  queen  from  a  gentler  strain. 
There  is  no  relation  between  temper  and  honey  production. 

The  Colony 

Social  insect  colonies,  including  honey  bees,  have  often  been  re- 
garded as  a  single  superorganism  because  groups  of  individuals  appear 
to  serve  the  functions  of  organs,  and  the  colonies  undergo  changes  as 
a  group  that  compare  with  the  lifetime  development  of  an  individual. 
To  understand  and  manage  honey  bees  you  must  be  familiar  with  the 
development  and  activities  of  the  colony,  and  the  seasonal  changes  that 
take  place  in  it. 


12 


The  brood  nest,  where  the  queen  lays  eggs  and  young  bees  are 
reared,  is  the  heart  of  the  colony.  It  may  be  only  a  small  circle  of  cells 
on  one  side  of  a  comb,  or  it  may  include  up  to  20  or  more  full  combs 
(frames).  The  areas  occupied  by  brood  on  individual  frames  are  usually 
oval  or  circular.  The  entire  brood  nest,  including  all  the  areas  of  comb 
containing  brood,  is  generally  ellipsoidal  or  spherical  so  that  it  is  readily 
surrounded  by  the  cluster  of  adult  bees  in  cool  weather.  The  bees  form 
such  a  cluster  when  the  temperature  drops  to  about  57°F.  (14°C). 
The  area  containing  developing  bees,  but  not  the  rest  of  the  hive,  is 
kept  at  a  temperature  of  about  95°F.  (35°C).  The  worker  bees  warm 
the  brood  nest  to  this  temperature  by  moving  their  bodies  and  fanning 
their  wings,  activities  that  require  honey  as  "fuel."  In  hot  weather  the 
bees  cool  the  nest  to  95°F.  (35°C.)  by  fanning  to  evaporate  dilute 
nectar  or  water  present  in  the  brood  nest. 

The  bees  store  pollen,  their  protein  food,  in  the  cells  immediately 
surrounding  the  brood  (Fig.  9).  In  this  location  it  is  near  at  hand  to 
be  fed  to  developing  larvae  and  to  be  eaten  by  newly  emerged  adult 
bees.  The  nectar  and  honey  are  stored  beyond  this  band,  or  shell,  of 
pollen. 

In  the  fall,  the  brood  nest  and  the  majority  of  the  bees  are  in  the 
lower  combs  of  the  hive.  The  honey  for  winter  food  is  above  them  and 


A  comb  with  sealed  brood  in  the  center  surrounded  by  a  ring  of  light-colored 
pollen.  Outer  cells  of  the  comb  contain  honey  in  open  cells.  (Fig.  9) 


13 


Bees :  The  Individual  and  the  Colony 

there  must  be  pollen  stored  within  the  cluster  area  for  winter  use.  This 
pollen  and  the  developed  food  glands  of  the  workers  serve  as  a  protein 
reserve  for  the  colony  until  fresh  pollen  is  available  from  spring- 
blooming  plants.  During  the  winter  the  bees  in  a  hive  of  adequate  size 
(at  least  two  deep  hive  bodies)  move  upward  as  they  gradually  eat  the 
stored  honey.  In  early  spring  the  brood  nest  is  most  often  in  the  top 
part  of  the  hive  with  empty  combs  beneath  it.  If  nothing  is  done  to 
change  this  arrangement,  the  bees  will  slowly  occupy  the  lower  combs, 
and  the  queen  will  expand  her  laying  to  all  areas  of  the  hive.  However, 
the  direction  of  natural  expansion  is  upward,  so  the  beekeeper  usually 
rearranges  the  hive  as  explained  on  page  67. 

Theoretically,  one  set  of  10  deep  combs  is  sufficient  space  for  a 
prolific  queen.  In  practice,  18  or  20  combs  in  two  10-frame  hive  bodies 
provide  more  suitable  conditions  for  a  large  brood  nest,  perhaps  because 
it  can  be  more  nearly  spherical,  rather  than  flattened  as  in  a  single  hive 
body.  The  colonies  need  additional  room  for  their  rapidly  increasing 
number  of  adult  bees  by  late  April  or  early  May  in  central  Illinois,  or 
about  the  time  of  fruit  tree  and  dandelion  bloom.  The  nectar  and  pollen 
gathered  from  such  plants  may  contribute  to  the  crowding.  The  bees 
continue  to  store  pollen  near  the  brood  nest  and  honey  in  the  combs 
above  it  throughout  the  season.  Without  sufficient  comb  space,  the 
workers  gradually  fill  the  cells  of  the  brood  nest  with  honey.  This  is 
highly  desirable  in  the  late  summer  to  provide  food  for  winter,  but  it 
is  harmful  earlier  in  the  season  when  the  greatest  possible  number  of 
cells  is  needed  for  rearing  young  bees.  The  crowded  brood  nest  restricts 
the  queen's  laying. 

Worker  honey  bees  have  abilities  that  allow  them  to  accomplish 
tasks  that  many  other  insects  cannot  do.  They  recognize  several  differ- 
ent regions  of  the  color  spectrum  including  near  ultraviolet,  which  man 
cannot  see.  However,  they  cannot  distinguish  red  from  shades  of  gray 
and  black.  Honey  bees  detect  polarized  light  and  use  it  for  orientation 
when  foraging.  Their  senses  of  smell  and  taste  are  highly  developed 
for  most  materials  that  are  biologically  important  to  them.  They  readily 
detect  differences  in  concentrations  of  sugar  solutions  and  distinguish 
minute  differences  in  the  components  of  mixtures  of  odors  or  solutions. 
Field  bees  learn  the  location  of  their  hive  and  the  appearance  of  land- 
marks around  it.  They  also  learn  the  daily  movement  of  the  sun  in  the 
sky  and  compensate  for  it  when  using  the  sun  for  orientation.  Worker 
bees  have  a  time  sense,  with  a  24-hour  base,  that  allows  them  to  visit 
flowers  or  artificial  food  sources  at  the  times  when  nectar  and  pollen 
are  being  offered.  They  can  learn  to  associate  a  food  reward  with  a 


14 


flower  scent  after  only  one  trial.  Learning  to  associate  color,  time,  and 
form  (shape)  with  food  takes  3  to  40  trials. 

The  honey  bee  colony  has  a  simple  system  of  communication  that 
contributes  to  its  success  and  adaptability.  The  system  is  based  on  the 
exchange  of  food  among  members  of  the  colony  (Fig.  10)  and  on  odors 
released  in  and  outside  of  the  hive.  The  queen's  glands  secrete  attractive 
substances  and  odors  that  are  removed  from  her  body  and  shared  by 
the  workers  of  the  colony.  The  materials  keep  the  colony  together  and 
prevent  the  workers  from  laying  eggs  and  building  queen  cells.  How- 
ever, if  there  is  an  insufficient  supply,  or  if  it  is  not  distributed  evenly 
in  a  crowded  colony,  the  bees  construct  queen  cells  to  produce  a  new 
queen.  Odors  secreted  by  workers  are  used  to  attract  other  bees  and  to 
alert  and  alarm  the  colony.  The  fruity  odor  of  the  scent  gland  causes 
bees  to  cluster  when  swarming.  It  is  also  used  when  workers  rediscover 
other  bees,  a  queen,  or  the  hive  entrance  after  a  period  of  confusion. 
Disturbed  and  injured  bees  secrete  a  volatile  material  known  as  iso- 
pentyl  acetate  that  smells  like  banana  oil.  It  attracts  and  excites  bees 
and  prepares  them  to  defend  the  colony  by  stinging  the  cause  of  the 
disturbance. 

A  more  complex  means  of  communication  may  be  present  in  the 
elaborate  system  of  movements  performed  on  the  combs  by  bees  when 


Worker  bees  exchanging  food  on  a  comb  containing  honey.  The  two  bees  in 
the  center  are  responding  to  smoke  by  eating  honey  from  open  cells. 

(Fig.  10) 


15 


Bees:  The  Individual  and  the  Colony 

they  return  to  the  colony  after  collecting  nectar  and  pollen.  These 
movements,  usually  called  dances  or  the  "language"  of  the  bee,  contain 
information  about  the  distance  and  direction  of  the  food  source  from 
the  hive.  They  may  also  contain  information  about  the  quality,  or  sugar 
concentration,  of  the  nectar.  Although  the  idea  of  a  bee  language  has 
been  widely  accepted,  many  scientists  and  nonscientists  still  do  not 
agree  that  the  language  theory  satisfactorily  explains  how  bees  recruit 
others  to  a  food  source.  There  is  agreement  that  the  movements  con- 
tain information  because  it  has  been  thoroughly  decoded.  But  if  there 
is  truly  a  sophisticated  language,  it  should  bring  recruits  quickly  and 
accurately  to  new  food  sources  under  a  variety  of  conditions.  Instead, 
the  percentage  of  success  is  often  low,  the  time  in  flight  is  far  longer 
than  needed  for  direct  flight,  and  many  bees  fly  the  opposite  direction 
from  the  food. 

An  alternative  explanation  proposes  that  odors  of  the  food  and  of 
the  aerial  flight  paths  of  foraging  bees  flying  to  it  are  used  by  newly 
recruited  bees  in  finding  food  sources  for  the  first  time.  This  idea  is 
supported  by  observations  that  few  bees  can  be  recruited  to  an  odorless 
food  source  although  foragers  already  visiting  the  food  perform  more 
frequent  and  vigorous  dances  in  the  hive  than  they  do  when  collecting 
scented  foods.  More  new  bees,  rather  than  fewer,  should  reach  the 
food  if  the  dances  are  the  primary  means  of  directing  prospective  for- 
agers to  a  food  source. 

Two  other  observations  bring  the  language  theory  into  question. 
One  is  the  effect  of  light  wind,  which  does  not  interfere  with  flight,  on 
foraging  success  of  recruits.  They  do  not  find  downwind  food  sources 
as  well  as  ones  upwind,  indicating  that  odors  borne  by  the  wind  out- 
weigh the  importance  of  information  they  receive  from  dancing  for- 
agers. Even  a  change  in  the  number  of  bees  visiting  a  food  source  from 
one  colony  can  affect  the  success  of  recruits  from  another  colony  in 
finding  the  same  source.  When  fewer  bees  from  one  colony  fly  to  the 
food,  fewer  new  recruits  from  a  second  colony  are  able  to  find  it.  Bees 
using  a  language  should  not  be  affected  in  this  way.  However,  if  the 
recruits  are  using  the  flight  path  to  the  food,  such  a  path  would  have 
a  weaker  odor  trail  when  fewer  bees  were  flying  along  it. 

It  is  natural,  but  not  necessary,  to  relate  the  foraging  success  of 
honey  bees  to  their  use  of  a  sophisticated  language.  Some  stingless  bee 
species  use  food  odors  and  aerial  odor  trails  and  are  even  better  able  to 
exploit  food  sources  rapidly  than  are  honey  bees. 

One  question  commonly  asked  about  the  dance  language  is,  "Why 
does  the  information  exist  if  it  is  not  used?"  Similar  information  is 


16 


present  in  the  movements  made  by  solitary  moths  after  a  flight.  These 
movements  continue  for  a  period  of  time  proportional  to  the  distance 
the  moth  flew,  yet  there  is  no  other  individual  that  makes  use  of  the 
information. 

These  controversial  ideas  are  presented  here  to  demonstrate  that 
we  do  not  know  for  certain  all  the  facts  about  the  activities  of  honey 
bees.  More  research  is  needed  on  the  subject. 

A  communication  system  similar  to  the  one  bees  use  to  find  food  is 
used  to  select  a  new  home  for  a  swarming  colony.  However,  the  relative 
importance  of  odor,  flight  paths,  and  "language"  has  not  been  fully 
clarified.  Scout  bees  visit  available  cavities,  such  as  a  hollow  tree,  cave, 
or  hole  in  a  building,  and  evaluate  their  suitability  as  a  home  for  the 
swarm.  After  many  visits,  the  bees  agree  which  one  is  best  and  move 
to  it  as  a  group. 

Honeymaking 

Bees  make  honey  from  several  different  sweet  fluids  that  they  collect 
from  plants.  Nectar,  secreted  by  the  nectaries,  or  glands,  of  flowers  is 
the  most  common  raw  material,  but  some  of  it  also  comes  from  glands 
located  on  the  leaves  and  buds  of  plants.  This  is  called  extrafloral  nec- 
tar, and  the  glands  are  known  as  extrafloral  nectaries.  Honeydew  is 
another  sweet  fluid  that  bees  use  to  produce  honey.  It  is  surplus  plant 
sap  excreted  by  plant-sucking  insects  such  as  aphids  and  scale  insects. 
Honeydew  honey,  called  forest  honey  in  Europe,  is  a  wholesome  product 
except  when  it  is  contaminated  with  mold  or  fungus  organisms  that 
J  darken  it  and  lower  its  quality. 

Nectar-collecting  bees  make  trips  ranging  in  duration  from  a  few 
minutes  to  3  or  4  hours.  An  average  trip  probably  takes  about  an  hour, 
and  a  bee  may  make  as  many  as  10  trips  per  day.  In  order  to  get  a  full 
load  of  nectar,  a  bee  may  visit  only  one  flower,  such  as  that  of  saguaro 
cactus,  or  several  hundred  flowers,  such  as  those  of  white  clover.  The 
nectar  is  carried  back  to  the  colony  in  the  honey  stomach,  or  honey 
sack.  This  is  a  storage  organ  in  which  no  digestion  takes  place.  It  is 
controlled  by  the  bee  so  that  she  can  either  regurgitate  its  contents  or 
allow  them  to  pass  into  her  digestive  system.  She  adds  enzymes  and 
waterlike  secretions  to  the  nectar  from  glands  in  her  head.  Nectar  also 
contains  plant  enzymes,  and  honeydew  includes  enzymes  of  insect 
origin. 

When  the  bee  returns  to  the  colony,  she  passes  her  load  of  nectar  to 
one  or  more  young  house  bees  and  returns  to  the  field.  The  house  bees 
do  the  primary  job  of  processing  the  nectar  into  honey.  This  consists 


17 


Bees :  The  Individual  and  the  Colony 

of  repeatedly  regurgitating  droplets  of  the  fluid  onto  the  partly  folded 
tongue  held  beneath  the  head.  The  bee  continues  this  activity  for  15  to 
20  minutes,  adding  more  glandular  secretions  and  reducing  the  water 
content  of  the  nectar.  The  resulting,  partially  ripened  honey  is  placed 
in  cells  in  the  comb  where  it  loses  more  moisture  to  the  air  circulated 
through  the  hive  by  fanning  bees.  When  nectar  is  coming  into  the  hive 
in  large  quantities,  it  cannot  be  processed  immediately,  but  is  stored  as 
hanging  droplets  or  as  partly  filled  cells  over  a  wide  area  of  the  combs. 
These  small  quantities  of  fluid  lose  moisture  rapidly  and  are  then 
processed  and  consolidated  into  full  cells  of  honey.  The  filled  cells  are 
sealed  with  a  capping  of  new  wax. 

Processing  changes  the  raw  material  containing  25  to  40  percent 
solids,  mostly  sugars,  into  honey  containing  an  average  of  about  83 
percent  solids.  This  rise  in  the  percentage  of  soluble  solids  is  propor- 
tional to  the  drop  in  moisture  content.  In  addition  to  these  changes  in 
physical  properties,  extensive  changes  in  chemical  composition  take 
place  during  processing.  Nectar  usually  contains  a  mixture  of  two  or 
three  sugars:  sucrose  (common  table  sugar),  dextrose  (glucose),  and 
levulose  (fructose).  During  nectar  processing,  enzymes  present  in  the 
fluid  split  most  of  the  sucrose  into  the  two  simpler  sugars,  dextrose  and 
levulose.  At  the  same  time,  enzymes  are  also  responsible  for  synthesiz- 
ing other,  more  complex  sugars  and  transforming  some  of  the  dextrose 
into  gluconic  acid,  the  primary  acid  in  honey. 

The  final  composition  of  different  honeys  is  variable  and  complex, 
and  differs  according  to  the  plant  source.  Sugars  make  up  95  percent 
or  more  of  the  solids  present.  The  simple  sugars  (levulose  and  dex- 
trose) account  for  nearly  70  percent,  and  levulose  is  usually  predomi- 
nant. As  many  as  12  complex  sugars  including  maltose  are  present  in 
small  quantities.  Although  sucrose  is  often  found  in  high  concentration 
in  nectar,  as  in  nectar  from  the  clovers,  it  makes  up  only  1  to  2  percent 
of  honey  on  the  average.  Enzymes  present  in  honey  include  invertase, 
diastase,  catalase,  and  glucose  oxidase.  There  are  many  acids  in  honey 
besides  gluconic  acid,  and  together  they  contribute  to  its  noticeably  acid 
reaction  (pH  about  4).  Hydrogen  peroxide  in  honey  is  a  factor  in  the 
antibiotic  properties  of  honey.  This  material  and  the  high  density  and 
acidity  of  honey  make  it  toxic  to  many  disease  organisms.  Because  most 
honeys  are  supersaturated  solutions  of  dextrose,  they  are  unstable  as 
a  liquid.  The  excess  dextrose  eventually  crystallizes  out  of  the  solution 
in  the  process  called  granulation.  Some  honeys  never  granulate,  while 
others  granulate  in  the  comb  before  they  can  be  extracted. 

Honey  bees  produce  only  comb  honey,  and  the  final  product  is 
sealed  beneath  a  solid  layer  of  wax  cappings.  However,  man  has  never 

18 


been  satisfied  to  have  only  the  single  product,  so  there  are  different 
forms  of  honey  whose  names  relate  to  the  different  methods  of  produc- 
tion and  preparation  for  market.  These  forms  include  section  comb 
honey,  bulk  comb  honey,  cut  comb  honey,  chunk  honey,  liquid  honey, 
and  granulated  honey. 

Section  comb  honey  is  produced  in  small,  square  or  rectangular 
wooden  frames  called  sections.  Each  one  holds  about  a  pound  of  comb 
honey.  Bulk  comb  honey  is  produced  in  shallow  extracting  frames, 
which  can  be  sold  as  a  unit  containing  several  pounds  of  honey.  Such 
comb  can  be  cut  into  pieces  called  cut  comb  honey  and  sold  in  bags  or 
plastic  boxes.  If  the  pieces  are  packed  into  jars  and  surrounded  by 
liquid  honey,  they  are  called  chunk  honey.  Liquid  honey,  also  called 
extracted  or  strained  honey,  is  separated  from  the  comb  by  any  of 
several  methods.  When  honey  solidifies  it  is  known  as  granulated, 
crystallized,  creamed,  or  candied  honey.  The  granulation  may  be  natural 
or  the  result  of  a  special  process  described  on  page  90. 


19 


BEEKEEPING   EQUHPiMEHSTT 


Honey  bees  have  been  kept  by  man  in  a  wide  variety  of  hives.  In 
the  early  days  of  the  United  States  the  most  common  hive  was  a  section 
cut  from  a  hollow  tree,  called  a  gum  or  log  gum,  with  a  slab  of 
wood  to  cover  the  top  of  it.  In  Europe  the  straw  skep  hive  was  com- 
mon and  one  model  used  in  Greece  had  movable  combs.  In  most  other 
early  hives  it  was  not  possible  to  remove  or  exchange  combs  easily 
because  the  bees  glued  everything  firmly  together  and  their  combs  were 
not  surrounded  by  wooden  frames.  In  1851,  L.  L.  Langstroth  designed 
an  improved  hive  that  utilized  a  principle  discovered  earlier  and  now 
called  the  bee  space.  He  made  a  hive  in  which  the  frames  hung 
within  a  box  so  that  they  were  surrounded  on  all  sides  by  a  space  of 
14  to  Y%  inch.  Bees  leave  such  a  space  open  but  smaller  spaces  are 
usually  filled  with  propolis.  In  larger  spaces  bees  build  extra  comb. 
Langstroth's  design  is  now  used  in  all  modern  beekeeping  equipment 
and,  although  the  dimensions  and  some  details  have  been  changed,  the 
hive  is  still  called  the  Langstroth  hive. 

Bee  hives  have  often  been  designed  and  built  without  regard  for  the 
needs  and  habits  of  the  honey  bee  colony.  Probably  the  best  design  for 
a  colony  was  the  large  hive  developed  by  Charles  Dadant.  It  provided 
a  large,  deep  brood  chamber  with  plenty  of  room  in  which  the  queen 
could  lay,  and  shallower  supers  for  honey  storage.  However,  the  price 
and  promotion  of  smaller  hives  offered  for  sale  during  the  period  from 
about  1885  to  1900  made  them  more  popular.  These  small  hives  have 
since  been  blamed  for  the  reduction  in  the  numbers  of  farm  apiaries 
because  farmers  removed  too  much  honey  from  them,  allowing  colonies 
to  starve  during  the  winter.  The  10-frame  Langstroth-style  hive  has 
gradually  become  the  standard  hive  used  in  the  United  States.  It  is 
essentially  a  compromise  between  the  needs  of  the  bees  and  a  size  one 
person  can  handle  and  move.  As  commercial  beekeeping  becomes  more 
mechanized,  there  is  less  reason  to  limit  the  hive  size  and  shape  just  for 
convenience  in  lifting  and  moving  hives.  But  the  amateur  beekeepers 
will  continue  to  need  a  hive  whose  parts  they  can  lift,  and  the  10-frame 
Langstroth  with  shallow  supers  fills  this  need. 

Many  beekeeping  enthusiasts  are  attracted  by  unnecessarily  elab- 
orate equipment  or  feel  a  need  to  modify  the  basic  Langstroth  design. 


20 


Most  items  designed  for  this  purpose  are  of  little  value.  Knowledge  of 
bees  and  the  ability  to  manage  them  are  the  two  essentials  of  success 
with  bees.  It  is  the  strong  colony  of  bees,  properly  managed,  that  makes 
the  honey,  not  some  special  piece  of  hive  equipment.  Use  standard 
items  of  equipment  to  enjoy  beekeeping  to  the  fullest  extent.  If  you 
should  want  to  sell  or  exchange  the  equipment,  you  can  do  so  more 
easily  with  conventional  hives. 

Hive  Parts  and  Selection  of  Equipment 

A  bee  hive  is  composed  of  one  or  more  wooden  shells  called  hive 
bodies  within  which  hang  the  combs  in  wooden  frames.  The  space 
between  the  cover  and  the  bottom  board  can  be  expanded  or  reduced  to 
meet  the  needs  of  the  colony  during  the  year.  Hive  bodies  in  which  a 
brood  nest  is  located  are  usually  called  brood  chambers.  Hive  bodies 
located  above  the  brood  chamber  are  called  supers,  simply  because  of 
their  location  above  the  brood  nest.  The  hive  may  be  made  up  of  any 
combination  of  hive  bodies  of  the  same  or  different  vertical  dimen- 
sions, or  depths.  Traditionally,  beekeepers  have  used  brood  chambers 
at  least  9^i  inches  deep,  but  honey  bee  colonies  will  live  just  as  well 
when  given  sufficient  combs  of  shallower  dimensions.  Amateur  and 
commercial  beekeepers  should  seriously  consider  using  hives  composed 
entirely  of  10-frame  hive  bodies  6^  inches  deep  (Fig.  11).  They  pro- 
vide complete  interchangeability,  are  lighter  in  weight,  and  are  easier 
to  manipulate.  All  the  parts  of  a  hive  should  be  the  same  width,  prefer- 
ably 10-frame.  The  parts  of  a  bee  hive  are  shown  in  Figure  12. 


Hive  composed  of  two, 
Dadant-depth  shallow 
hive  bodies.         (Fig.  11) 


21 


Beekeeping  Equipment 


Parts  of  a  typical  bee  hive.  The  parts  have  been  separated  and  identified  for 
easier  recognition.  (Fig.  12) 


22 


Bee  hives  are  available  from  many  different  companies  (see  page 
155)  or  you  can  make  your  own.  If  you  prefer  to  build  them,  make  sure 
that  all  dimensions  of  the  hive  bodies  conform  to  those  of  commer- 
cially built  hives.  Otherwise  the  bees  will  fasten  the  parts  together  so 
firmly  that  you  cannot  manipulate  them  easily.  Hive  covers  and  bottom 
boards  need  not  necessarily  be  of  the  same  pattern  as  commercial  ones. 
Simpler  ones  can  easily  be  made  at  home,  and  plans  for  constructing 
them  and  other  parts  of  a  hive  can  be  found  on  page  38. 

Beekeeping  suppliers  and  catalog  stores  offer  basic  equipment  kits 
for  beginners.  The  kits  contain  only  the  basic  tools  and  equipment 
needed  to  get  a  swarm  or  package  of  bees  started  and  to  provide  hive 
space  for  them  for  about  a  month  in  the  spring.  Purchase  additional 
equipment  at  the  same  time  in  order  to  be  ready  to  provide  space  for 
the  colony  to  expand  during  the  season.  Without  additional  hive  bodies 
the  bees  will  soon  become  crowded  and  swarm.  They  may  never  de- 
velop a  sufficient  population  and  a  supply  of  honey  to  survive  the 
winter.  In  that  case  you  will  have  to  start  over  the  next  year.  If  you 
do  it  right  the  first  time  with  adequate  equipment,  you  may  soon  be 
wondering  what  to  do  with  all  the  honey. 

The  type  of  equipment  you  should  select  depends,  in  part,  on  the 
type  of  honey  you  plan  to  produce.  The  beginner  is  wise  to  avoid 
producing  section  comb  honey  because  it  requires  specialized  manage- 
ment and  an  abundant  nectar  flow  for  good  returns.  Management  for 
producing  cut  comb  honey  (Fig.  13)  is  simpler,  the  returns  are  gen- 
erally better,  and  the  equipment  for  producing  it  can  also  be  used  inter- 
changeably for  producing  extracted  honey.  For  these  reasons,  section 
comb  honey  production  is  not  included  in  this  book.  Details  concerning 
its  production  can  be  found  in  sources  listed  on  pages  154  to  155. 

No  matter  which  type  of  honey  you  want  to  produce,  plan  to  use 
at  least  two  hive  bodies  9^  inches  deep  or  three  hive  bodies  6^i  inches 
deep  for  the  brood  chamber.  Above  this  brood  chamber  you  will  need 
two  to  four  hive  bodies,  or  supers,  for  honey  storage.  To  produce  cut 
comb  honey,  give  the  bees  shallow  supers,  S11/1Q  inches  or  6-Hi  inches 
deep,  with  frames  containing  cut  comb  foundation  without  wire  rein- 
forcement. The  term  "comb  foundation"  refers  to  sheets  of  beeswax 
embossed  with  the  worker  cell  pattern.  Bees  add  wax  to  the  foundation 
to  make  a  complete  comb.  Extracted  honey  can  be  produced  in  supers  of 
any  depth.  The  frames  should  contain  wired  or  plastic-base  foundation. 
The  6^-inch-deep  supers,  sometimes  called  Dadant-,  Illinois-,  or 
medium-depth  supers,  are  a  good  size.  They  are  lighter  in  weight  than 
deep,  9^-inch  supers,  but  you  do  not  need  as  many  of  them  to  hold 


23 


Beekeeping  Equipment 


A  full  shallow  comb  of  honey.  The  comb  and  frame  may  be  sold  as  a  unit  or 
the  comb  may  be  cut  into  pieces  for  cut  comb  or  chunk  honey.  (Fig.  13) 


the  crop  as  you  do  of  the  standard  shallow,  51%6-inch  supers.  Many 
beekeepers  in  the  western  states  use  only  deep  supers.  Although  they 
must  handle  heavier  units  weighing  up  to  90  pounds,  they  handle 
fewer  of  them,  and  all  the  equipment  is  interchangeable. 

Of  the  several  styles  of  frames,  those  with  a  wedge  top  bar  and  a 
split  or  slotted  bottom  bar  are  the  least  trouble  for  the  beginner  to  use 
with  supers  of  any  depth.  Foundation  slips  quickly  into  this  frame  and 
it  will  stay  secure  when  the  wedge  is  nailed  in  place.  Plastic-base  foun- 
dation can  be  stapled  in  place  or  held  with  a  wedge.  If  it  is  stapled,  an 
extra  row  of  cells  for  honey  storage  is  gained  on  each  frame. 

There  are  two  basic  types  of  comb  foundation,  distinguished  by 
their  relative  thicknesses.  Brood  foundation,  often  called  medium  brood, 
is  used  for  the  brood  chamber  and  in  all  frames  used  to  produce  ex- 
tracted honey.  Its  thickness,  especially  when  reinforced  with  wire  or 
plastic,  helps  make  strong  combs  that  can  withstand  many  years  of  use. 
Plain  and  wired  foundation  make  the  best  combs  when  placed  in  wired 
frames;  plastic-base  foundation  does  not  require  any  wiring.  Founda- 
tion for  honey  to  be  eaten  in  the  comb  must  be  thinner  and  more  deli- 
cate than  brood  foundation.  The  thinnest  one,  for  comb  honey  produced 
in  sections,  is  often  called  thin  super  or  thin  surplus  foundation.  The 


24 


foundation  for  cut  comb  honey,  sold  by  that  name,  is  slightly  thicker 
so  that  it  will  stay  in  place  in  the  frame  until  made  into  comb.  These 
thin  foundations  are  used  without  wiring  so  that  the  filled  honey  comb 
can  be  cut  from  the  frames  ready  to  eat.  Support  pins  or  bobby  pins 
can  be  inserted  through  the  frame  ends  to  help  hold  the  foundation  in 
place.  The  pins  are  pulled  out  of  the  frame  at  harvest  time  and  can  be 
reused. 

When  bees  are  provided  with  comb  foundation,  they  must  have 
incoming  nectar  or  sugar  syrup  to  secrete  wax  and  build  comb.  Other- 
wise they  may  cut  holes  in  the  foundation  and  fail  to  make  it  into  comb. 
For  this  reason  you  must  feed  any  new  colony  started  with  sheets  of 
foundation.  Add  foundation  to  established  colonies  only  during  a  nectar 
flow  or  while  they  are  being  fed  syrup.  Always  use  full  sheets  of  foun- 
dation, not  just  strips. 

Hive  covers  are  of  two  basic  types.  One  telescopes  down  over  the 
hive  body  and  is  used  above  a  flat  inner  cover  to  keep  the  bees  from 
attaching  it  too  tightly  to  remove  (Fig.  14,  top).  The  other  type  of 
cover  fits  flush  with  the  sides  of  the  hive  body,  and  may  or  may  not 
extend  over  the  ends.  These  simple  covers  are  made  in  several  styles. 
They  may  be  constructed  of  a  single  piece  of  j4-inch-thick  exterior 
plywood  or  several  pieces  of  wood  joined  together  and  covered  with 
metal.  Other  patterns  have  one  or  two  cleats  at  either  end  (Fig.  14, 
bottom).  The  telescoping  cover  is  heavy  and  expensive.  It  creates  prob- 
lems when  hives  are  moved  because  the  hives  do  not  fit  closely  together 
on  a  truck,  and  they  will  break  open  when  roped  tightly  in  place.  How- 
ever, the  cover  provides  some  insulation  and  ventilation  for  the  colony 
and  resists  weathering  well.  Plain  covers  are  less  expensive  and  easier 
to  make  than  telescope  covers.  They  save  time  in  manipulating  colonies, 
stay  in  place  well,  weigh  less,  and  are  best  suited  for  migratory  bee- 
keeping. 

The  hive  bottom,  or  bottom  board  as  it  is  called,  is  also  made  in  two 
basic  types.  One  is  reversible,  with  a  deep  and  a  shallow  side  to  give 
either  a  ^-inch  or  a  %-inch  entrance  to  the  hive  (Fig.  14,  top).  It  has 
long  siderails  that  sit  on  the  ground.  The  other  type  is  constructed 
much  like  a  simple  cover,  with  cleats  at  front  and  back  (Fig.  14,  bot- 
tom). The  brood  chamber  sits  on  strips  of  wood  whose  height  governs 
the  height  of  the  entrance.  A  ^-inch  entrance  is  most  common,  but 
deeper  ones  can  easily  be  provided  by  varying  the  height  of  the  wooden 
strips.  This  bottom  is  easier  to  make,  lighter  in  weight,  and  usually 
less  expensive  than  the  reversible  one.  Hive  bottoms  should  be  nailed 
or  stapled  in  place  if  the  hives  are  moved.  Otherwise  the  hive  bodies  are 
just  stacked  one  above  the  other  on  the  bottom  board.  Bottom  boards 

25 


Beekeeping  Equipment 


A  one-story  hive  with  a  telescoping  cover  and  a  reversible  bottom  board  is 
shown  at  the  top.  Another  one-story  hive  with  a  plain  cover  and  two-cleat 
bottom  board  is  shown  in  the  bottom  illustration.  (Fig-  14) 


26 


will  last  much  longer  when  soaked  or  brushed  with  a  wood  preservative 
such  as  pentachlorophenol  before  being  painted.  Be  careful  not  to  use 
any  preservative  material  harmful  to  bees  or  one  that  contains  harmful 
ingredients  such  as  insecticides  that  will  kill  bees. 

Hives  placed  on  a  hive  stand,  on  bricks,  or  on  other  supports  are 
at  a  little  more  convenient  height  for  the  beekeeper  to  work.  The  en- 
trances to  the  hives  are  also  less  liable  to  be  covered  by  grass  and  weeds 
that  can  interfere  with  hive  ventilation  and  cause  the  death  of  the 
colony  in  hot  weather.  On  the  other  hand,  hive  supports  can  be  a  dis- 
advantage. A  queen  that  falls  to  the  ground  during  manipulation  or  a 
clipped  queen  that  tries  to  leave  with  a  swarm  may  not  be  able  to  get 
back  into  the  elevated  hive.  When  several  hives  are  on  a  single  stand, 
manipulation  of  one  colony  may  disturb  and  alert  the  others.  Hives 
with  preservative-treated  bottoms  are  damaged  little  by  being  set  on 
the  ground,  and  the  preservatives  do  not  bother  the  colony.  Commercial 
beekeepers  and  others  who  move  their  hives  regularly  do  not  use  stands. 

The  design  of  beekeeping  equipment  has  changed  little  over  many 
years,  but  equipment  is  now  being  made  in  fewer  styles  and  with  new 
materials.  Hives,  frames,  excluders,  and  combs  are  now  made  in  plastic. 
Some  of  this  equipment  has  warped  in  use,  and  other  types  of  plastic 
have  not  been  well  accepted  by  the  bees.  But  the  equipment  is  con- 
tinually being  improved,  and  its  use  will  probably  be  limited  only  by 
the  relative  prices  and  availability  of  wood  and  plastic.  Beekeepers 
should  test  the  new  materials  and  determine  in  their  own  apiaries 
whether  they  have  advantages  over  the  traditional  ones. 

Assembly  of  Equipment 

New  bee  equipment  is  usually  purchased  "knocked  down"  (KD), 
or  unassembled.  The  directions  and  diagrams  furnished  by  the  manu- 
facturer are  easy  to  follow,  but  a  few  details  sometimes  cause  difficulty. 
A  common  error  is  to  nail  the  sides  of  the  hive  bodies  in  place  with  the 
handholds  on  the  inside.  The  frame  rests  (notched  or  rabbeted  areas 
at  the  inside  top  of  the  hive  ends)  also  cause  some  problems.  Equipment 
from  some  suppliers  requires  the  addition  of  a  small  wooden  strip 
across  the  frame  rest  to  give  the  proper  vertical  spacing  of  the  frames. 
Other  manufacturers  supply  a  bent  metal  frame  rest  that  must  be  in- 
stalled so  that  it  projects  upward  from  the  rabbeted  area,  not  toward 
the  inside  of  the  hive  body. 

Frames  are  made  in  several  sizes  and  patterns,  but  all  are  assembled 
in  the  same  way.  You  can  assemble  small  numbers  of  frames  individ- 
ually. For  larger  numbers,  a  frame-nailing  device  or  jig  will  make  the 


27 


Beekeeping  Equipment 

job  easier  and  faster  (Fig.  15).  Drive  nails  down  through  each  end  of 
the  top  bar  into  the  end  bars  and  drive  a  second  pair  through  the  end 
bars  into  the  shoulder  of  the  top  bar  (Fig.  16).  This  cross-nailing 
greatly  strengthens  the  frame.  Glue  and  power-driven  staples  can  also 
be  used  to  assemble  frames.  Water-resistant  casein  glue  and  polyvinyl 
(white)  glue  are  easy  to  apply  with  a  plastic  squeeze  bottle.  The  bottom 
bar  needs  two  or  four  nails,  depending  on  the  style  of  frame.  Frames 
with  one  V-shaped  edge  on  the  end  bars  are  assembled  with  the  V 
facing  you  on  the  left  end  and  away  from  you  on  the  right  end. 

Frames  are  wired  (Fig.  17)  to  reinforce  the  combs  so  that  they  will 
not  sag  and  warp  in  hot  weather  or  fall  apart  in  the  extractor.  If  you 
intend  to  keep  more  than  a  half  dozen  colonies  or  if  you  like  to  learn 
new  techniques,  you  should  learn  to  wire  frames.  A  plan  for  a  wiring 
board  can  be  found  on  page  40.  Using  such  a  wiring  device,  thread  at 
least  two,  and  preferably  four,  horizontal  wires  through  the  ready-made 
holes  in  the  end  bars.  Draw  the  wire  tight  enough  to  make  a  high  note 
when  you  pluck  it.  Start  and  end  the  wire  by  wrapping  it  around  small 
nails  driven  into  the  edge  of  the  end  bar.  Only  No.  28  tinned  wire  is 
suitable  for  wiring  frames.  If  the  wire  cuts  deeply  into  the  end  bars, 
insert  metal  eyelets  into  the  holes  or  use  a  compression  stapler  to  put  a 
staple  beside  the  holes. 


Assembling  frames  in  a  wooden  jig.    The  jig  is  inverted  to  put  the  bottom 
bars  in  place.  (Fig.  15) 


28 


Cross-nailing  the 
end  and  top  bars  of 
the  frames. 

(Fig.  16) 


The  alternative  to  wiring  is  the  use  of  plastic-base  or  vertically 
wired  foundation  with  metal  support  pins  to  hold  and  center  the  foun- 
dation at  the  end  bars  of  the  frame.  Combs  produced  in  this  way  should 
be  handled  and  extracted  carefully,  especially  in  hot  weather,  until 
they  are  fully  finished  and  have  been  in  use  for  at  least  one  season. 
Hold  the  combs  vertically  when  you  examine  them  so  that  the  new 
comb  will  not  sag  or  fall  from  the  frame  because  of  the  weight  of  brood 
or  honey. 

Fit  foundation  into  a  frame  so  that  the  upper  edge  rests  in  the 
notch  in  the  top  bar  and  the  lower  edge  rests  in  the  slot  of  the  bottom 
bar.  The  foundation  in  a  wired  frame  should  lie  on  top  of  the  wires. 
Place  wired  foundation  so  that  the  bent  ends  of  the  wires  will  be  held 
in  place  by  the  wedge.  Push  the  wedge  firmly  into  place  against  the 
foundation  and  nail  or  staple  it  so  that  the  nail  heads  or  staples  are 
beneath  the  top  bar  (Fig.  18).  Here  they  cannot  later  be  hit  with  an 
uncapping  knife.  Plastic-base  foundation  can  be  held  in  place  with 
staples  or  a  wedge  (Fig.  19). 

When  frames  are  wired,  the  wires  must  be  embedded  in  the  wax 
so  that  they  are  acceptable  to  the  bees.  Otherwise  the  bees  may  build 
irregular  cells  along  the  wires  or  fail  in  other  ways  to  make  a  perfect 
comb.  Place  the  wired  frame  and  foundation,  wires  up,  on  a  board  cut 
to  fit  within  the  frame.  Roll  a  heated  spur  embedder  along  each  wire, 
pushing  it  about  halfway  through  the  wax  or  against  the  vertical  wires. 


29 


Beekeeping  Equipment 

The  foundation  should  be  warm.  For  large  numbers  of  frames,  use  an 
electrical  embedder  with  a  12-volt  transformer  to  heat  the  wires  so  that 
they  sink  into  the  wax  (Fig.  20).  Use  it  briefly  and  carefully  to  avoid 
cutting  the  foundation  into  strips  with  overheated  wires  or  melting  holes 
in  the  wax  where  wires  cross.  Plans  for  an  electrical  embedder  and  em- 
bedding board  can  be  found  on  page  43. 


Wiring  frames  in  a  homemade  wiring  device.  A  deep  frame  compressed  with 
a  metal  clamp  is  shown  in  the  illustration  at  the  top.  A  shallow  frame  com- 
pressed against  a  wooden  stop  is  shown  at  the  bottom.  (Fig.  17) 


30 


Using  a  compression  stapler  to  fasten  plastic-base  foundation  in  a  shallow 
frame.  (Fig.  19) 


31 


Beekeeping  Equipment 


A  simple  device  for 
embedding  wires  into 
comb  foundation. 
When  the  copper  con- 
tacts at  each  end  of 
the  wooden  piece  touch 
the  wires  on  the  frame 
end  bar,  the  heated 
wires  sink  into  the 
wax.  (Fig.  20) 


After  assembly,  the  external  wooden  hive  parts  should  be  treated 
to  increase  their  usable  life.  Bottoms,  and  other  hive  parts,  can  be  soaked 
or  coated  with  pentachlorophenol,  a  wood  preservative  that  can  be  painted 
over.  In  some  countries  hive  bodies  are  preserved  by  dipping  them 
for  10  minutes  in  paraffin  heated  to  the  smoking  point  (316°F.,  158°C). 
Hives  can  be  painted  with  either  latex  or  oil-base  paint.  They  should  be 
painted  inside  and  out.  This  reduces  peeling  and  loss  of  paint  caused  by 
moisture  in  the  wood  and  does  not  harm  the  colony  in  any  way.  White 
paint  reflects  heat  better  than  darker  colors  or  aluminum  paint.  The  light 
color  helps  colonies  stay  cooler  in  hot  summer  weather.  Foraging  bees 
find  their  own  hives  more  easily  when  they  are  distinguished  by  different 
colors  painted  near  the  entrances.  The  color  combination  of  blue,  yellow, 
white,  and  black  is  a  good  one  for  this  purpose. 


Tools,  Specialized  Equipment,  and  Clothing 

Three  essential  beekeeping  tools  are  shown  in  Figure  21.  The 
smoker  is  your  most  important  tool.  With  it  you  are  master  of  the  bees 
as  long  as  you  use  it  properly  and  keep  it  lit.  The  4  X  7-inch  size  is  the 
best  of  the  three  sizes  available.  Smaller  ones  are  too  small  even  for 
beginners  and  the  largest  size  is  designed  for  commercial  beekeepers. 

Hive  tools  are  all-purpose  levers  for  prying  hives  apart  and  for 
scraping.  The  10-inch  length  gives  the  best  leverage  when  hives  are 
heavy  and  stuck  tightly  together. 


32 


Three  important  tools  in  beekeeping.   The  bee  brush  is  at  the  top,  the  hive 
tool  in  the  middle,  and  the  smoker  at  the  bottom.  (Fig.  21) 


33 


Beekeeping  Equipment 

A  bee  brush  is  used  to  remove  bees  from  combs  of  brood  or  honey, 
particularly  those  bees  that  don't  come  off  when  the  comb  is  shaken. 
Since  queen  cells  may  be  damaged  by  shaking,  a  brush  is  a  necessity  in 
queen  rearing.  If  a  brush  isn't  handy,  a  handful  of  long  grass  can  be 
used  as  a  substitute. 

A  queen  excluder  is  a  grid  of  accurately  spaced  holes  or  wires 
through  which  workers  can  pass,  but  not  queens  or  drones.  The  steel- 
wire  excluders,  either  metal  or  wood  bound,  are  best.  The  zinc  and 
plastic  ones  are  suitable  only  for  temporary  use  or  for  special  purposes 
such  as  making  cages  or  covering  hive  entrances. 

Always  use  standard  hives  without  modification  or  accessories. 
Special  bottom  boards  and  covers,  queen  and  drone  traps,  and  other 
similar  equipment  usually  increase  the  cost  of  keeping  bees  without 
providing  proportionate  returns.  It  is  proper  management,  not  spe- 
cialized equipment,  that  leads  to  success  in  beekeeping. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  wear  extra  layers  of  clothing  when  working 
with  bees  but  it  is  a  good  practice  to  dress  properly,  at  least  until  you 
gain  experience.  Bee  gloves,  either  cloth  or  leather,  help  to  put  you  at 
ease  in  handling  frames  of  bees.  Simple  gauntlets  let  you  use  your 
fingers  more  easily  than  do  gloves,  yet  cover  your  wrists  and  the  open- 
ing in  your  sleeve  above  the  cuff  (Fig.  22).  A  muslin  sleeve  with 
elastic  in  each  end  makes  a  good  gauntlet.  Make  it  long  enough  to 
reach  from  your  thumb  to  above  the  elbow.  You  can  also  cut  the  toe 
or  foot  from  a  large,  white,  cotton  sock  and  pull  it  over  your  sleeve 
with  the  knitted  top  on  your  wrist. 

White  or  tan  clothing  is  most  suitable  when  working  with  bees. 
Other  colors  are  acceptable  but  bees  react  unfavorably  to  dark  colors 
and  fuzzy  materials.  Be  especially  careful  to  cover  your  ankles  or  wear 
light-colored  socks.  Angry  bees  often  attack  ankles  first  because  they 
are  at  the  level  of  the  hive  entrance.  Any  bee  on  the  ground  tends  to 
crawl  upward  and  may  go  up  your  leg  with  peaceful  intentions  until 
you  squeeze  her.  Use  bicycle  clips,  inner-tube  bands  (Fig.  23),  or 
string  to  fasten  your  pants  legs. 

A  folding  wire  veil  or  a  round  wire  veil,  worn  with  a  hat,  is  a  good 
all-purpose  choice  for  the  beginner.  A  nylon  net  veil  is  cool  and  easy 
to  carry,  but  it  is  more  easily  damaged  in  use.  Wear  the  veil  on  a 
hat  with  a  wide  brim  and  pull  the  excess  material  away  from  your  neck 
when  putting  it  on  (Fig.  24).  Instructions  for  making  a  nylon  net  veil 
can  be  found  on  page  51. 


34 


A  pair  of  gauntlets 
in  use.  They  can  be 
used  alone  or  with 
a  pair  of  gloves. 

(Fig.  22) 


An  inner-tube  band 
for  closing  pant  legs 
when  working  with 
bees.  The  band 
closes  and  pulls 
down  the  pant  leg. 
(Fig.  23) 


35 


Beekeeping  Equipment 


A  nylon  net  veil 
worn  with  a  straw 
hat  to  keep  the  veil 
away  from  the 
face.  Note  how  the 
excess  material  is 
pulled  away  from 
the  neck.    (Fig.  24) 


Making  Your  Own  Equipment 

There  are  several  reasons  why  people  make  their  own  beekeeping 
equipment.  They  may  want  to  reduce  the  cost  of  getting  started  in 
beekeeping  or  they  may  simply  enjoy  working  with  their  hands.  In 
many  cases  they  want  a  special  item  that  is  not  readily  available  or,  if 
it  is,  the  product  is  not  suited  to  their  needs.  The  plans  and  instructions 
in  this  section  will  enable  you  to  make  some  of  your  own  equipment. 
Before  doing  so,  you  should  compare  the  labor  and  material  costs  oi 
making  a  piece  of  equipment  with  the  delivered  price  of  the  same  item 
from  a  bee  supply  company.  The  price  of  high-quality  lumber  used  in 
commercial  bee  supplies  may  make  it  difficult  for  you  to  save  money 
unless  you  produce  a  lower  quality  product  from  less  expensive  mate- 
rials. 

Constructing  a  bee  hive.  Bee  hive  construction  is  not  difficult  for 
a  person  with  suitable  woodworking  tools  and  experience  in  operating 
them.  The  equipment  produced  can  be  as  satisfactory  as  the  commercial 


36 


products,  provided  that  all  dimensions  are  accurate  (see  construction 
Dlan  on  page  38).  The  inside  dimensions  of  the  hive  bodies  and  the 
ize  of  the  frames  are  especially  important  so  that  the  completed  hive 
provides  the  proper  bee  space  —  the  space  that  bees  keep  free  of 
omb  and  propolis.  Without  proper  dimensions,  the  movable  frames 
quickly  become  immovable  and  difficult  to  manipulate  when  filled  with 
bees.  The  construction  plan  shows  the  inside  dimensions  for  the  deep 
hive  body  only.  Those  for  the  other  hive  bodies  differ  only  in  depth, 
which  is  the  same  inside  and  out.  The  external  dimensions  given  are 
suitable  only  for  equipment  constructed  from  ^-inch-thick  lumber. 
Adjust  the  dimensions  if  you  use  wood  of  any  other  thickness. 

Western  pine  is  the  best  wood  to  use  for  hive  bodies,  lids,  and 
frames.  Many  other  woods  can  be  used,  but  most  are  less  suitable 
because  of  their  weight,  tendency  to  crack  and  split,  and  other  charac- 
teristics. Hive  bottoms  made  of  cedar,  cypress,  or  redwood  generally 
last  longer  than  those  made  of  pine  or  similar  woods.  Regardless  of 
the  type  of  wood  used,  hive  bottoms  resist  moisture  and  decay  better 
if  they  are  treated  with  a  wood  preservative  such  as  pentachlorophenol. 

Bee  equipment  may  be  assembled  with  nails  or  power-driven  staples. 
Seven-penny  box  nails,  cement  or  resin  coated,  are  a  good  size  for 
hive  bodies.  The  corners  of  the  hive  bodies  should  be  cross-nailed  for 
greatest  strength.  Galvanized  nails  are  a  good  choice  for  assembling 
bottoms  and  for  use  with  redwood  lumber.  Coated  box  nails,  I1/4.  inches 
long,  are  suitable  for  nailing  frames.  Glue  makes  all  wooden  equipment 
stronger  and  longer  lasting. 

You  may  wish  to  consider  some  optional  ways  of  making  the  differ- 
ent parts  of  a  hive.  For  example,  lids  can  be  made  of  exterior  plywood 
without  cleats.  Or  the  lid  can  be  lengthened  to  accommodate  a^  X2- 
inch  cleat  extending  downward  at  each  end  of  the  lid.  The  smooth  top 
of  such  a  lid  can  be  covered  with  metal  to  increase  its  weather  resis- 
tance. When  making  hive  bodies,  you  have  the  option  of  dadoing  the 
handholds  into  them,  about  2  inches  below  the  top,  or  nailing  a  }i  X  2- 
inch  cleat  at  the  same  level  on  each  end  of  the  hive  bodies.  It  is  much 
easier  to  handle  heavy  supers  of  honey  by  grasping  such  cleats  instead 
of  handholds.  The  hive  bottom  in  the  plan  provides  a  ^-inch-deep 
entrance.  If  you  prefer  to  make  a  deeper  entrance,  cut  the  spacer  strips 
to  the  height  you  desire,  such  as  }$  or  7A  inch.  Bottoms  with  2  X  2-inch 
rather  than  y±  X  4-inch  cleats  make  it  a  little  easier  to  pick  up  the  hive 
and  may  also  help  to  keep  the  hive  a  little  drier.  The  hive  pattern  can 
be  adapted  to  make  nuc  boxes  by  narrowing  the  hive  width  to  provide 
room  for  3  or  5  frames  rather  than  10.  To  make  pallets  for  use  in 


37 


Beekeeping  Equipment 


CONSTRUCTION  DETAILS 

10-FRAME  BEE  HIVE 

(%-inch-thick  lumber) 


DADANT-     ~>p/s 
OR  ILLINOIS-DEP1 
HIVE  BODY 


DEEP  ^8 

HIVE  BODY 

Inside  dimensions: 

L  —  183/s" 

W  — 143/4" 

D  — 9%"  %» 


BOTTOM  BOARD 


3/4"  x  2"  cleot 
(optional 
in  place 
of  handhold) 


(A)  DETAIL  OF  COVER 

AND  BOTTOM 
Saw  kerfs  (cuts) 
with  fin  or 
roofing  paper  strip 
set  in  before 
nailing  and  gluing 


SHALLOW 
FRAME 


As  below,  but 
5%"  deep. 


DADANT-DEPTH 
FRAME 


SIDE  VIEW  OF  TOP  BAR 


Hf> 


it 


-19' 


7h" 

-Mr-. 


1  ^  riv  ■ 


SIDE  VIEW  OF  BOTTOM  BAR 


(B)  DETAIL  OF 
FRAME  REST 

Rabbeted  corners 
not  dovetailed. 


38 


handling  and  storing  stacks  of  hive  bodies,  follow  the  pattern  for  the 
hive  cover  and  add  a  rim  of  spacer  strips  around  the  outer  edge  of  the 
flat  side  of  the  lid.  These  will  help  to  catch  and  confine  honey  and  bits 
of  wax  that  fall  from  combs. 

Frame-making  requires  many  saw  cuts  and  can  be  dangerous  with- 
out special  equipment  and  techniques.  It  is  usually  better  to  buy  frames 
than  to  risk  a  serious  accident.  However,  if  you  decide  to  make  them, 
use  the  pattern  for  frames  with  straight-sided  end  bars.  These  are 
easier  to  cut  out  and  are  as  well  accepted  by  the  bees  as  frames  with 
tapered  or  indented  end  bars. 

Paint  the  hive  bodies  and  lids  on  all  surfaces,  inside  and  out.  This 
reduces  the  loss  of  paint  by  peeling  and  is  not  detrimental  to  the  bees. 
Bottoms  can  be  painted  after  being  treated  with  wood  preservative  or, 
preferably,  sealed  with  a  couple  coats  of  boiled  linseed  oil.  Frames  do 
not  need  any  preservative  treatment. 

Making  and  using  a  frame-wiring  board.  A  frame-wiring  board 
is  used  to  install  horizontal  wires  in  frames.  These  tightly  drawn  wires 
serve  as  supports  for  comb  foundation  and  the  comb  constructed  from 
it.  The  board  is  basically  a  jig  in  which  a  frame  can  be  held  firmly 
with  the  end  bars  or  bottom  bar  under  tension  while  special  frame 
wire  is  threaded  into  place.  A  well-designed  wiring  board  should  make 
it  relatively  easy  to  thread  the  wire,  to  tighten  it  in  the  frame,  and  to 
fasten  it  in  place.  Releasing  the  frame  from  the  board  should  further 
tighten  the  wire  in  the  frame. 

As  seen  in  the  construction  plan  on  page  40,  the  base  of  the  wiring 
board  is  a  piece  of  24 -inch-thick  plywood.  Beneath  it  are  three  cleats 
also  of  the  same  or  similar  lumber.  Two  cleats  extend  beyond  the  edges 
of  the  board  and  are  drilled  so  that  the  board  can  be  fastened  firmly  in 
place  while  it  is  being  used.  The  L-shaped  blocks  at  the  front  of  the 
board  are  spaced  so  that  the  inside  corners  of  the  L's  are  19  inches 
apart.  They  hold  the  frame  top  bar.  The  bottom  bar  fits  into  the  wooden 
i  channel  at  the  rear  of  the  board.  The  channel  has  blocks  at  each  end, 
17^4  inches  apart,  to  keep  the  frame  from  moving  laterally.  The  over- 
hanging lip  of  the  channel,  li/2  inches  above  the  board,  keeps  the 
bottom  bar  from  moving  upward.  There  is  a  thin  strip  of  wood  ap- 
proximately Y&  inch  thick  and  11/2  inches  wide  on  the  base  board 
between  the  end  blocks.  This  piece  levels  the  frame  in  the  jig. 

In  the  center  of  the  board  is  a  clamping  device  made  of  1/2  X  Y&- 
inch  strap  iron.  The  device  consists  of  two  arms  riveted  to  a  central 
lever  that  is  bolted  to  the  board.  The  rivets  are  centered  Y%  inch  from 
the  center  of  the  bolt.  The  rear  arm  is  about  9  inches  long,  the  front  one 


39 


Beekeeping  Equipment 


CONSTRUCTION  DETAILS 

WIRING  BOARD 


WIRING  BOARD 


Adapter  block  for  shallow  frame 


DETAILS  OF  FRAME  WIRING 


DETAILS  OF  CHANNE 
FOR  BOTTOM  BAR 


SIDE  VIEW 


TOP  VIEW 


& 


t3    -. r~p- 


TZJ czl 


Z7'/z- 


IZL 


^U^ 


# 


^0  C 


i 


r£ 


40 


ii 


is  9i/2  inches,  and  each  is  bent  upward  an  additional  V2  inch.  The  cen- 
tral lever  is  about  YIV2  inches  long.  The  arms  slide  through,  but  are 
kept  in  place  by,  wooden  blocks  near  their  midpoint.  With  the  lever 
pulled  to  the  left,  the  bent  ends  of  the  arms  are  far  enough  apart  to 
accept  a  frame  between  them,  about  17^4  inches  wide.  As  the  lever  is 
moved  to  the  right,  the  arms  move  inward,  squeezing  the  end  bars  of 
the  frame.  A  sheet  metal  catch  attached  to  the  base  board  holds  the 
lever  at  the  point  where  it  exerts  enough  pressure  to  bend  the  end  bars 
slightly  inward  but  not  so  much  that  it  damages  the  frame.  The  sheet 
metal  catch  has  a  Vi-inch-wide  notch  in  the  center  of  a  %o~mch-wide 
vertical  lip.  This  notch  accepts  and  holds  the  clamping  lever.  The  catch 
has  elongated  holes  through  which  it  is  bolted  to  the  base.  It  can  be 
moved  right  or  left  to  adjust  the  tension  of  the  clamping  lever.  The 
clamping  device  is  the  most  difficult  part  of  the  wiring  board  to  make. 
It  should  be  done  last  so  that  its  size  and  location  will  fit  the  frame 
properly.  The  bolt  that  holds  it  to  the  base  should  be  about  midway 
between  the  frame  ends  and  about  $x/z  inches  from  the  front  edge  of 
the  base. 

The  spool  of  frame  wire  is  driven  onto  a  splined  crankshaft  so  that 
the  wire  can  be  held  taut  after  it  has  been  threaded  through  the  frame. 
The  shaft  is  supported  and  held  in  place  by  two  wooden  endpieces.  A 
piece  of  wooden  dowel  on  a  sturdy-but-flexible,  U-shaped  wire  keeps 
the  frame  wire  from  unreeling  when  it  is  not  being  used.  The  frame 
wire  passes  through  a  metal  screw  eye  that  puts  it  in  line  with  the 
top  hole  in  the  end  bar.  When  the  wire  is  being  threaded  into  a  frame, 
it  passes  around  three  spools,  or  1 14-inch  lengths  of  1-inch  dowel  or 
other  wooden  rod.  The  spools  are  located  outside  of,  and  V£  inch  from, 
the  frame  end  bars  and  are  mounted  so  that  they  turn  freely.  Those  on 
the  left  are  centered  between  each  pair  of  holes  in  the  end  bar.  The 
one  on  the  right  is  centered  between  the  middle  pair  of  holes. 

The  board  is  designed  primarily  for  wiring  full-depth  (9i/8-inch) 
frames,  but  can  be  adapted  for  wiring  Dadant-depth  (614-inch)  frames. 
In  place  of  the  metal  clamping  device,  which  will  not  fit  the  smaller 
frame,  a  special  adapter  block  is  used  to  hold  and  compress  the  shal- 
lower frame.  The  block  can  be  seen  in  the  drawing  on  the  right  rear 
corner  of  the  board,  where  it  is  stored  when  not  in  use.  The  block  is  1 
inch  high,  4i4  inches  long,  and  1  inch  wide  at  the  widest  point  of  the 
curved  edge.  A  li/s-inch-square  piece  of  Masonite  or  other  hardboard 
extends  ]/&  inch  beyond  the  curved  side.  This  special  block  is  mounted 
just  to  the  rear  of  the  metal  clamping  device,  approximately  in  the 
location  indicated  by  the  dotted  lines  on  the  figure.  The  exact  position 


41 


Beekeeping  Equipment 

must  be  determined  by  placing  a  614-inch  frame  in  place  and  marking 
the  outside  edge  of  the  bottom  bar.  Fasten  the  curved  edge  of  the 
block  about  3/1G  inch  inside  that  line  (toward  the  front  of  the  board). 
The  block  will  then  press  the  bottom  bar  inward  when  the  frame  is 
pushed  into  place.  When  the  frame  is  removed  after  being  wired,  the 
resiliency  of  the  wood  adds  tension  to  the  wire. 

To  wire  a  full-depth  frame,  place  it  on  the  board  and  fasten  the 
metal  clamp.  Drive  a  wire  nail  into  the  upper  edge  of  the  right  end 
bar  just  above  the  top  and  bottom  holes.  Leave  the  heads  of  the  ^-inch 
nails  about  Vs  inch  above  the  wood.  Thread  the  wire  through  the  top 
hole  of  each  end  bar,  around  the  spool,  and  back  across  the  frame. 
After  threading  it  in  this  manner  through  all  eight  holes,  wind  the  end 
of  the  wire  tightly  around  the  nail  nearest  the  bottom  bar,  drive  the 
nail  in,  and  twist  off  the  excess  wire.  Pull  the  wire  off  the  spools  and 
crank  the  excess  back  onto  the  spool  of  wire.  Starting  on  the  bottom 
section  of  wire  where  it  is  fastened,  run  your  fingers  along  the  wire, 
pulling  it  toward  you.  At  the  left  end  of  the  frame  transfer  your  fingers 
quickly  to  the  next  section  of  wire,  pulling  the  slack  from  it  and  from 
the  lower  wire.  Follow  this  procedure  on  each  wire  while  cranking 
excess  wire  back  onto  the  spool.  Try  to  get  all  wires  tight  enough  to 
make  a  high  note  when  plucked.  You  will  have  to  learn  how  much 
pressure  you  can  apply  without  breaking  the  wire.  When  you  are 
satisfied  with  the  amount  of  tension  in  the  wire,  grasp  it  just  outside 
the  end  bar  beneath  the  upper  nail  and  wind  the  wire  around  the  nail 
while  keeping  it  tight  in  the  frame.  Drive  in  the  nail  and  twist  the  wire 
to  break  it  off.  The  same  general  system  is  also  used  for  Dadant-depth 
frames. 

Making  equipment  for  embedding  wires  into  comb  foundation. 
Beeswax  comb  foundation,  plain  or  wired,  produces  the  strongest 
combs  if  it  is  installed  in  wired  frames  before  it  is  given  to  a  colony  of 
bees.  To  be  acceptable  to  the  bees,  the  frame  wires  must  be  embedded  in 
the  wax  of  the  foundation.  The  job  of  embedding  can  be  done  easily 
and  quickly  by  using  an  electrical  embedder  and  a  special  embedding 
board  shown  in  the  construction  plan  on  the  next  page.  The  embedder 
heats  the  wire  by  briefly  short-circuiting  a  12-volt  electrical  current. 
The  embedding  board  serves  as  a  base  on  which  to  press  the  heated 
wires  into  the  beeswax  of  the  comb  foundation. 

The  electrical  embedder  consists  of  a  transformer,  used  to  reduce 
house  current  to  12  volts,  whose  output  wires  are  connected  to  copper 
contacts  at  either  end  of  a  ^-inch-square  piece  of  wood.  There  is  only 


42 


ONSTRUCTION  DETAILS 

LECTRICAL  EMBEDDER 
EMBEDDING  BOARD 


; 


LECTRICAL  EMBEDDER 


Copper  contact 


12-volt  transformer 


SA 


BEDDING  BOARD 


3R  FULL-DEPTH  FRAME 

>r  shallower  frames,  make  board 

i  '  narrower  than  inside  height. 


FRONT  VIEW 


VZ=& 


l"> 


\h%~ 


cleat 


K 


DETAILS  OF  END  BAR  WITH  WIRES 


43 


Beekeeping  Equipment 

one  critical  dimension  in  making  such  an  embedder.  The  copper  con- 
tacts must  be  spaced  so  that  their  centers  are  6  inches  apart  for  full- 
depth  (9V8-inch)  frames  and  approximately  2  inches  apart  for  shallow 
(6]4-  and  5^8-inch)  frames.  These  contacts  are  pressed  against  the 
end  portions  of  the  wire  that  cross  one  end  bar  at  right  angles  to  it 
(see  detail  in  construction  plan).  All  the  wire  in  the  frame  is  heated  i 
at  once  when  electrical  contact  is  made. 

The  embedding  board  is  a  piece  of  ^4 -inch-thick  lumber  cut  to  fit 
closely  within  the  frames  being  used.  It  should  be  approximately  7^ 
X  16?  s  inches  for  full-depth  frames,  narrower  for  shallow  frames. 
In  order  for  the  wires  to  make  the  best  possible  contact  with  the  wax, 
the  embedding  board  should  have  a  convex  curve  on  the  longer  dimen- 
sion of  its  upper  surface.  From  its  24"mcn  thickness  in  the  center,  the 
board  should  taper  to  Yi  inch  at  its  outer  ends.  The  cleats  beneath  the 
board  provide  needed  additional  height. 

Place  the  frame  on  the  embedding  board  with  the  comb  foundation 
(already  attached)  beneath  the  wires.  While  pressing  on  the  frame, 
contact  the  wires  on  the  end  bar  with  the  embedder.  Hold  it  in  contact  i: 
only  briefly,  a  second  or  two  at  first,  until  you  learn  how  much  heat  is 
needed  to  sink  the  wires  into  the  foundation.  Too  long  a  contact  will  I 
produce  heat  enough  to  cut  plain  foundation  into  strips  or  to  melt  wax 
away  from  the  intersection  of  vertical  and  horizontal  wires.  Before 
embedding  foundation,  be  sure  it  is  warm,  at  least  at  room  temperature. 
Afterwards,  do  not  subject  it  to  cold  temperatures  because  the  contrac- 
tion and  later  expansion  of  the  wax  may  cause  the  foundation  to  pull 
away  from  the  wires. 

Building  a  solar  wax  melter.  A  solar  wax  melter  is  a  glass-covered 
box  that  uses  the  heat  of  the  sun  to  melt  beeswax  and  to  separate  it 
from  honey  and  other  materials  with  which  it  is  found  in  honey  bee 
colonies.  The  melter  can  be  used  to  render  old  combs,  cappings,  burr 
comb,  and  other  hive  scrapings  containing  wax.  It  is  also  handy  for 
removing  beeswax  from  excluders.  The  melter  produces  wax  of  high 
quality  and  eliminates  the  need  for  the  sometimes  hazardous  job  of 
rendering  wax  in  the  home. 

The  sloping  top  surface  of  the  solar  wax  melter  provides  maximum 
exposure  to  the  sun  and  allows  honey  and  melted  wax  to  drain  quickly 
into  the  storage  pan.  Before  use,  the  entire  unit,  including  the  sheet- 
metal  pan,  should  be  painted  black  for  maximum  heat  absorption.  The 
glass  cover  with  two  sheets  of  double-strength  glass  about  ]4  mcn  apart 
helps  to  retain  the  absorbed  heat.  The  Celotex,  or  fiberboard,  insulation 


44 


ilso  serves  the  same  purpose.  Internal  temperatures  well  above  the 
nelting  point  of  beeswax,  about  145°F.  (63°C),  are  maintained  on 
varm,  sunny  days.  Place  the  melter  in  a  sunny,  sheltered  spot  for  best 
•esults. 

The  plan  on  page  46  is  meant  to  provide  ideas  on  how  to  build  a 
nelter.  It  has  been  modified  from  one  originally  published  by  F.  K. 
36ttcher  of  West  Germany.  You  need  not  copy  the  plan  exactly.  For 
his  reason,  many  dimensions  are  not  given,  especially  the  less  impor- 
tant ones.  A  melter  of  the  size  illustrated  will  handle  all  the  wax  from 
lp  to  60  hives  of  bees.  Modify  the  dimensions  to  fit  your  needs,  or  the 
naterials  available,  but  beware  of  making  it  too  small.  The  sheet  metal 
)an  should  be  4  to  6  inches  deep  and  big  enough  to  accept  excluders 
'I614  X  20  inches)  or  at  least  two  full-depth  frames  (19  X  20 inches). 
Consider  the  possibility  of  making  one  or  more  cappings  baskets  of 
'expanded"  metal  that  will  fit  into  the  sheet  metal  pan. 

The  pan  to  catch  the  hot  honey  and  melted  wax  should  be  rela- 
ively  large  to  prevent  accidental  overflows.  The  one  illustrated  is  an 
nexpensive  plastic  dish  pan  readily  available  in  many  stores.  The  wax 
an  be  easily  removed  because  it  does  not  adhere  well  to  the  smooth, 
lexible  plastic.  The  sloping  sides  of  the  pan  also  make  it  easier  to 
emove  the  cake  of  wax. 

The  wooden  brace  is  designed  to  support  the  lid  while  you  clean 
mt  the  slumgum,  or  residue,  that  remains  after  combs  are  melted.  It 
ies  between  the  exterior  box  and  the  interior  layer  of  insulation.  The 
inger  hole,  or  notch,  is  used  to  pull  it  up  into  place.  Cut  the  free  end 
it  an  angle  so  that  it  makes  firm  contact  with  the  lid  frame  when  the  lid 
|s  a  suitable  height  to  work  beneath. 

The  melted  wax  will  flow  more  easily  down  the  pan  if  the  combs, 
pxcluders,  and  cappings  baskets  are  set  on  lengths  of  metal  rods  or 
ingle  iron.  You  should  also  put  a  coarse  screen  across  the  outlet  of 
:he  pan  to  keep  unmelted  pieces  of  comb  and  other  debris  from  flowing 
jnto  the  pan  of  molten  wax.  The  honey  collects  beneath  the  wax  in 
he  pan.  It  is  darkened  and  unsuitable  for  human  food,  but  can  be 
psed  to  feed  bees  in  early  spring  (not  in  the  fall).  The  slumgum  re- 
naming in  the  sheet  metal  pan  contains  beeswax  that  can  be  removed 
)nly  by  a  hot  water  press.  If  you  accumulate  100  pounds  or  more,  it  is 
'vorthwhile  having  it  rendered  commercially. 

The  melter  is  highly  attractive  to  robber  bees  because  of  the  odors 
£iven  off  by  the  warm  honey  and  wax.  It  should  be  kept  tightly  closed 
except  when  loading  it  or  removing  the  filled  collecting  pan. 


45 


Beekeeping  Equipment 


CONSTRUCTION  DETAILS 

SOLAR  WAX  MELTER 


FINGER  HOLE 
HINGE 


INSULATION 


,SHEET  METAL  PAN 

,%"  BRACE  TO  HOLD  LID  UP 

/TWO  LAYERS  OF  GLASS  IN  SASH 

.INSULATION 


PAN  STC 

HAND 

HINC 


SIDE  VIEW 


PLASTIC  DISH  PA 
(12"  x  14"  x  6 


The  wax  melter  has  a  double  layer  of  '/^"Celotex, 
except  for  the  top  rear,  which  has  a  single  layer, 
and  the  front,  which  has  no  insulation. 


PLASTIC  DISH  PAN, 
INSULATION 


FRONT  VIEW  OF  FACE 


-20? 

BACK  VIEW 


46 


Making  and  using  a  pollen  trap.  A  pollen  trap  is  a  device  used  by 
beekeepers  to  remove  and  collect  pellets  of  pollen  from  the  legs  of 
honey  bees  as  they  return  to  the  hive  from  foraging  trips.  The  pollen 
is  used  to  supplement  the  protein  food  of  honey  bee  colonies  in  the 
spring,  either  by  itself  or  in  mixtures  with  materials  such  as  soy  flour 
and  brewers'  yeast.  Pollen  traps  are  also  used  by  people  interested  in 
identifying  and  comparing  the  types  and  amounts  of  pollen  collected 
by  colonies  of  bees.  Such  studies  indicate  what  plants  are  being  visited 
and  their  relative  importance  in  a  particular  area. 

There  are  many  types  of  pollen  traps,  but  all  operate  in  the  same 
way.  The  bees  entering  the  hive  are  forced  to  pass  through  two  layers 
of  5-mesh  hardware  cloth  with  the  holes  offset  and  the  screens  about 
14  inch  apart.  Traps  are  most  effective  in  removing  large  loads  of 
pollen,  but  they  probably  take  only  about  40  to  60  percent  of  the  in- 
coming loads,  or  pellets. 

The  pollen  trap  discussed  here  (see  the  construction  plan  on  page 
48)  was  originally  designed  at  the  Ontario  Agricultural  College  in 
;  Canada  and  has  been  modified  slightly  to  make  it  easier  to  construct 
and  use.  The  design  is  a  good  one  because  it  provides  full  ventilation 
for  the  colony  and  makes  it  easy  to  remove  the  collected  pollen  from  the 
back  of  the  hive  without  disturbing  the  colony. 

In  constructing  the  trap  and  interpreting  the  drawings,  consider 
ithat  the  trap  is  composed  of  several  layers,  represented  graphically  by 
'letters  A  through  D  on  the  left  side  of  the  plan.  The  bottom  layer,  D,  is 
a  standard  bottom  board  of  the  type  used  in  the  eastern  United  States. 
It  has  been  shortened  to  19%  inches,  the  same  length  as  a  hive  body. 
The  %-inch-deep  side  is  uppermost,  and  its  opening  faces  the  rear  of 
the  hive.  The  second  layer,  C,  is  the  cloth-covered  pollen  tray  onto 
(which  the  pollen  loads  fall  as  they  are  pushed  off  the  legs  of  bees 
:passing  through  the  two  pollen-removing  screens.  The  three  long  pieces 
of  the  pollen  tray  are  ^4-inch-square  pine  lumber.  One  crosspiece  is 
\}i  inch  square;  the  other,  ^  X  ^  inch  to  give  more  space  for  the  nails 
idriven  into  it  to  hold  the  metal  flashing.  The  flashing  helps  to  keep 
'rainwater  out  of  the  back  of  the  trap.  The  unbleached  muslin,  or  some 
other  loosely  woven  cloth,  should  be  stretched  tightly  and  stapled  to 
;the  top  surface  of  the  tray.  It  allows  air  to  circulate  through  and 
around  the  pellets  of  pollen  and  helps  to  prevent  mold  growth. 

The  trap  base,  layer  B,  is  really  two  layers  as  seen  in  the  expanded 
view  on  the  right.  The  lower  portion  is  a  U-shaped  frame  of  %-inch- 
iSquare  pine  lumber  on  which  a  16J4  X  19%-inch  piece  of  8-mesh 
.hardware  cloth  is  stapled.  The  lack  of  a  crosspiece  at  the  rear  of  the 
jtrap  allows  additional  space  to  remove  the  pollen  tray  when  it  is  heavily 

47 


Beekeeping  Equipment 


CONSTRUCTION  DETAILS 

POLLEN  TRAP 


BOTTOM 
BOARD 


(A)  DETAILS  OF  POLLEN-REMOVING  SCREENS 

5  mesh  per  in 
1"  diamel 


48 


covered  with  pollen  pellets.  Three  pieces  of  24-inch  pine  lumber  are 
placed  diagonally  on  the  hardware  cloth  and  stapled  to  it  from  below. 
One  piece  is  14  inches  long,  and  the  shorter  two  are  8  inches  long.  All 
are  U/2  inches  high.  These  allow  bees  to  move  more  easily  through  the 
pollen-removing  screens,  and  they  help  to  distribute  the  pollen  more 
evenly  on  the  pollen  tray. 

The  upper  portion  of  the  trap  base  is  a  U-shaped  frame  of  24-inch 
pine  lumber  21/2  inches  high.  There  is  a  framework  of  3g  X  24~mcn 
cleats  fastened  }£  inch  below  the  top.  This  framework  supports  the 
pollen-removing  screens.  The  front  cleat  is  oriented  so  that  its  narrow 
side  faces  the  entrance,  thus  making  the  entrance  as  deep  as  possible. 
The  entrance  opening  is  1%6  inches  high  and  14^4  inches  wide.  The 
two  portions  of  the  trap  base  are  nailed  together  as  in  illustration  B. 

The  pollen-removing  screens,  layer  A,  are  fastened  to  a  framework 
of  i/4-inch  exterior  plywood  or  other  wood  of  the  same  thickness.  In 
the  rim  at  the  front  of  this  frame  are  two  1-inch  holes  with  %fi-inch- 
wide  channels  leading  to  the  front  edge.  The  holes  and  channels  are 
covered  underneath  with  8-mesh  hardware  cloth.  These  allow  drones 
to  get  out  of  the  hive.  They  cannot  pass  through  the  pollen-removing 
screens,  and  their  dead  bodies  can  clog  the  screens. 

The  pollen-removing  screens  are  two  layers  of  5-mesh  hardware 
cloth  with  their  holes  offset.  The  rear  section,  where  few  bees  attempt 
|to  pass,  is  covered  with  one  layer  of  8-mesh  hardware  cloth  for  addi- 
tional ventilation.  Five-mesh  hardware  cloth  is  not  generally  available, 
but  can  be  purchased  from  bee  supply  companies. 

All  wooden  parts  of  the  trap  should  be  painted  or  varnished  to 
resist  the  weather. 

Put  the  trap  on  during  periods  when  the  bees  are  actively  collecting 
pollen.  You  can  expect  to  collect  1/4.  to  1  pound  per  day  per  trap,  de- 
pending on  the  colony's  activity  and  the  sources  of  pollen  available. 
Since  the  trap  takes  only  part  of  the  pollen  from  the  bees,  it  can  be  left 
pn  for  periods  of  several  weeks  without  damaging  the  colony.  How- 
ever, because  honey  production  can  be  reduced  somewhat,  you  may 
Hwish  to  trap  pollen  for  one  to  three  weeks  and  then  remove  the  screens 
ifor  an  equal  period  before  collecting  pollen  again  from  the  same  colony. 

Pollen  should  be  removed  from  the  trap  at  least  every  two  or  three 
days.  Put  it  in  plastic  bags  and  store  it  a  0°F.  (  — 18°C.)  until  used. 

All  pollen  traps  are  vulnerable  to  water  damage  to  the  pollen,  and 
this  one  is  no  exception.  Wind-driven  rain  entering  the  front  or  back 
of  the  trap  may  wet  the  pollen  on  the  cloth-covered  tray.  To  reduce 
uch  losses  you  may  need  to  devise  a  storm  hood  that  shelters  the 
entrance  without  hindering  the  bees  when  entering  the  hive. 

49 


Beekeeping  Equipment 

Ants  are  a  common  pest  in  pollen  traps.  Use  oil  pans  or  sticky- 
barriers  to  keep  them  out.  Do  not  use  insecticides  of  any  kind  or  you 
may  also  kill  the  bees. 

Occasionally  you  will  find  a  colony  that  does  not  adjust  to  the 
presence  of  a  pollen  trap  on  its  hive.  The  bees  will  cluster  at  the  hive 
entrance  and  within  the  trap  long  after  other  colonies  have  adapted  to 
it.  When  you  find  such  a  colony,  it  is  best  to  remove  the  trap  to  another 
colony  because  otherwise  your  pollen  yield  will  be  quite  low. 

Making  a  bee  veil.  Bee  veils  of  black  nylon  net  are  easy  to  make 
and  have  several  advantages.  When  rolled  up,  they  fit  easily  into  a 
shirt  pocket  or  glove  compartment.  They  are  easy  to  see  through  and 
are  cooler  than  other  types  of  veils.  Their  disadvantages  include  ease 
of  snagging,  melting  if  touched  by  flame  or  spark,  and  touching  the 
face  or  neck  in  a  wind. 

Suitable,  72-inch-wide  net  material  is  available  at  most  fabric  stores. 
The  sketch  on  the  next  page  shows  the  desirable  mesh  size.  It  must  be 
black  so  that  you  can  see  through  it  well.  Other  colors,  especially  the  light 
ones,  cannot  be  used. 

Make  a  paper  pattern  the  size  indicated  in  the  sketch.  This  size  is 
suitable  for  a  tall  person  and  a  large-brimmed  hat.  The  veil  circum- 
ference can  be  adjusted  to  fit  around  the  brim  of  the  hat  on  which  it 
will  be  worn.  The  top  elastic  should  fit  snugly  around  the  hat's  crown. 
After  making  one  veil,  you  may  wish  to  adjust  other  measurements 
to  fit  the  individual  who  wears  the  veil.  The  back  should  always  be 
shorter  than  the  front  to  help  keep  the  net  from  touching  the  neck. 
A  large  hat  brim  also  helps  in  this  regard. 

Place  the  paper  pattern  on  the  folded  net  with  the  front  of  the  i 
pattern  along  the  fold.  After  cutting  it  out,  sew  the  back  of  the  veil  with 
a  flat-felled  or  French  seam.  Make  a  casing  around  the  top  of  the  veil 
to  hold  the  elastic.  Make  another  casing  around  the  bottom  except  for 
a  6-inch  section  at  the  center  front.  Put  the  elastic  into  the  bottom 
casing.  Attach  the  center  6  inches  of  the  nylon  cord  to  the  front  of 
the  veil  with  black  bias  tape  or  seam  tape.  At  the  same  time  lap  the  ends 
of  the  elastic  around  the  cord  before  it  is  sewn  beneath  the  tape. 
This  is  the  most  difficult  and  important  part  of  the  job.  The  net,  tape, 
cord,  and  elastic  must  be  attached  firmly  together  or  you  will  quickly 
get  holes  at  each  end  of  the  tape.  The  final  step  is  to  put  elastic  in  the 
casing  at  the  top  of  the  veil  and  sew  its  ends  together. 

When  you  put  the  veil  on,  pull  the  front  down  so  that  the  elastic  is 
stretched  against  your  chest.  Loop  the  cord  ends  around  your  body  in 
opposite  directions,  bring  them  back  in  front,  and  tie  them  together. 


50 


-INSTRUCTION  DETAILS 

YLON  NET  BEE  VEIL 


»ER  PATTERN 


ON  NET 


TOP 


22"  FRONT 


MATERIALS  NEEDED 

NYLON  NET,  72"  WIDE  —  22" 

BLACK  ELASTIC,  !/4"  WIDE  — 53" 
23"  for  the  top 
30"  for  the  bottom 

BLACK  BIAS  TAPE 
OR  SEAM  TAPE  —  6" 

NYLON  CORD  —  8' 

Measurements  include  allowances 
for  seams  and  casings. 


51 


STARTING  WITH    BEES 

When  and  How  to  Start 

Spring  is  the  ideal  time  to  begin  keeping  bees.  In  the  Midwest  the 
best  months  for  this  are  April  and  May,  depending  on  the  state  or 
location,  and  when  fruit  trees,  dandelions,  and  early  flowers  are  in 
bloom.  The  reasons  for  starting  at  this  time  are  that  the  spring  blossoms 
and  the  lengthening  days  help  to  get  the  bees  off  to  a  good  start  and 
the  early  start  allows  the  colony  to  increase  its  population  in  time  to 
store  honey  from  the  clovers  and  other  major  food  sources  that  begin 
to  yield  nectar  usually  in  June,  but  varying  widely. 

Established   colonies.    A  beginning  beekeeper   should   start   with 
at  least  two  colonies  but  not  more  than  four  or  five.  With  more  than 
one  colony  you  have  the  advantage  of  being  able  to  exchange  brood, 
bees,  and  combs  in  case  one  of  the  colonies  needs  some  help.  With  too 
many  colonies  you  may  have  only  enough  time  to  keep  them  supplied 
with  supers,  and  not  be  able  to  enjoy  learning  the  details  of  the  activi- 
ties in  any  of  them.  The  beginner  can  purchase  established  colonies  ^j 
from  a  local  beekeeper  but  should  do  so  with  care.  Hives  offered  for  n 
sale  may  be  homemade,  with  poor  combs  and,  sometimes,  the  bees  may 
be  diseased.  There  is  nothing  wrong  with  good  homemade  equipment 
built  to  proper  dimensions,  but  hive  bodies  and  frames  made  without  ' 
regard  for  the  proper  bee  space  are  worthless.  The  amount  of  honey  . 
in  the  hive  that  you  buy  is  not  as  important  as  the  quality  of  the  equip-  j 
ment  as  long  the  there  is  at  least  a  small  reserve  supply.  The  bees  -' 
themselves  can  be  improved  at  slight  expense  by  requeening  the  col- 
ony. Buy  established  colonies  only  after  they  have  been  inspected  and  I 
found  free  of  disease  by  a  qualified  apiary  inspector.  Such  inspections 
are  usually  available  on  request  from  your  state  Department  of  Agri- 
culture. 

If  you  buy  full-sized  colonies,  you  will  lose  the  opportunity  to  watch 
the  fascinating  early  development  of  the  colony  that  you  have  if  you 
buy  package  bees  or  small  "nucleus"  colonies  of  three  to  five  frames. 
Also,  newly  established  small  colonies  are  easier  for  the  beginner  to 
observe  and  manipulate  than  are  the  larger  ones.  In  part,  this  is  be- 
cause of  the  beginner's  reaction  to  the  number  of  bees  present  and  also     < 

52 


because  of  the  greater  number  of  guard  bees  and  field  bees  in  the  larger 
colony.  They  are  not  necessarily  meaner,  but  more  bees  react  when  large 
colonies  are  handled.  Consider  this  difference  when  you  begin  keeping 
bees  because  it  is  essential  that  you  open  the  hive  regularly  and  learn 
about  the  inside  activities  of  the  colony- 
Package  bees.  Package  bees  (Fig.  25)  consist  of  2  to  4  pounds  of 
Dees  and  a  laying  queen  shipped  in  a  screened  cage  with  a  can  of  sugar 
syrup  to  provide  food  en  route.  They  are  produced  in  commercial 
apiaries  in  the  southeastern  United  States  and  in  California.  Order 
:hem  early,  in  January  if  possible,  in  order  to  have  the  best  chance  of 
receiving  them  on  time,  preferably  during  early  fruit  and  dandelion 
bloom  in  your  area.  A  2-pound  package  with  a  queen  will  produce  as 
^ood  a  colony  as  a  3-pound  package  if  it  is  fed  well  and  gets  off  to  a 
good,  early  start  on  drawn  combs.  However,  for  installation  on  foun- 
dation, a  3-pounder  is  usually  a  better  choice.  Packages  hived  on  frames 
illed  with  foundation  must  be  fed  continually  with  sugar  syrup  until 
:heir  combs  are  completed  and  there  is  stored  honey  in  the  combs.  This 
fnay  require  a  month  or  more  if  nectar  is  not  available  because  of  lack 
of  bloom  or  poor  spring  weather.  The  food  is  a  good  investment  because 
t  is  used  to  produce  wax  for  comb  building  and  to  feed  developing 
foung  bees.  Any  excess  is  stored  for  future  use  in  the  colony.  With- 
out such  food  the  bees  may  fail  to  build  comb  and  may  die.  Use  syrup 


\  2-pound  package  of  bees 


(Fig.  25) 
53 


Spring  Management:  Starting  With  Bees 

made  from  two  volumes  of  granulated,  white  beet  or  cane  sugar  dis- 
solved in  one  volume  of  hot  water.  This  ratio  of  sugar  to  water  is  used 
most  economically  by  the  bees.  However,  thinner  syrup  of  equal  vol- 
umes of  sugar  and  water  can  also  be  used.  A  gallon  can  or  large  jar  i 
placed  above  the  brood  nest  makes  a  better  feeder  than  the  entrance 
type  (see  page  104).  The  colony  will  reduce  its  intake  or  refuse  syrup 
altogether  when  nectar  becomes  readily  available  to  them.  Wash  and 
exchange  feeders  regularly  so  that  the  syrup  does  not  become  fer- 
mented or  contaminated  by  the  growth  of  fungus  or  other  organisms. 

Package  bee  colonies  develop  more  rapidly  when  installed  on  combs 
containing  honey  and  pollen.  They  can  be  started  a  little  earlier  in  the  i 
season  because  of  the  pollen  that  is  available  immediately  for  rearing 
brood.  The  beginner  usually  has  no  choice  but  to  start  with  foundation 
the  first  year.  In  subsequent  years,  however,  install  packages  on  combs 
if  at  all  possible. 

Package  bees  usually  are  shipped  with  instructions  for  placing  them 
in  the  hive.  The  bees  are  not  difficult  to  handle  if  you  remember  some 
important  fundamental  details.  A  complete  one-story  hive  must  be 
ready  to  accept  the  bees  and  a  location  must  have  been  chosen  for  it. 
When  the  package  arrives,  put  it  in  a  dark,  cool  place  such  as  a  base- 
ment until  you  can  install  the  bees  in  the  hive,  preferably  the  same  day. 
If  you  must  delay  the  job,  check  to  see  that  there  is  still  syrup  in  the 
feeder  can  in  the  package.  With  plenty  of  food  the  bees  can  be  kept  in 
the  package  for  a  day  or  two  if  necessary.  Late  afternoon  or  evening 
is  the  best  time  to  install  them  so  that  the  bees  will  settle  down 
quickly  without  flying  very  much.  When  you  are  ready  to  start,  place 
the  cage  on  its  side  and  spray,  sprinkle,  or  brush  warm  sugar  syrup 
on  the  side  of  the  screened  cage.  Use  only  as  much  syrup  as  the  bees 
will  clean  up  readily.  Do  not  soak  them  with  it.  When  the  bees  arei 
gorged  with  syrup  they  are  gentler  and  less  inclined  to  fly  and  sting. 

When  you  are  ready  to  install  the  bees,  put  on  your  veil,  get  your 
hive  tool,  and  place  the  hive  on  location  with  five  frames  set  to  one  side 
of  it.  A  smoker  is  rarely  needed  but  you  should  have  it  ready.  Also 
have  the  cover  and  the  equipment  ready  to  feed  the  bees  after  they  are 
installed.  Stuff  the  hive  entrance  lightly  with  green  grass  or  reduce  its 
size  with  an  entrance  cleat.  Loosen  the  cover  of  the  package  but  do  not 
remove  it.  The  queen  cage  is  usually  beside  the  syrup  can  at  the  top  of 
the  package  or  hanging  by  a  wire  or  tin  strip  below  the  can.  Give  the  < 
package  a  sharp  bounce  on  the  ground  to  knock  the  bees  to  the  floor. 
Remove  the  syrup  can  and  queen  cage  and  replace  the  cover  over  the 
hole.  Expose  the  white  candy  in  the  queen  cage  by  removing  the  cork  or 
other  covering  from  the  small  hole  in  the  candy-filled  end  of  the  cage. 

54 


Then  wedge  the  cage,  candy-end  up,  between  two  frames  in  the  cen- 
ter of  the  frames  in  the  hive.  Bounce  the  cage  again  and  pour  the 
jbees  into  the  empty  space  in  the  hive,  shaking  the  cage  back  and  forth 
to  dislodge  the  bees  and  to  get  them  out  of  the  cage.  You  may  have  to 
repeat  this  procedure  several  times  until  no  more  bees  will  come  out. 
Leave  the  cage  beside  the  hive  entrance  overnight  with  the  hole  beside 
the  entrance  and  touching  the  bottom  board.  If  the  queen  cage  contains 
ionly  a  queen  and  no  candy,  or  if  you  want  to  use  the  fast-release 
method,  shake  the  bees  into  the  box  as  described  above.  Then  sprinkle 
syrup  on  the  queen  cage  to  wet  the  queen  and  prevent  her  from  flying. 
Hold  the  queen  cage  down  in  the  hive,  remove  the  screen,  and  drop  the 
queen  among  the  bees.  When  the  queen  is  in,  quickly  but  gently  replace 
the  frames  in  the  hive  and  put  the  feeder  in  place.  Whatever  method 
you  use  to  introduce  the  queen,  leave  the  hive  alone  for  at  least  5  days, 
except  to  refill  the  feeder  if  needed.  Then,  on  a  warm  afternoon,  take  a 
brief  look  at  the  colony.  Use  only  a  little  smoke  and  handle  the  bees 
|and  equipment  gently.  Look  primarily  for  eggs  and  larvae  that  indicate 
[the  queen  has  been  accepted  and  is  laying.  Remove  the  queen  cage  after 
checking  it  to  be  sure  it  no  longer  contains  the  queen.  Close  the  hive 
quietly  after  checking  the  syrup  supply.  Any  colony  without  a  queen 
should  be  given  another  one  without  delay  to  avoid  losing  the  entire 
colony. 

Nucleus  colonies.  Another  way  to  start  is  to  purchase  a  nucleus, 
a  complete  small  colony  (Fig.  26).  A  nucleus,  with  three  to  five  frames 
pf  brood,  bees,  and  a  queen,  compares  in  price  with  package  bees  and 
has  the  advantage  of  having  developing  bees  that  will  quickly  increase 
the  size  of  the  colony.  In  purchasing  nuclei  locally,  be  sure  they  are 
ifrom  colonies  that  have  been  inspected  for  disease.  Nuclei  may  carry  a 
flat  price  or,  sometimes,  a  lower  price  that  requires  an  exchange  of  an 
equal  number  of  frames  of  foundation.  The  frames  of  brood  and  bees 
can  be  placed  into  your  prepared  equipment.  The  colony  will  need 
incoming  nectar  or  sugar  syrup  until  all  its  combs  are  completed.  (See 
page  25  or  page  103.) 

Other  sources  of  bees.  Honey  bee  colonies,  together  with  their 
combs,  can  be  transferred  from  a  tree  or  house  into  a  modern  hive. 
However,  because  of  the  amount  of  work  involved  and  the  difficulty  of 
obtaining  good  combs,  you  should  avoid  this  method  of  obtaining  bees 
unless  you  have  no  alternative.  Swarms  also  can  be  used  to  establish 
iyour  first  colony  or  to  provide  additional  new  colonies  for  your  apiary. 
They  are  not  usually  available  as  early  in  the  season  as  package  bees, 
jwhich  are  more  suitable  for  an  early  spring  start.  Most  swarms  con- 
tain old  queens  that  should  be  replaced  during  the  summer. 

55 


Spring  Management:  Starting  With  Bees 


Opening  a  small 
hive,  or  "nuc  box,'1 
containing  a  three- 
frame  nucleus  col 
ony  of  bees. 

(Fig.  26) 


Location  and  Arrangement  of  Colonies 

The  location  and  arrangement  of  an  apiary  is  important  to  the  bees, 
to  the  owner  of  the  bees,  and  to  the  people  and  animals  close-by.  Bees 
are  affected  by  the  exposure  of  the  hive  in  relation  to  wind,  sun,  and 
the  surface  on  which  the  hive  is  placed.  Protecting  hives  from  prevail- 
ing winds,  especially  in  winter,  will  result  in  stronger  colonies.  Hives 
should  be  located  so  that  the  sun  hits  them  at  least  in  the  morning  and 
early  afternoon.  In  the  Midwest,  colonies  are  rarely  damaged  by  being 
in  full  sun,  but  afternoon  shade  is  beneficial.  With  shaded  hives,  the 
bees  may  forage  better  because  fewer  bees  are  required  to  cool  the 
hive  and  to  carry  water  for  evaporation.  Reflected  heat  from  around 
the  hive  also  affects  the  colony.  Grass  or  other  ground  covers  reflect 
less  heat  than  exposed  soil.  Asphalt  areas  or  tarred  roofs  are  not  suit-i 
able  sites  for  hives.  Never  place  colonies  in  low  areas  subject  to  flooding' 
or  where  water  stands  after  heavy  rains. 

Traditionally,  hives  in  apiaries  have  always  been  arranged  in 
straight  rows.  It  is  much  better  to  place  the  hives  in  some  irregular 
pattern  so  that  field  bees  are  more  likely  to  return  to  their  own  colonies 

56 


With  hives  in  a  straight  row,  foragers  drift  to  the  end  hives  and  in- 
:rease  their  populations  at  the  expense  of  the  colonies  in  the  center  of 
;he  rows.  For  convenience,  the  hives  can  be  arranged  in  pairs  about  6 
inches  apart.  Pairs  of  hives  can  be  separated  from  one  another  by 
several  feet.  A  semicircle  or  U-shaped  arrangement  reduces  drifting 
md  makes  it  easy  to  handle  the  colonies  with  a  hive  loader. 

Flowering  plants  within  about  a  mile  of  the  colony  are  important  to 
:ts  success.  A  good  apiary  location  should  have  spring  nectar  and  pollen 
Dlants  as  well  as  plants  that  provide  the  main  nectar  source  later  in  the 
year.  Ornamental  trees  and  shrubs  provide  early  pollen  and  nectar  for 
Dees  in  or  near  cities  and  towns.  As  a  result  the  colonies  develop  faster 
:han  in  areas  of  open  farmland.  Later  in  the  season  a  farm-based  col- 
3ny  may  have  the  advantage  of  more  clovers  and  other  crops  that  pro- 
duce nectar.  Remember  this  difference  if  you  have  to  choose  between 
:wo  locations.  Also  consider  the  possibility  of  moving  hives  to  take 
advantage  of  different  areas  with  more  available  nectar  and  pollen 
olants.  There  is  a  saying  that  good  locations  make  good  beekeepers. 
Commercial  beekeepers  must  seek  and  test  new  locations  regularly. 

When  locating  the  hives,  you  also  need  to  consider  the  conditions 
[mder  which  you  will  have  to  work  with  the  bees.  Just  keeping  the  bees 
n  a  sunny  spot  will  help  because  they  will  be  easier  to  handle  if  the 
:olony  is  warm  and  flying  well.  Don't  put  hives  under  a  tree  or  in 
[similar  spots  where  you  cannot  stand  comfortably  to  open  them.  Since 
you  will  manipulate  the  hives  from  the  side,  leave  space  on  at  least  one 
side  for  standing  and  for  handling  equipment.  You  will  enjoy  the  bees 
'nost  if  you  look  within  the  hive  regularly  —  at  least  weekly  in  good 
weather.  For  this  reason,  keep  hives  as  close  to  home  as  possible  where 
you  can  observe  them  readily.  Obviously,  not  everyone  can  keep  several 
:olonies  in  the  backyard,  but  you  are  more  likely  to  find  the  time  to 
'naster  them  if  they  are  close-by. 

A  final  consideration  in  locating  your  colony  is  an  important  one. 
pees  can  be  a  nuisance  in  several  ways  wherever  they  are  kept.  How- 
ever, you  can  reduce  or  prevent  problems  by  planning  ahead.  Bees  are 
liable  to  sting  people  and  animals  in  the  vicinity  of  their  hive  and  in 
':he  flight  path  between  it  and  the  plants  they  visit.  To  offset  this  ten- 
dency, try  to  screen  the  hive  or  apiary  to  make  the  bees  fly  above  the 
[leads  of  passersby.  Bees  also  spot  cars,  clothing,  and  buildings  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  hive  by  releasing  their  body  wastes  in  flight.  Spotting 
jtrom  a  single  colony  is  not  serious  but  several  colonies  flying  largely  in 
ine  direction  may  make  a  car  or  a  house  unsightly  in  a  short  time. 
When  nectar  is  not  available  bees  cause  problems  by  visiting  sources  of 
vater  such  as  water  faucets,  children's  wading  pools,  and  bird  baths. 

57 


Spring  Management:  Starting  With  Bees 


A  honey  bee  waterer  filled  with  crushed  rock.    A  float  valve  controls  the 
flow  of  water  from  a  tank  to  which  the  waterer  is  connected  by  a  hose. 

(Fig.  27) 


Once  they  become  accustomed  to  a  watering  place,  they  will  continue  to 
use  it  all  during  the  flying  season.  Water  must  always  be  available 
close  to  the  hives,  starting  the  day  a  colony  is  established  or  moved. 
Provide  a  tank  or  pan  with  something  in  it  on  which  the  bees  can  land. 
Cork  floats  or  crushed  rock  can  be  used  for  this  purpose  (Fig.  27). 
A  hose  or  faucet  dripping  onto  a  board  or  cement  slab  is  also  suitable. 

Handling  the  Colony 

The  beginner  with  bees  is  naturally  reluctant  at  first  to  spend  much 
time  looking  at  the  colony  within  the  hive  and  is  usually  a  little  over- 
cautious about  handling  the  bees  and  about  damaging  the  colony.  With 
proper  clothing  and  equipment  there  is  no  reason  to  hesitate.  And  don't 
worry  about  the  colony  —  it  can  be  damaged  far  more  by  neglect  than  by 
too  much  attention. 

If  you  have  been  stung  by  a  bee  without  more  effect  than  the  usual 
swelling,  you  have  little  to  worry  about  in  handling  a  colony.  A  few 
people,  however,  react  strongly  to  bee  stings  and  may  have  trouble 
breathing ;  they  may  even  go  into  shock  or  unconsciousness.  When  this 
happens  the  person  should  be  taken  immediately  to  a  doctor  for  treat- 
ment with  adrenalin   (epinephrine).  The  effect  of  a  bee  sting  can  be 

58 


reduced  by  promptly  removing  the  stinger.  Scrape  it  off,  being  careful 
not  to  squeeze  it  and  drive  additional  venom  into  the  skin.  When  you 
are  stung  while  handling  bees,  quickly  remove  the  sting  and  smoke  the 
spot.  The  smoke  repels  bees  and  covers  the  odor  of  the  sting  that  other- 
wise may  attract  bees  to  sting  the  same  spot.  It  is  also  a  good  idea  to 
smoke  your  hands,  gloves,  and  ankles  before  you  begin  handling  a  colony. 

Before  opening  a  hive,  you  need  to  light  the  smoker.  It  is  essentially 
a  firebox  with  a  grate  and  a  bellows.  To  work  properly  and  to  provide 
thick,  cool  smoke  it  must  have  coals  above  the  grate  and  unburned 
material  above  them.  A  burlap  sack  cut  into  strips  makes  good  smoker 
fuel.  Rotten  or  pitchy  wood,  corn  cobs,  and  shavings  are  also  suitable. 
Light  a  small  quantity  of  fuel  and  puff  the  bellows  until  the  material 
flames.  Add  more  pieces,  while  puffing  the  bellows,  until  the  barrel  of 
the  smoker  is  full  but  not  packed  tightly.  Once  started  well,  a  smoker 
will  not  go  out  when  you  need  it.  Refill  it  and  pack  it  down  with  your 
hive  tool  as  you  work.  Keep  the  smoke  cool  and  thick. 

After  putting  on  your  veil,  approach  the  hive  from  the  rear  and 
work  from  either  side.  If  several  colonies  or  rows  of  colonies  face  the 
same  direction,  examine  the  front  hive  or  row  first  so  that  you  later 
work  behind  the  disturbed  colonies.  Avoid  jarring  the  hive  or  setting 
the  smoker  on  it  before  opening  the  hive.  Blow  several  puffs  of  smoke 
into  the  hive  entrance  and  into  any  other  hive  openings  such  as  auger 
holes  or  large  cracks  through  which  bees  can  crawl.  The  smoke  repels 
and  distracts  the  guard  bees.  Pry  the  cover  up  slowly  with  the  hive  tool, 
hold  the  edge  up  2  or  3  inches,  and  blow  several  good  puffs  of  smoke 
beneath  it.  With  too  much  smoke  you  can  make  bees  run  and  "boil"  out 
of  the  hive.  But  it  is  better  to  use  plenty  of  smoke,  even  too  much, 
while  you  are  learning  to  handle  bees,  than  to  use  too  little.  You  will 
soon  learn  to  gauge  how  much  is  needed  by  observing  the  actions  of 
the  bees.  On  warm  days  when  a  nectar  flow  is  in  progress,  you  need 
very  little  smoke.  More  smoke  than  usual  is  needed  in  cool  and  cloudy 
weather. 

Once  the  cover  or  a  hive  body  is  lifted,  remove  it  without  letting  it 
back  down  in  place.  In  this  way  you  crush  fewer  bees  and  alarm  the 
colony  less.  Place  the  cover,  underside  up,  on  the  ground  close  beside 
you  toward  the  rear  of  the  hive.  In  this  position  it  serves  as  a  place  to 
put  the  second  story  when  you  look  at  the  bottom  brood  chamber  of  a 
two-story  hive  (Fig.  28).  If  you  want  to  look  at  both  hive  bodies, 
separate  them,  using  smoke,  and  look  at  the  lower  one  first.  Otherwise 
many  bees  move  to  the  lower  body  and  make  it  harder  for  you  to 
examine  the  combs.  Smoke  the  bees  in  the  top  hive  body  before  you 
put  it  back  on  the  lower  one. 

59 


Spring  Management:  Starting  With  Bees 


Examining  a  two-story  colony  of  bees.  The  top  hive  body  has  been  placed 
on  the  inverted  cover  at  the  rear  of  the  hive.  A  frame  on  the  edge  of  the 
brood  nest  is  being  removed.  (Fig.  28) 


With  the  cover  off,  you  should  be  able  to  see  the  area  with  the 
greatest  number  of  bees,  especially  in  a  package  colony  or  nucleus. 
This  area  is  the  brood  nest  where  the  queen  and  developing  bees  are' 
located.  To  look  at  the  colony,  you  must  first  loosen  and  remove  a 
frame  at  the  edge  of  the  brood  nest  or,  in  large  colonies,  the  first  or 
second  frame  from  the  edge  of  the  hive  (Fig.  28).  Pry  the  frames 
apart  with  the  straight  end  of  the  hive  tool.  New  frames  separate 
easily,  but  you  may  have  to  force  older  ones  apart  at  the  end  bars  in 
order  to  break  the  bits  of  comb  and  propolis  holding  them. 

Pull  the  first  frame  slowly  out  of  the  hive,  look  briefly  for  the 
queen  and,  if  she  is  not  on  the  frame,  set  it  on  end  against  the  opposite 
side  of  the  hive  near  the  entrance  (Fig.  29).  If  the  queen  is  on  the 
frame,  it  is  better  not  to  set  the  frame  outside  the  hive  where  she  may 
fall  on  the  ground.  The  rest  of  the  frames  can  then  be  examined  and 
replaced  in  order.  Hold  the  combs  above  the  colony  when  looking  at 
them,  with  the  comb  surface  vertical.  Pollen  and  nectar  may  fall  from 
combs  held  horizontally.  To  look  at  the  opposite  side  of  a  comb,  raise 
or  lower  one  end  until  the  top  bar  is  vertical.  Pivot  the  frame  180  de- 
grees and  bring  the  top  bar  back  to  a  horizontal  position.  Repeat  the  i 
process  before  replacing  the  comb  in  the  hive.  Put  the  first  frame  back 
in  its  original  position. 

One  application  of  smoke  usually  lasts  for  several  minutes.  Then 
you  may  notice  bees  lining  up  along  the  tops  of  the  frames  looking  at 
you.  Before  they  decide  to  fly  at  you,  give  them  a  puff  or  two  of  smoke 


60 


to  drive  them  back  down.  To  close  the  hive,  smoke  the  bees  at  the  top 
of  the  hive,  strike  the  cover  on  the  ground  in  front  of  the  colony  to 
knock  off  adhering  bees,  and  lower  the  cover  slowly  into  place.  When 
putting  any  equipment  with  bees  in  it  back  together,  pause  slightly  just 
before  the  parts  touch;  most  of  the  bees  will  move  out  of  the  way. 

The  standard  hive  holds  10  frames  with  a  little  extra  space  when 
they  are  new.  In  a  short  time,  additional  wax  and  propolis  make  it 
difficult  to  remove  the  individual  frames.  It  is  better  to  violate  the 
bee-space  concept  and  use  nine  frames  than  to  fight  with  tightly  stuck 
frames.  The  18  combs  of  a  two-story  brood  chamber  give  the  queen 
plenty  of  room  in  which  to  lay,  and  the  thicker  combs  of  honey  in  the 


Placing  a  frame  beside  the  hive  before  examining  the  lower  brood  chamber. 
The  hive  tool  is  kept  in  the  hand  when  manipulating  frames,  and  the  smoker 
is  held  between  the  legs  ready  for  use.  (Fig.  29) 


61 


Spring  Management:  Starting  With  Bees 

supers  are  easy  to  uncap.  Full  hive  bodies  of  foundation,  whether  for 
brood  combs  or  for  honey  production,  should  contain  10  frames.  The 
extra  brood  comb  can  be  removed  later  when  it  is  completed.  Use  nine 
frames  per  hive  body  when  only  a  few  frames  of  foundation  are  added, 
and  push  the  frames  together  toward  the  center  of  the  hive.  With  the 
wider  spacing  the  bees  may  build  undesirable  comb  between  the  sheets 
of  foundation. 


What  to  Look  for  in  the  Colony 

Above  all,  most  beekeepers  want  to  see  the  queen  bee  in  the  colony. 
Finding  her  is  usually  easier  in  a  small  colony  than  in  a  large  one.  In 
either  case,  she  is  sometimes  elusive  and  may  be  found  on  the  wall  of 
the  hive  or  on  the  bottom  board  instead  of  on  the  combs.  You  can  find 
the  queen  most  easily  by  smoking  the  colony  lightly  and  looking  quickly 
at  all  the  combs  within  the  brood  nest.  She  is  often  found  on  a  comb 
containing  eggs,  or  on  one  with  the  cells  that  have  been  cleaned  and  are 
ready  to  receive  eggs.  The  quality  of  the  queen  can  be  judged  without 
seeing  her  by  the  pattern  in  which  she  lays  her  eggs  in  the  comb.  Large 
solid  areas  of  sealed  brood,  and  concentric  rings  of  eggs  and  larvae  of 
different  ages  are  the  signs  of  a  good  queen.  It  takes  practice  to  rec- 
ognize eggs  and  young  larvae  at  the  base  of  the  cells;  learn  to  identify 
them  readily.  (See  Figure  30.)  Shake  the  bees  off  a  frame  into  the 
hive  in  order  to  see  details  in  the  comb  more  easily.  You  can  make 
the  bees  move  away  from  an  area  of  comb  by  touching  them  lightly  on 
their  backs  with  your  finger  or  the  flat  end  of  a  hive  tool. 

The  brood  pattern  should  be  solid,  with  few  open  or  unused  cells 
(Fig.  31).  A  spotted  pattern  may  indicate  that  the  queen  had  a  sex 
allele  the  same  as  one  or  more  of  the  drones  with  which  she  mated. 
Such  a  queen  should  be  replaced.  The  egg-laying  behavior  of  the  queen 
may  produce  a  spotted  brood  pattern  when  she  does  not  fill  all  the 
adjoining  cells  with  eggs.  She  also  should  be  replaced.  Brood  diseases 
kill  larvae  and  pupae  and  create  an  uneven,  spotted  appearance  of  the 
brood  combs.  As  explained  in  the  section  on  diseases,  you  must  learn 
to  detect  diseases  or,  at  least,  to  recognize  abnormal  larvae  and  pupae. 
(See  page  133.)  By  doing  so,  you  will  know  when  to  ask  for  help  in 
identifying  the  disease,  or  you  may  be  able  to  diagnose  it  yourself  by 
comparing  the  symptoms  with  the  descriptions  of  brood  diseases.  Proper 
diagnosis  and  control  of  disease,  especially  American  foulbrood,  is 
extremely  important.  Otherwise  you  may  lose  all  your  bees  and  spread 
infection  to  other  colonies  within  flight  range  of  your  apiary. 


62 


£ggs  in  new  worker  comb  are  shown  at  the  top,  and  mature  worker  larvae 
learly  ready  to  be  sealed  in  their  cells  are  shown  in  the  center.  The  bottom 
llustration  shows  worker  pupae  with  their  eyes  colored;  the  cell  cappings 
lave  been  removed  to  expose  the  developing  bees.  (Fig.  30) 

63 


Spring  Management:  Starting  With  Bees 


A  comb  from  the  brood  nest  showing  a  good  pattern  of  sealed  brood.  Young 
bees  have  emerged  from  the  center  cells.  The  queen  will  lay  eggs  in  the 
center  cells  as  soon  as  they  have  been  cleaned  and  polished.  (Fig.  31) 


The  brood  nest  of  the  colony  is  an  ellipsoidal  or  spherical  area 
within  the  frames.  The  comb  in  the  center  of  the  brood  nest  has  a  large 
area  of  brood  on  each  side.  The  combs  toward  the  outer  edges  of  the 
nest  have  smaller  and  smaller  brood  areas  until  the  ones  on  the  edge  of 
the  nest  have  only  pollen  and  honey  without  brood.  It  is  important  to 
keep  these  combs  (frames)  in  order  in  a  small  colony,  especially  when 
the  temperature  may  go  below  57°F.  (14°C),  the  clustering  tempera- 
ture of  a  colony.  If  you  put  a  large  frame  of  brood  near  the  edge  of 
the  cluster,  the  bees  may  not  be  able  to  keep  it  covered  and  warm 
because  the  shape  of  the  brood  nest  has  been  changed.  Eggs  and  de- 
veloping bees  can  be  injured  or  killed  by  being  chilled.  In  large  colonies, 
and  during  warm  weather,  the  order  of  the  combs  is  not  as  important. 
However,  it  is  best  to  keep  brood  combs  together,  with  combs  of  pollen 
and  honey  on  the  edges  and  above  the  brood  nest. 

The  colony  needs  pollen  and  honey  in  the  hive  all  year  as  food  for 
the  adults  and  for  rearing  young  bees.  It  has  been  estimated  that  a  full 
cell  of  each  type  of  food  is  needed  to  produce  one  young  bee.  The  pollen 
supplies  proteins,  vitamins,  and  other  minor  nutrients.  Honey  provides 
carbohydrates  in  the  form  of  several  sugars.  Honey  removed  from 
the  hives  must  be  only  the  surplus  produced  by  the  colony.  If  more 
than  that  is  taken,  or  if  it  is  taken  at  the  wrong  time,  the  bees 
may  starve.  A  beekeeper  must  learn  to  estimate  the  amount  of  food, 
particularly  honey,  in  the  hive  at  each  observation  and  to  decide  whether 


64 


the  colony  is  "making  a  living"  or  needs  some  help  until  more  nectar  is 
available.  Learn  to  do  this  each  time  you  open  your  hives,  especially 
package  colonies  or  any  small  colony  just  getting  started.  In  early 
spring  the  bees  may  be  unable  to  fly  for  a  week  or  more  because  of 
cool  or  wet  weather.  At  this  time,  and  any  time  before  the  major  nectar 
flow  period,  a  colony  needs  10  to  20  pounds  of  reserve  food  or  the 
equivalent  of  two  or  three  well-filled  combs.  You  can  test  for  incoming 
nectar  in  the  hive  by  holding  a  comb  flat  above  the  open  hive  and  giving 
it  a  quick  shake  downward.  Any  thin  nectar  in  the  comb  will  splash 
down  onto  the  tops  of  the  frames  where  it  will  be  reclaimed  by  the  bees. 
When  nectar  is  not  available  in  the  field,  bees  attempt  to  steal  honey 
from  other  colonies.  The  guard  bees  of  strong  colonies  attack  and 
repel  the  robbers,  but  weaker  colonies  are  sometimes  overcome  and 
killed  by  large  numbers  of  robbing  bees.  The  problem  is  most  serious 
in  the  spring  and  the  fall  at  any  time  hives  are  opened  and  combs  ex- 
posed to  bees.  The  natural  defense  system  of  the  colony  is  disturbed 
by  smoke  and  by  the  separation  of  the  parts  of  the  hive.  Bees  from 
other  colonies  are  attracted  and  they  fly  around  the  exposed  combs 
trying  to  get  some  of  the  colony's  stored  honey.  Even  after  the  hive  is 
put  back  together,  the  robber  bees  may  gather  along  the  edges  of  the 
cover  and  other  cracks  in  the  hive.  They  will  also  try  to  get  into  the 
entrance  of  the  colony  as  well  as  other  nearby  colonies.  A  beekeeper 
must  learn  to  recognize  the  presence  of  robber  bees  and  to  take  action 
to  prevent  the  buildup  of  widespread  robbing.  This  means  keeping 
jhives  open  only  briefly  when  robbing  is  liable  to  occur  and  being  careful 
not  to  expose  combs,  especially  ones  not  protected  by  bees.  It  is  easier 
to  prevent  robbing  than  to  stop  it.  Always  pick  up  bits  of  comb  in  the 
apiary  and  try  not  to  let  nectar  or  honey  drip  outside  any  hive.  Robber 
|bees  can  be  recognized  by  their  darting  flight  around  combs  and  open 
jhives,  often  with  their  legs  hanging  down.  They  land  on  combs  and 
imove  quickly  to  cells  of  honey  to  fill  up.  If  you  see  robbing  starting,  it 
| is  a  good  idea  to  stop  looking  at  the  bees  and  close  the  hive.  As  a  pre- 
cautionary measure,  you  can  stuff  grass  or  weeds  lightly  into  the 
entrances  to  reduce  their  size.  With  small  entrances  to  guard,  the  bees 
of  a  colony  are  better  able  to  repel  robbers. 

The  Need  for  Space  in  the  Spring 

The  colony  increases  rapidly  in  size  in  April  and  May.  It  needs 
iroom  for  brood  rearing,  for  storing  honey  and  pollen,  and  for  the  in- 
creasing number  of  adult  bees.  Since  one  of  the  primary  causes  of 
swarming  is  crowding  of  adult  bees,  the  colony  should  have  two  or 


65 


Spring  Management:  Starting  With  Bees 

more  full-depth  hive  bodies  or  their  equivalent  to  reduce  the  chance  of 
early  swarming.  The  package  colony  or  nucleus  needs  a  second  hive 
body  as  soon  as  most  of  the  foundation  has  been  drawn  into  comb  and 
bees  cover  eight  or  nine  frames  in  the  hive.  It  has  been  estimated  that 
a  10-frame  hive  body  provides  room  for  about  15,000  adult  bees.  If 
this  is  correct,  the  growing  colony  needs  at  least  two  hive  bodies,  and  a 
full-sized  colony  containing  about  60,000  bees  needs  four  hive  bodies 
just  for  housing  the  bees. 

Spring  Management  of  Overwintered  Colonies 

There  are  some  special  points  to  consider  in  management  of  over- 
wintered colonies.  An  important  one  is  the  late  winter-early  spring 
check  on  honey  reserves.  This  period  is  a  crucial  one  for  the  bees  be- 
cause they  are  rearing  brood  and  must  increase  honey  consumption 
greatly  to  keep  the  brood  nest  warm  and  to  feed  the  developing  bees. 
Most  losses  from  starvation  take  place  during  this  period  —  not  during 
the  middle  of  winter.  The  first  check  of  the  year  should  determine  two 
things  —  whether  the  colony  has  enough  honey  and  whether  the  honey 
is  located  on  both  sides  of  the  cluster.  The  timing  of  the  examination 
depends  on  local  conditions  and  the  weather.  In  central  Illinois,  the 
examination  can  usually  be  made  by  mid-February,  during  a  warming 
period  when  the  temperature  reaches  the  40's  or  50's  (5°  to  15°C.)  on 
a  sunny  day.  If  necessary,  the  check  can  be  made  at  much  lower  tem- 
peratures; the  chance  to  save  the  life  of  a  colony  outweighs  any  minor 
damage  resulting  from  the  observations.  Even  in  a  colder  climate  you 
would  be  wise  to  check  the  bees  not  later  than  March  1. 

Put  on  your  protective  clothing  and  open  each  hive  briefly  to  see  if 
it  has  sealed  honey  near  the  cluster.  You  should  be  able  to  see  such 
sealed  honey  after  removing  the  cover  but  without  removing  any 
frames.  Use  smoke  lightly  but  judiciously  as  needed.  If  there  is  honey 
on  both  sides  of  the  cluster,  no  adjustment  is  necessary  and  you  may 
close  the  hive.  But  if  the  colony  is  against  one  side  of  the  hive  or  lack- 
ing visible  food,  you  should  make  some  changes.  Remove  a  comb  with 
honey  from  the  side  of  the  hive  opposite  the  cluster,  pry  the  frames 
with  the  cluster  away  from  the  wall  of  the  hive,  and  insert  the  honey. 
Without  this  adjustment,  the  cluster  of  bees  may  die  when  it  contracts 
away  from  food  during  the  next  cold  period.  If  the  colony  needs  addi- 
tional food,  you  can  exchange  combs  with  a  well-provisioned  hive  or 
feed  the  colony  with  syrup-filled  combs  or  dry  sugar.  (See  page  103.) 
After  looking  at  a  colony  during  cold  weather,  you  should  put  a  rock 
or  brick  on  the  lid  to  hold  it  in  place.  The  bees  will  be  unable  to  reseal 
the  lid  while  it  is  cold,  and  it  may  blow  off  without  additional  weight. 

66 


There  is  a  natural  winter  loss  of  bees  despite  good  management. 
If  you  find  a  dead  colony,  close  the  entrance  and  take  it  out  of  the 
apiary  as  soon  as  possible.  This  prevents  robbing,  damage  to  combs, 
and  the  spread  of  any  disease  that  may  be  present.  After  being  freed  of 
dead  bees,  the  hive  and  combs  can  be  used  to  start  another  colony  or 
for  supers.  Inspect  them  first  for  symptoms  of  disease  before  reusing 
them. 

The  first  thorough  colony  examination  should  be  made  on  a  day 
when  the  temperature  reaches  about  70°F.  (21  °C).  Look  first  for  the 
queen  or  for  brood.  The  absence  of  brood  in  a  small  colony  is  normal 
but  a  colony  covering  six  or  eight  combs  should  have  young  bees  and 
brood.  Look  at  the  brood  to  see  if  it  is  normal,  without  disease,  and 
with  no  drones  in  worker  cells.  Consider  the  honey  reserves  and  plan 
to  feed  the  colony  if  there  are  less  than  several  full  combs  of  honey. 

As  the  weather  continues  to  warm  up  in  April  and  May,  it  is  time 
to  do  the  important  spring  manipulation  called  "reversing"  the  colony. 
This  job  consists  of  moving  the  colony's  brood  nest  from  the  top  of 
the  hive  to  the  lowest  position  next  to  the  bottom  board.  During  the 
winter  the  colony  works  its  way  upward  in  the  hive  until  it  is  just 
beneath  the  lid  of  a  two-  or  three-story  hive.  By  exchanging  the  posi- 
tions of  the  top  and  bottom  hive  bodies  or  by  moving  frames  if  the 
hive  bottom  is  nailed  on,  you  "reverse"  the  colony  and  provide  a  stimu- 
lus for  further  upward  expansion  of  the  brood  nest.  You  also  slow  the 
iswarming  urge  by  this  manipulation.  When  you  rearrange  the  hive, 
place  several  empty  combs  above  the  brood  nest  where  the  queen  can 
quickly  fill  them  with  eggs.  Put  part  of  the  stored  honey  on  either  side 
of  the  empty  combs  and  leave  the  rest  on  the  outer  edges  of  the  brood 
Inest  in  the  lower  brood  chamber. 

Every  colony  should  be  reversed  at  least  once  during  the  spring, 
usually  in  April  or  early  May,  depending  on  weather  conditions  in 
your  section  of  the  Midwest.  Several  other  tasks  can  be  done  at  the 
|same  time.  You  should  clean  off  the  bottom  board,  which  will  be  littered 
.with  dead  bees,  comb  fragments,  and  other  debris.  At  the  same  time 
you  can  exchange  hive  bodies,  tops,  and  bottoms  that  need  repair  or 
painting.  At  the  end  of  winter  the  combs  of  the  lowest  hive  body  are 
usually  empty  of  everything  except  a  few  cells  of  pollen.  For  this 
'reason  it  is  a  good  time  to  cull  old,  damaged  combs  and  frames  before 
they  are  refilled  with  brood,  honey,  and  pollen.  Combs  with  large  areas 
I  of  drone  cells  should  also  be  pulled  out.  Remove  all  winter  packing 
materials,  if  you  use  them,  at  this  time.  If  you  use  chemicals  for  disease 
ijprevention,  apply  them  after  reversing  the  colonies  and  inspecting  the 
brood  for  any  symptoms  of  American  foulbrood  and  other  bee  diseases. 

67 


Hi 


Spring  Management:  Starting  With  Bees 

Pollen  Feeding 

Pollen  is  essential  for  rearing  young  bees  and  developing  strong 
colonies.  Newly  emerged  adult  bees  also  need  pollen  to  eat.  In  late  .; 
winter  the  colony  uses  pollen  that  was  stored  the  previous  year.  If 
there  is  little  stored  pollen,  the  colony  will  not  die  but  its  growth  will 
be  hindered  until  fresh  pollen  is  available  in  the  field.  Feeding  pollen 
or  pollen  substitutes  in  February  and  March  stimulates  the  bees  to 
build  strong  colonies  early  in  the  season.  If  you  want  to  make  addi- 
tional colonies  by  dividing,  or  need  strong  bees  for  fruit  pollination, 
consider  feeding  a  pollen  mixture  to  the  bees.  However,  unless  you 
can  use  the  extra  bees,  you  may  only  create  a  swarming  problem  and  a 
feeding  problem  for  the  extra  bees  that  require  food  until  nectar  is 
available  in  quantity.  Pollen  mixtures  are  especially  valuable  to  help 
colonies  develop  normally  in  rural  areas  where  most  of  the  land  is 
cultivated  or  in  other  areas  where  early  sources  of  natural  pollen  are 
lacking.  Without  such  help,  the  colonies  may  not  reach  full  strength  in 
time  for  the  main  nectar  flow. 

Honey  bees  have  such  a  strong  urge  to  collect  pollen  in  the  spring 
that  they  create  problems  when  they  visit  farm  feedlots  for  bran  and 
ground  corn.  A  dry  pollen  mixture  placed  in  the  apiary  in  February 
and  March  will  help  to  satisfy  this  need  and  may  keep  the  bees  at  home. 
Once  started,  the  feeding  should  continue  without  interruption  until 

natural  pollen  is  available. 

usei 


Iff: 


68 


SUIMIDVLEIFL  MANAGEMENT: 
HONEY  PRODUCTION 


Nectar  and  Pollen  Plants 

One  reason  for  the  success  and  adaptability  of  the  honey  bee  is  its 
willingness  and  ability  to  use  the  nectar  and  pollen  from  thousands  of 
plant  species  of  all  types.  The  intermediate  body  size  and  tongue  length 
of  honey  bees  as  compared  with  other  bees  enable  them  to  utilize  many 
different  types  of  flowers  to  obtain  nectar  and  pollen.  Although  their 
j  tongues  are  shorter  than  those  of  most  bumble  bees,  they  are  long 
,  enough  to  reach  nectar  in  flower  tubes  several  millimeters  long.  Honey 
bees  also  visit  tiny,  open  flowers  that  are  too  small  for  larger  bees. 

In  general,  honey  bees  must  depend  for  their  nectar  and  pollen  on 
(wild  plants,  or  on  cultivated  plants  grown  for  food  crops,  pasture,  or 
other  purposes.  The  yield  of  nectar  is  not  sufficiently  large  to  justify 
planting  crops  only  for  bees.  However,  there  are  many  ways  in  which 
I  plantings  made  for  other  purposes  can  benefit  bees.  Agricultural  land 
'diverted  from  production  can  be  planted  to  clovers  and  other  legumes 
useful  to  bees.  Shrubs,  trees,  and  annual  plants  used  for  recreation  and 
i  conservation  areas  can  provide  beauty  and  pleasure  for  people,  seeds 
and  berries  for  wildlife,  and  nectar  and  pollen  for  honey  bees.  Road- 
side plants  used  to  reduce  maintenance  and  to  control  erosion  can  also 
I  provide  forage  for  bees. 

Summer  honey  production  depends  in  large  part  on  the  nectar  yields 
of  summer-blooming  plants.  But  if  it  were  not  for  the  nectar  and  pollen 
of  spring  flowers,  there  would  not  be  the  force  of  bees  required  later 
to  bring  in  that  honey  crop.  For  this  reason,  all  nectar  and  pollen  plants 
are  considered  in  this  section.  In  the  spring,  the  food  reserves  in  the 
hive  are  usually  low  and  the  demand  for  food  to  feed  the  rapidly  de- 
veloping young  bees  is  high.  Cool  and  wet  spring  weather  often  limits 
flight  and  thereby  retards  the  growth  of  the  colony.  It  is  unusual  for 
colonies  to  produce  surplus  honey  from  early-blooming  plants  such 
as  tree  fruits,  berries,  dandelion,  mustard,  and  willow.  However,  if 
colonies  have  enough  field  bees,  and  the  weather  is  good,  they  may 
!  store  surplus  honey  from  these  early  nectar  sources.  Such  surplus 
!  should  not  be  removed  because  it  is  used  by  the  colony  for  food  until 


69 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 

the  main  nectar  flow  later  in  the  year.  Bees  secrete  wax  and  build  combs 
from  foundation  well  during  a  spring  nectar  flow.  However,  unless 
you  also  feed  the  bees,  do  not  try  to  put  a  full  super  of  foundation  on 
a  colony  in  the  spring.  Two  or  three  frames  are  usually  enough. 

Honey  bees  visit  large  numbers  of  plant  species  at  any  one  time  and 
throughout  the  foraging  season.  The  system  of  communication  within 
the  colony  tends  to  concentrate  the  foragers'  efforts  on  those  plants  that 
give  the  greatest  quantity  of  nectar  and  pollen,  and  have  the  highest 
concentration  of  sugar  in  the  nectar.  A  plant  that  is  highly  attractive 
to  bees  when  nectar  is  scarce  may  not  be  visited  when  other  more 
desirable  plants  are  in  bloom.  When  we  speak  of  nectar  and  pollen 
plants,  we  include  all  plants  visited  by  bees.  Most  of  them  are  not  of 
primary  importance  to  bees  and  are  classified  as  minor  sources  of 
pollen  and  nectar.  The  major,  most  important,  nectar  and  pollen  plants 
are  the  few  that  grow  in  abundance,  usually  within  a  mile  and  a  half  of: 
the  colony,  and  provide  a  fair  return  of  pollen  and  nectar  per  flower 
head  or  individual  floret.  An  English  study  of  pollen  collection  by  bees 
indicated  that  plants  offering  fair  amounts  of  pollen  must  be  growing 
within  1/4  mile  of  the  hive  to  be  visited  by  bees.  The  greatest  amount 
of  pollen  was  collected  from  the  main  nectar  sources  and  from  those 
most  abundant  near  the  hive.  In  general,  this  is  also  true  in  the  Midwest. 

The  primary  or  major  nectar  and  pollen  plants  of  the  Midwest, 
based  on  their  yield  and  value  to  honey  bees,  are  as  follows: 

Alfalfa  —  Mcdicago  sativa  True  clovers,  Trifolium  species 

Dandelion  —  Taraxacum  officinale  Alsike  clover  —  Trifolium  hy- 

Soybean  —  Glycine  max  bridum 

Sweetclovers,  Melilotus  species  Ladino  —  Trifolium  repens 

White  sweetclover  —  Melilotus  Red  clover  —  Trifolium  pratense 

alba  White  Dutch  —  Trifolium  repens 
Yellow  sweetclover  —  Melilotus 
officinalis 

Secondary  nectar  and  pollen  plants  are  as  follows: 

Aster  —  Aster  species  Cranberry  —  V accinium  macro- 
Basswood  and  related  species  —  carpon 

Tilia  americana  and  other  Tilia  Elm  —  Ulmus  species  (Pollen 

species  only) 

Berries,  raspberry  and  others —  Goldenrod  —  Solidago  species 

Rubus  species  Lima  bean  —  Phaseolus  lunatus 

Birdsfoot  trefoil- — Lotus  cornicu-  Locust,  black  —  Robinia  pseudo- 

latus  acacia 

Chicory  —  Cichorium  intybus  Locust,  common  honey  —  Gleditsia 
Corn  —  Zea  mays  (Pollen  only)  triacanthos 

(continued) 


70 


Maple  —  Acer  species  Sunflower  —  Helianthus  species 

Milkweed  —  Asclepias  species  Tree  fruits  —  apple,  apricot,  plum, 
Morning  glory  —  Convolvulus  and  cherry,  pear 

Ipomoea  species  Tulip  poplar  —  Liriodendron  tulip- 
Mustard  —  Brassica  species  if  era 

Smartweed  —  Polygonum  species  Vine  crops  —  cucumber,  musk- 
Sorghum  —  Sorghum  species  melon,  pumpkin,  squash,  water- 

( Pollen  only)  melon 

Spanish  needles  —  Bidcns  species  Willow- — Salix  species 

Sumac  —  Rhus  species  Yellow  rocket  —  Barbarea  vulgaris 

Plants  in  southern  areas  of  the  Midwest  bloom  as  much  as  3  to  6 
weeks  before  those  in  northern  areas.  The  dates  referred  to  here  are 
those  for  central  Illinois  and  must  be  modified  for  locations  north  or 
south.  In  mid-March,  the  first  sources  of  pollen  and  nectar  are  the 
maples,  elms,  and  willows.  Early  fruit  bloom,  such  as  that  of  apricot, 
begins  in  April,  and  apple  trees  are  usually  still  in  bloom  in  early  May. 
Mustard  and  yellow  rocket  are  early  sources  of  nectar  and  pollen. 
Dandelion  comes  early  in  protected  spots  but  reaches  its  peak  bloom 
in  May. 

Primary  nectar  flows,  which  produce  most  of  the  honey  crop,  are 
from  white  Dutch  clover,  the  sweetclovers,  alfalfa,  and  soybeans,  de- 
pending on  the  area.  Alfalfa  is  of  greatest  importance  in  the  northern 
and  western  portions  of  the  Midwest,  while  the  clovers  are  of  impor- 
tance throughout  the  entire  region.  Red  clover  is  a  good  pollen  source 
but  cannot  be  relied  on  as  a  nectar  producer  because  honey  bees  often 
are  unable  to  reach  the  nectar  in  the  long  floral  tubes  (Fig.  32).  How- 
ever, bees  may  collect  considerable  amounts  of  nectar  from  red  clover 
in  dry  years  and  from  the  regrowth  after  the  first  crop  of  hay  has  been 
taken.  Soybeans  are  a  major  nectar  source  in  Illinois,  Iowa,  and  prob- 
ably most  other  states  of  the  Midwest  with  large  acreages  of  beans.  In 
central  Illinois,  late-blooming,  full-season  soybean  varieties  such  as 
Clark,  Kent,  and  Wayne  are  of  most  value  to  the  bees.  They  usually 
j yield  nectar  after  the  clovers  have  finished  (Fig.  33).  Bees  obtain  large 
quantities  of  nectar  and  pollen  from  soybeans,  which  are  usually  attrib- 
uted to  some  other  plant.  There  is  good  evidence  that  bees  increase  the 
yield  of  beans  of  some  varieties.  Chicory  is  also  an  important  source 
I  of  pollen  as  well  as  nectar.  In  other  countries  it  is  considered  a  good 
i  nectar  source,  but  in  this  country  it  has  generally  been  overlooked  as 
a  plant  valuable  to  bees. 

Smartweed,  Spanish  needles,  goldenrod,  and  aster  are  the  latest 
blooming  of  the  more  important  plants.  They  may  yield  nectar  in 
August,  September,  and  even  later,  depending  on  the  weather  and  the 


71 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 


soil  moisture.  The  acreage  of  these  plants  is  no  longer  as  large  as  it 
used  to  be,  and  crops  of  honey  from  them  are  also  rarer  than  in  earlier 
years. 

Honey  bees  also  collect  two  other  materials  from  plants.  One  of 
these  is  called  honeydew.  It  is  excess  plant  sap  excreted  by  aphids  and 
other  insects  that  feed  on  plants.  It  is  most  common  on  trees  such  as  s 
willow,  elm,  pine,  and  oak,  but  may  also  occur  on  alfalfa  and  other 
crop  plants.  The  other  material  is  called  propolis.  It  is  a  plant  resin  or 
gum  collected  from  buds  and  other  plant  parts  of  trees  such  as  poplar 


Forager  collecting 
pollen  and  nectar 
from  red  clover 
blossoms.  The 
bee's  pollen  load 
can  be  seen  in  the 
pollen  basket  on  r 
her  rear  leg. 

(Fig.  32) 


Honey  bees  visit' 
soybeans  for  nectar 
and  pollen  as  the 
clovers  become 
less  attractive  in 
July  and  August. 
(Fig.  33) 


72 


and  ash.  The  bees  pack  it  onto  their  hind  legs  but  must  have  help  to 
remove  it  in  the  hive.  They  also  collect  and  reuse  propolis  from  used 
beekeeping  equipment  stored  in  the  open. 

When  nectar  is  not  available,  usually  in  the  fall,  bees  collect  a  wide 
variety  of  sweet  substances.  They  suck  the  juices  from  apples,  pears, 
grapes,  and  other  fruits  that  have  cracked  or  been  opened  by  other 
insects  or  by  birds.  Bees  create  problems  when  they  visit  sugar  syrup  at 
canneries,  and  root  beer  and  other  drinks  at  drive-in  restaurants. 

Swarming  and  Swarm  Prevention 

Swarming  is  the  natural  method  of  propagation  for  honey  bee  col- 
onies. Natural  selection  has  favored  the  maintenance  of  the  swarming 
trait  because  those  colonies  that  did  not  swarm  died  without  leaving  new 
colonies  to  carry  on.  For  centuries  man  has  selected  bees  that  produced 
jthe  best  swarms  to  increase  the  number  of  colonies.  The  use  of  movable 
(frame  hives  now  enables  us  to  divide  colonies  at  will,  and  we  must  try 
to  prevent  or  control  swarming  because  it  weakens  the  colonies  and 
reduces  honey  production. 

A  swarm  consists  of  the  old  queen,  some  drones,  and  50  to  90  per- 
cent of  the  worker  bees  of  a  colony.  They  leave  the  colony  suddenly  as 
a  group  and  cluster  temporarily  on  some  object  such  as  a  tree  branch. 
|Later  they  disperse  and  move  to  a  new  home  selected  for  them  by  scout 
bees.  Sometimes  several  swarms  from  one  hive  leave  over  a  period  of 
a  week  or  more,  and  many  of  them  are  accompanied  by  young,  un- 
mated  queens.  Queen  cells  are  built  in  preparation  for  swarming,  and 
the  first  swarm  often  leaves  about  the  time  the  cells  are  sealed  (Fig. 
34).  Swarming  is  most  common  in  the  late  spring  and  early  summer 
periods. 

Many  factors  contribute  to  swarming.  The  most  readily  apparent 
one  is  crowding  and  lack  of  room  for  adult  worker  bees.  In  experi- 
ments on  swarming,  a  colony  put  into  a  small  hive  swarmed  in  as 
[short  a  time  as  24  hours.  Swarming  is  also  associated  with  the  amount 
and  distribution  of  the  glandular  secretions  of  the  queen.  When  there 
;is  a  shortage  of  the  secretions,  the  bees  make  queen  cells  in  preparation 
[for  swarming  or  supersedure.  Queen  cells  are  also  built  in  crowded 
colonies  because  of  the  unequal  distribution  of  queen  substances  among 
jthe  adult  workers.  Colonies  with  queens  over  a  year  old  are  more  likely 
to  swarm  than  those  with  young  queens.  The  seasonal  cycle  of  colony 
growth,  the  weather,  and  the  heredity  of  the  queen  are  additional  fac- 
tors related  to  swarming.  The  colony  that  becomes  big  early  in  the 
Season  is  more  likely  to  swarm  than  one  that  reaches  its  peak  later. 


73 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 


Swarming  can  rarely  be  prevented  entirely  but  it  can  be  reduced  to  a 
reasonable  level  by  good  management. 

To  reduce  swarming  you  must  plan  ahead  to  provide  your  bees  with 
young  queens  and  sufficient  hive  space  at  all  times.  These  measures  will 
reduce  but  not  solve  the  problem.  You  must  also  be  able  to  recognize 
the  signs  that  indicate  a  colony  is  making,  or  will  soon  make,  prepara- 
tions to  swarm.  One  evident  sign  is  a  mass  of  bees  that  entirely  fills 
the  hive.  They  may  come  out  of  the  hive  in  large  numbers  when  you 
open  it.  A  badly  crowded  colony  often  has  bees  clustered  on  the  land- 
ing board  and  on  the  front  of  the  hive  near  the  entrance.  During  ex- 
tremely hot  weather  such  "hanging  out"  is  an  attempt  to  cool  the  hive 
and  may  not  be  related  to  crowding  inside  (Fig.  35).  Any  crowded 
colony  should  be  given  one  or  more  additional  hive  bodies  filled  with 
combs  or  foundation.  The  combs  will  do  them  the  most  good ;  founda- 
tion is  of  little  value  unless  there  is  a  nectar  flow  or  the  hive  is  being 
fed  so  that  the  bees  can  complete  the  comb.  It  is  not  unusual  for  a 
colony  to  occupy  three  or  more  deep  bodies  before  the  main  nectar  flow 
begins. 


Unsealed  queen  cells  built  on  the  bottom  edge  of  a  comb  in  preparation  foi 
swarming.  (Fig-  34) 


74 


Worker  bees 
"hanging  out"  and 
fanning  on  the 
front  of  their  hive 
because  of  the 
heat.  (Fig.  35) 


Another  warning  sign  of  impending  swarming  is  the  condition  of 
the  queen-cell  cups  on  the  combs.  They  are  always  present  but  are 
usually  short  and  small.  The  wax  of  the  cups  is  the  same  color  as  the 
comb  on  which  the  cups  are  built.  As  soon  as  a  colony  begins  prep- 
aration for  swarming,  the  cell  cups  are  enlarged,  their  edges  are  ex- 
tended and  thinned,  and  new,  white  wax  can  be  seen  on  the  cups.  The 
queen  will  lay  an  egg  in  the  cup  shortly  after  these  preparations.  When 
you  find  these  conditions  present,  you  must  try  to  keep  the  colony  from 
carrying  out  its  plans.  An  additional  super  may  solve  the  problem.  If 
not,  you  can  switch  the  location  of  the  colony  with  a  weaker  one  so 
that  many  of  the  stronger  colony's  returning  field  bees  will  be  lost  to 
it.  You  can  also  remove  sealed  and  emerging  brood  to  add  to  weaker 
colonies.  If  nectar  is  coming  into  the  hive,  add  one  or  more  frames  of 
foundation  in  place  of  the  combs  removed. 

Prompt  action  is  needed  when  you  find  large  numbers  of  queen  cells 
in  a  crowded  colony.  Check  first  to  see  if  the  queen  is  present  and,  if 
so,  find  and  destroy  all  queen  cells.  Additional  hive  space  may  prevent 
a  swarm  from  leaving,  but  more  drastic  measures  have  a  better  chance 
of  success.  For  example,  you  can  divide  the  colony  into  two  smaller 
colonies  or  make  one  or  more  nucleus  colonies  from  it.  These  tech- 
niques are  explained  on  pages  101  to  102.  There  is  little  you  can  do  for 
a  colony  after  a  swarm  has  left  except  to  make  sure  that  it  has  empty 
combs  in  which  the  new  queen  can  lay. 

Excluders 

Excluders  are  used  to  confine  queens  to  one  part  of  the  hive  and  to 
prevent  them  from  laying  eggs  in  honey  supers.  Unless  they  are  kept 
from  doing  so  by  an  excluder,  many  queens  make  a  narrow  brood  nest 


75 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 


up  the  center  of  the  entire  hive.  Eventually  they  are  forced  down  as 
honey  is  stored  in  the  upper  combs,  but  there  may  be  brood  in  the 
supers  when  the  honey  crop  is  removed.  Excluders  can  save  time  and 
effort  in  beekeeping  in  spite  of  persistent  claims  that  they  are  "honey 
excluders"  that  reduce  yields.  It  is  true  that  some  strains  of  bees  seem 
reluctant  to  pass  through  an  excluder  but  they  may  need  a  period  of 
time  to  adjust  to  its  presence.  Put  the  excluder  and  first  super  on 
the  hive  ahead  of  the  nectar  flow  to  allow  the  bees  to  become  accus- 
tomed to  passing  through  it.  The  benefits  of  excluders  outweigh  the' 
disadvantages. 

Supering  for  Honey 

As  the  main  nectar  flow  begins,  the  colony  needs  additional  comb 
space  in  which  to  store  the  nectar  and  the  honey  made  from  it.  If  you 
are  beginning  in  beekeeping  with  all  new  equipment,  you  must  add 
supers  containing  frames  of  foundation  suitable  either  for  extracting 
or  for  making  some  type  of  comb  honey.  On  the  other  hand,  if  you 
already  have  empty,  finished  combs  they  should  be  added  to  the  hives  at 
the  start  of  the  main  nectar  flow.  Light-colored  combs,  not  previously 
used  for  brood  rearing",  are  best  for  honey  production.  Honey  taken 
from  such  combs  is  lighter  in  color  and  contains  less  pollen  than  honey 
extracted  from  dark  combs.  The  honey  may  also  have  a  somewhat 
better  flavor.  Plan  to  reserve  your  light-colored  combs  for  honey  pro- 
duction and  keep  them  free  of  brood  by  using  excluders  or  by  employ- 
ing management  practices  that  keep  the  queen  out  of  the  supers. 

When  brought  into  the  hive,  nectar  is  about  50  to  80  percent  water. 
It  therefore  takes  up  much  more  comb  space  initially  than  it  does  after 
being  evaporated  and  processed  into  honey.  Colonies  provided  with 
supers  of  drawn  comb  immediately  have  space  in  which  to  put  this 
large  volume  of  fluid,  so  they  are  less  liable  to  store  it  in  the  brood  nest 
where  it  restricts  the  queen's  laying  space.  Colonies  that  receive  supers 
of  foundation  must  first  build  comb  before  they  can  store  nectar  and 
honey  in  those  supers.  The  resulting  delay  can  reduce  the  amount  of 
honey  produced  and  also  increase  the  possibility  that  the  colony  will 
try  to  swarm.  Beekeepers  can  produce  more  extracted  honey  than  comb 
honey  because  drawn  combs  can  be  used  each  season.  To  produce  comb 
honey  of  any  kind,  they  may  reuse  the  frames  but  must  use  new  foun- 
dation each  year. 

It  is  important  to  learn  the  best  time  to  put  on  the  supers.  Some 
beekeepers  do  it  according  to  the  date,  if  they  know  from  experience 
when  the  main  nectar  flow  usually  starts.  A  few  beekeepers  put  enough 
supers  on  at  the  start  of  the  nectar  flow  to  provide  storage  for  the 

76 


entire  season's  crop.  Probably  the  best  way  to  determine  when  storage 
space  is  needed  is  to  look  at  the  combs  and  shake  them  to  see  how  much 
nectar  is  being  brought  into  the  hive.  Incoming  nectar  also  stimulates 
wax  production,  which  is  evident  as  new,  white  wax  on  the  honey  cells 
and  along  the  top  bars  of  the  frames.  A  change  in  the  weight  of  a  hive 
is  another  good  indicator  of  the  need  for  supers  (Fig.  36).  Gains  of  1 
to  10  pounds  per  day  may  be  recorded  during  a  nectar  flow.  A  scale 
colony  should  be  weighed  each  morning  before  general  flight  begins. 
Otherwise  the  weight  may  be  affected  by  the  number  of  bees  out  in 
the  field  and  by  the  unprocessed  nectar  in  the  hive.  On  warm  nights  the 
bees  process  much  of  the  nectar  brought  in  during  the  day.  You  can 
hear  the  humming  sounds  of  this  activity  when  you  walk  through  an 


Checking       the 

weight  of  a  colony 

on  a  platform  scale. 

(Fig.  36) 


77 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 

apiary  at  night.  The  activity  of  bees  at  a  watering  place  can  give  you 
another  clue  to  the  start  of  the  nectar  flow.  When  the  flow  begins,  the 
bees  use  dilute  nectar  in  place  of  water,  and  very  few  bees  continue  to 
visit  the  regular  source  of  water.  Extremely  hot  weather,  however,  may 
bring  them  back  for  water  to  cool  the  hive. 

There  is  no  formula  to  use  in  deciding  how  many  supers  to  add  at 
one  time.  This  depends  on  the  strength  of  the  colony  and  the  amount 
of  incoming  nectar.  It  is  always  better  to  give  too  much  comb  space 
rather  than  too  little,  especially  at  the  start  of  the  nectar  flow.  During 
the  heat  of  summer,  extra  supers  of  drawn  combs  are  of  value  to  the 
colony  by  serving  as  insulation  for  the  top  of  the  hive.  This  insulation 
and  extra  storage  space  can  be  as  effective  as  shade  for  increasing 
honey  production.  However,  you  must  be  much  more  conservative  in 
adding  supers  if  you  have  only  foundation  to  give.  Do  not  put  on  more 
than  two  shallow  supers  of  foundation,  or  one  deep  one,  at  a  time,  and 
plan  to  check  the  colonies  at  weekly  intervals.  Add  the  first  foundation 
only  when  you  are  sure  that  a  good  nectar  flow  has  begun. 

The  first  super  goes  onto  the  hive  above  the  brood  chamber,  which 
is  usually  made  up  of  two  deep  hive  bodies  or  three  shallow  ones.  When 
additional  space  is  needed,  you  may  either  "top  super"  by  putting  the 
next  super  above  the  one  added  first,  or  "bottom  super"  by  putting  it 
between  the  brood  chamber  and  the  supers  already  on  the  hive.  There 
are  advocates  of  each  system,  but  experiments  have  shown  that  they 
produce  similar  yields  of  honey.  However,  top  super ing  is  the  better 
choice.  Bottom  supering  requires  much  more  work,  invites  the  queen  to 
move  into  the  supers  if  there  is  no  excluder,  and  makes  further  evalu- 
ation of  the  nectar  flow  difficult.  Top  supering  allows  you  to  look  only 
at  the  top  of  the  hive  to  determine  when  you  need  to  add  more  supers 
There  are  only  two  times  when  you  should  bottom  super.  Do  it  when 
adding  a  super  of  foundation  after  previously  giving  a  colony  drawn 
combs.  However,  if  you  anticipate  not  having  enough  completed  combs 
to  handle  the  crop,  you  should  mix  three  or  four  frames  of  foundation 
alternately  with  the  combs  in  a  super  and  use  it  as  if  it  were  all  drawn 
combs.  Bottom  supering  may  also  be  of  value  when  most  of  the  combs 
in  the  supers  are  capped. 

Initially,  an  abundance  of  space  is  an  advantage  to  the  colony  and 
will  help  it  to  produce  the  greatest  amount  of  honey  possible.  Later,  as 
the  flow  begins  to  wane,  you  should  be  careful  about  oversupering  the 
hive.  The  bees  will  fill  the  lower  portion  of  the  hive  with  honey  and 
be  better  prepared  for  winter  if  they  have  little  empty  space  in  the 
supers. 


78 


Removing  the  Honey  Crop 

Surplus  honey  can  always  be  removed  from  the  hive  when  all  the 
cells  are  capped  with  wax.  Bulk  comb,  section,  and  cut  comb  honeys 
must  be  fully  capped  for  sale  or  home  use.  Remove  such  honey  as  soon 
as  it  is  ready  so  the  comb  will  not  become  discolored  by  "travel  stain"  as 
the  bees  walk  over  it.  Combs  of  honey  for  extracting  can  be  removed  from 
the  hives  before  they  are  fully  capped.  In  humid  areas,  such  as  Illinois, 
this  requires  caution,  and  combs  should  be  at  least  three-quarters  or  more 
sealed.  Otherwise  the  moisture  level  in  the  honey  may  be  high  enough  to 
lower  its  quality  and  increase  the  chance  it  will  ferment.  Honey  may  con- 
tain as  much  as  18.6  percent  moisture  and  still  qualify  for  the  two  top 
grades  of  honey.  However,  honey  of  lower  moisture  content  is  thicker  and 
more  desirable.  Above  17  percent  moisture,  unheated  honey  is  increas- 
ingly liable  to  ferment,  and  at  19  percent  it  will  definitely  ferment  unless  it 
is  stored  below  50° F.  (10°C).  Even  sealed  honey  may  be  high  in  mois- 
ture if  the  weather  is  humid  and  unfavorable  for  evaporation.  In  drier 
areas  of  the  Midwest,  especially  in  the  western  section,  bees  are  better 
able  to  remove  moisture  from  the  nectar.  In  these  areas  combs  some- 
what less  than  three- fourths  sealed  may  often  be  removed  from  the 
hives.  In  any  area  it  is  a  good  idea  to  shake  a  few  combs  to  see  whether 
there  is  thin  nectar  present,  as  explained  on  page  65.  Honey  removed  in 
the  morning  will  usually  have  less  unprocessed  nectar  with  it  than  that 
taken  off  later  in  the  day. 

Fully  capped  honey,  as  well  as  partially  sealed  combs,  may  occa- 
sionally show  signs  of  fermentation  when  removed  from  the  hive.  Such 
signs  are  usually  bubbles  in  the  cells  and  a  slightly  sour  odor.  Any  such 
combs  should  be  uncapped  and  returned  to  the  hives.  The  bees  will 
reprocess  the  honey,  which  can  be  extracted  later,  usually  without  a 
trace  of  fermentation.  If  bees  in  a  particular  apiary  consistently  pro- 
duce fermented  honey,  move  them  to  a  higher  or  windier  site  where 
they  can  evaporate  moisture  from  their  colonies  more  easily.  This  prob- 
lem is  most  common  in  areas  having  high  summer  humidity  and  other 
local  conditions  such  as  evening  fog  that  reduce  the  evaporative  power 
of  the  air  circulated  by  the  bees  in  their  hives. 

Honey  stored  during  the  spring  is  usually  left  with  the  bees.  Some 
of  it,  such  as  dandelion  honey,  is  not  good  tasting,  and  the  bees  need 
it  for  rearing  brood.  The  honey  from  the  main  sources,  the  clovers, 
soybeans,  and  alfalfa,  is  usually  mild  flavored  and  light  colored,  ideal 
for  home  use  and  sale.  This  crop  should  be  removed  from  the  hives  as 
soon  as  possible,  at  least  by  the  middle  of  August,  to  prevent  it  from 


79 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 

being  mixed  with  honey  of  stronger  and  less  desirable  flavors  such  as 
smartweed,  aster,  and  goldenrod.  Leave  the  partially  filled  supers  and 
some  extra  comb  space  in  case  a  late  nectar  flow  occurs.  By  a  week  or 
so  after  the  end  of  the  summer  nectar  flow,  the  moisture  level  of  the1' 
honey  is  usually  low  enough  so  that  you  may  remove  all  the  surplus 
honey,  sealed  or  unsealed.  Be  sure  that  the  colony  has  40  to  60  pounds 
or  more  of  honey  remaining  in  the  hive  for  winter.  In  the  colder,  more'] 
northerly  areas  of  the  Midwest,  bees  may  need  80  or  90  pounds  to  have 
the  best  chance  of  surviving  a  long  winter.  Bees  that  did  not  make  a 
crop  of  honey,  or  those  from  which  you  removed  too  much  honey,  must 
be  fed  sugar  syrup  in  early  fall  to  provide  stored  food  for  winter.  Bees 
winter  as  well  on  this  food  as  they  do  on  honey,  perhaps  even  better 
in  some  cases. 

Bees  must  be  removed  from  honey  combs  when  the  combs  are  taken 
out  of  the  hive.  This  can  be  done  by  shaking  and  brushing,  by  using. 
bee-escape  boards  or  fume  boards  with  repellent  chemicals,  or  by 
blowing.  For  one  or  two  colonies,  shaking  and  brushing  is  suitable  if 
done  quickly  to  prevent  robbing.  After  smoking  the  super,  give  each: 
comb  a  sharp  shake  to  dislodge  the  bees  into  the  top  of  the  hive  or  in 
front  of  the  entrance.  Those  bees  remaining  on  the  comb  can  be  brushed 
off  with  a  bee  brush  (Fig.  37),  and  the  comb  placed  in  a  covered  empty 
super. 

A  bee-escape  board  consists  of  an  inner  cover  or  similar  board  the 
size  of  the  top  of  the  hive,  with  one  or  more  bee  escapes  mounted  in 
the  center  or  corners  of  the  board.  The  bee  escape  is  a  small  metal 
passageway  with  spring  closures  that  allow  bees  to  move  through  it  in 
one  direction  only  —  down  into  the  hive.  In  use,  the  board  is  put  be- 
neath the  super  to  be  removed  with  the  center  hole  of  the  bee  escape 
facing  upward.  After  24  hours  all  the  bees  will  have  moved  down  into 
the  lower  hive  bodies.  Before  you  put  the  board  on,  be  sure  that  there 
are  no  holes  or  cracks  to  let  bees  in  or  out  of  the  super.  If  there  are, 
robber  bees  may  steal  the  honey.  Do  not  leave  the  board  on  during  the  i 
day  in  hot  weather  or  the  combs  may  melt.  This  system  of  removing 
honey  requires  two  trips  to  the  apiary  and  is  practical  only  for  a  few 
colonies  in  a  home  apiary. 

Chemical  repellents  can  be  used  to  drive  bees  from  their  filled  honey 
combs  before  you  remove  them  from  the  hive.  The  two  materials  now 
approved  are  benzaldehyde  and  butyric  anhydride,  the  latter  marketed 
under  the  name  of  "Bee-Go."  Both  are  fairly  effective  in  repelling  bees 
and  can  be  used  at  any  time  when  conditions  are  suitable  for  handling 
colonies.  They  are  applied  to  the  colony  on  a  fume  board,  1  to  2  inches 


80 


deep,  that  fits  on  the  super  in  place  of  the  hive  lid.  The  fume  board 
should  have  a  wooden  frame  covered  by  i/£-  or  3/j>irich-thick  pressed 
board  such  as  Celotex  (Fig.  38).  This  thick  top,  white  or  unpainted, 
prevents  the  sun  from  vaporizing"  the  chemicals  too  rapidly  and  thereby 
stupefying  rather  than  repelling  the  bees.  Smoke  the  top  of  the  colony 
well  to  get  the  bees  moving  before  putting  the  fume  board  on  it,  and 
be  careful  to  use  the  proper  dosage  of  the  chemical.  Otherwise  the 
materials  may  not  work  effectively.  Always  use  caution  in  handling 
such  products  and  follow  the  directions  on  the  label.  Butyric  anhydride 
has  a  strong,  unpleasant  odor  that  is  repellent  to  humans  as  well  as  to 
bees.  Benzaldehyde  smells  like  bitter  almonds. 

Bee  blowers  (Fig.  39)  are  the  newest  equipment  for  removing  bees 
from  honey  combs.  They  produce  a  large  volume  of  rapidly  moving  air 


!  Brushing  bees  from  a  frame  of  sealed  honey. 


(Fig.  37) 
81 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 


In  the  top  illustration,  a  chemical  repellent  solution  is  being  applied  to  a 
fume  board  used  to  drive  bees  from  honey  combs.  The  fume  board  is  being 
placed  on  the  hive  in  the  bottom  illustration.  The  smoke  helps  to  drive  the 
bees  from  the  frames  of  honey  being  removed  from  the  hive.  (Fig.  38) 


82 


A  bee  blower  in 
use.  The  super  of 
combs  being  freed 
of  bees  is  placed 
on  top  of  the  metal 
framework.  The 
bees  are  blown 
downward  toward 
the  front  of  the 
hive.  (Fig.  39) 


:hat  quickly  blows  the  bees  out  of  the  combs  without  injuring  them  or 
naking  them  angry.  The  honey  supers  are  removed  from  the  hive  and 
placed  on  a  stand  that  is  part  of  the  blower.  Most  models  have  a  chute 
:hat  directs  the  bees  toward  the  front  of  the  hive  as  they  leave  the 
>uper.  Blowers  are  effective  regardless  of  the  temperature  and  the 
experience  of  the  operator.  They  may  also  be  used  for  other  routine 
obs  such  as  shaking  package  bees,  requeening,  and  removing  extra 
equipment  for  moving  or  wintering.  The  price  of  the  blowers  at 
>resent  limits  their  use  to  commercial  beekeeping.  However,  air  corn- 
lessors  and  home  vacuum  cleaners  can  be  used  successfully  for  small 
lumbers  of  colonies. 

Brood  diseases  of  bees  are  transmitted  between  colonies  in  honey 
md  in  comb.  Combs  of  honey  removed  from  an  infected  colony  can  be 
he  means  of  spreading  disease  in  an  apiary  when  the  extracted  combs 
ire  returned  to  several  different  colonies.  For  this  reason  it  is  good 
lusiness  to  inspect  for  the  most  serious  disease,  American  foulbrood, 
vhile  you  are  removing  honey  and  before  you  lose  the  identity  of  supers 
rom  each  colony.  This  can  be  done  by  setting  the  covered  supers  on 
i  pallet  behind  the  hive  while  you  examine  several  frames  of  brood  to 
j)e  sure  they  are  free  of  disease  symptoms.  It  is  usually  safe  to  skip 
iuch  inspection  if  you  checked  carefully  for  disease  in  the  spring  and 


83 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 

again  when  the  supers  were  put  on.  Do  not  skip  the  inspection,  how- 
ever, if  any  of  your  bees  have  had  American  foulbrood  previously  or 
if  there  is  any  reason  to  think  they  might  be  infected. 

When  combs,  empty  or  full  of  honey,  are  removed  from  a  hive,  they 
are  usually  infested  with  the  eggs  or  small  larvae  of  the  wax  moth 
Such  combs  must  be  treated  in  some  manner  to  kill  these  larvae,  or 
"wax  worms."  They  will  tunnel  into  the  comb  making  it  unsaleable 
and  eventually  destroy  the  entire  comb.  The  infestation  comes  about 
when  the  adult  moth  lays  eggs  in  cracks  and  crevices  in  the  hives  in 
the  apiary.  Adult  bees  in  a  normal  colony  destroy  the  larvae  before 
they  do  any  damage.  For  details  on  how  to  prevent  damage  to  honey 
in  the  comb  from  the  wax  moth,  see  page  108.  Honey  to  be  extracted 
need  not  be  treated  but  should  be  extracted  as  soon  as  possible.  The 
empty  combs  must  then  be  fumigated  or  returned  to  the  colonies. 

Processing  the  Honey 

Honey  is  a  fine  food  product  and  should  be  treated  as  such  from  tht 
time  it  is  taken  from  the  hive  until  it  is  in  the  final  container.  Honej 
supers  should  be  handled  so  that  they  are  protected  from  dust  and  din 
as  soon  as  they  are  freed  of  bees.  One  way  is  to  place  them  on  clean 
washable  wooden  pallets  or  drip  trays  that  can  also  be  used  to  covei 
each  super  or  stack  of  supers.  Pallets  catch  dripping  honey,  keep  dir 
and  bees  away  from  the  combs,  and  allow  the  use  of  a  two-wheelec 
hand  truck  to  move  the  honey  in  the  apiary  and  honey  house  (Fig.  40) 

The  honey  house,  or  any  room  in  which  honey  is  handled,  should  b< 
easily  cleaned  and  not  accessible  to  insects,  animals,  or  other  possibb 
contaminants  such  as  dust.  The  beginning  beekeeper  usually  uses  th<l 
family  kitchen  and,  except  for  getting  honey  on  everything,  has  no  rea 
problems  in  sanitation.  However,  part-time  and  professional  beekeep 
ers  producing  honey  for  sale  must  conform  to  public  health  regulation 
relating  to  food-processing  industries.  Before  building  or  remodellins 
any  space  to  use  for  handling  honey  for  sale,  inquire  about  the  require 
ments  you  must  meet.  For  convenience,  the  honey-extracting  are; 
should  be  on  ground  level  so  that  you  can  move  honey  into  it  by  hand 
truck  either  from  the  apiary  or  from  a  truck  bed  that  is  level  with  ai 
unloading  area  or  ramp.  Plan  your  extracting  layout  to  provide  a  step 
saving  flow  of  equipment  from  the  apiary,  through  the  extraction  pro 
cess,  and  into  the  comb  room.  Look  at  several  honey  houses  befor 
building  your  own.  The  apiculture  building  on  the  Urbana-Champaigi 
campus  of  the  University  of  Illinois  may  provide  ideas  for  your  planning. 


84 


Supers  of  honey,  with 
pallets  on  top  and  bot- 
tom, being  taken  into  the 
honey  house  on  a  two- 
wheeled  hand  truck. 

(Fig.  40) 


Removing  moisture.  In  humid  areas  even  fully  sealed  combs  taken 
from  the  bees  may  contain  honey  whose  moisture  content  is  so  high 
that  it  will  not  meet  the  requirements  for  top-grade  honey  and  may 
ferment  in  the  comb.  The  best  time  to  remove  some  of  the  excess 
moisture  is  while  the  honey  is  in  the  comb,  regardless  of  whether  it  is 
to  be  extracted  or  sold  as  comb  honey.  Avoid  storing  such  honey  in 
cool,  damp  locations  where  it  may  absorb  additional  moisture.  Warm, 
dry  air  passed  through  stacked  supers  of  honey  will  remove  moisture 
in  amounts  related  to  the  relative  humidity  and  volume  of  the  circu- 
lating air.  To  handle  large  numbers  of  supers,  place  them  in  stacks  of 
six  to  eight,  offset  from  one  another  so  that  the  air  can  pass  through 
them  on  its  way  out  of  a  warm  room.  If  you  have  only  a  few  supers, 
rest  them  on  an  air  duct  and  blow  warm  air  up  through  them.  In  either 
case,  the  air  should  be  no  warmer  than  95 °F.  (35 °C).  From  1  to  3 
percent  moisture  can  be  removed  in  24  hours.  Commercial  dehumidifiers 
tan  also  remove  moisture  from  honey  in  comb  that  is  stacked  within  a 
dosed  room. 

It  is  difficult  to  remove  moisture  after  the  honey  is  extracted.  How- 
fever,  warm  air  passed  over  shallow  tanks  of  warm  honey  may  be  of 


85 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 

some  value.  When  large  volumes  of  extracted  honey  are  involved, 
blending  the  honey  with  another  honey  of  relatively  low  moisture  con- 
tent is  the  only  suitable  way  to  handle  the  problem.  In  humid  areas, 
such  as  Illinois,  honey  removed  in  the  latter  part  of  the  season  tends 
to  contain  more  moisture  than  that  taken  off  earlier. 

Comb  honey.  It  is  not  necessary  to  process  comb  honey  to  enjoy 
it  on  your  table.  Long  before  honey  extractors  were  invented,  man 
was  eating  honey  in  the  comb  as  a  simple  delicacy  or  as  a  sweet  with 
other  foods.  For  example,  you  can  spread  thin  slices  of  comb  honey, 
wax  and  all,  on  bread  or  biscuits  and  eat  everything  including  the  wax. 
Although  we  probably  do  not  digest  the  wax,  it  is  a  wholesome  material 
often  used  in  pharmaceutical  products  and  can  be  eaten  without  hesita- 
tion. 

Comb  honey  must  be  handled  carefully  to  prevent  damage  to  the 
cappings.  After  being  treated  against  wax  moth,  full  combs  can  be 
readied  for  sale  by  scraping  the  frames  to  remove  propolis  and  by 
packaging  them  in  cellophane  and  cardboard  containers.  Cut  comb 
honey  is  cut  out  of  the  frames  with  a  thin,  sharp  knife  or  with  a  special 
heated  cutter.  The  pieces  should  be  allowed  to  drain  in  a  warm  room  to 
remove  honey  from  the  open  cells  on  the  edges.  The  pieces  can  be 
packaged  in  foil  trays,  in  cellophane  or  plastic  bags,  or  in  plastic  boxes 
( Fig.  41 ) .  Comb  honey  can  also  be  stored  in  air-tight  bags  or  containers 


Cut  comb  honey  in  plastic  boxes  ready  for  labeling. 


86 


(Fig.  41) 


in  a  freezer  at  0°F.  (  — 18°C).  At  this  temperature  it  retains  its  quality 
and  does  not  granulate.  Containers,  labels,  and  special  equipment  of  all 
types  are  available  from  beekeeping  supply  companies. 

Extracted  honey.  There  is  no  neat-and-simple  home  method  of 
separating  the  honey  and  wax  to  obtain  liquid  honey  from  a  comb.  The 
most  common  system  is  to  thoroughly  crush  the  comb  containing  the 
honey  and  then  to  strain  the  mixture  through  a  coarse  sieve  or  cloth 
such  as  cheesecloth.  Heating  the  mixture  carefully  in  a  water-jacketed 
pan,  such  as  a  double  boiler,  to  100°F.  (38°C.)  will  make  it  strain  more 
easily.  Higher  temperatures  may  give  a  waxy  and  less  desirable  flavor 
to  the  honey. 

The  best  method  of  producing  liquid  honey  requires  an  extractor 
to  whirl  the  honey  from  the  uncapped  comb  by  centrifugal  force.  The 
job  of  uncapping  is  done  with  a  sharp,  heated  knife  to  melt  and  slice 
off  the  wax  cappings  covering  the  cells  on  each  side  of  the  comb  (Fig. 
42).  Power  uncappers  with  vibrating  blades,  and  automatic  uncapping 
machines  are  available  for  large  beekeeping  operations.  Commercial 
beekeepers  often  remove  all  the  filled  comb  that  projects  beyond  the 
edges  of  the  frame.  This  procedure  requires  separation  of  large  quanti- 
fies of  honey  from  the  cappings  and  is  not  suitable  for  the  beginner, 
who  should  remove  only  a  thin  layer  of  cappings  and  honey.  After 
being  uncapped,  the  comb  is  placed  in  an  extractor  that  utilizes  centrifu- 
i  gal  force  to  throw  the  honey  out  of  the  cells  and  onto  the  side  of  the 
extractor.  The  honey  runs  to  the  bottom  of  the  tank  where  it  can  be 
drained. 

Extractors  vary  in  capacity  from  2  frames  to  72  frames.  A  2- frame 
extractor  is  suitable  for  a  beekeeper  with  less  than  15  or  20  colonies. 


^Uncapping  knives.  The  one  at  the  top  is  heated  electrically  and  the  one  at  the 
bottom  is  heated  by  steam.  (Fig.  42) 


87 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 


;,'-' 


Placing  an  uncapped  comb  of  honey  in  a  30-frame  radial  extractor.    (Fig.  43) 

With  more  colonies  —  up  to  100  —  a  4- frame  extractor  is  needed,  either 
hand  or  power  driven.  The  simplest  extractors  have  a  gear-driven  bas- 
ket within  a  tank.  Combs  are  extracted  on  one  side,  and  then  lifted  and 
reversed  to  complete  the  job.  Reversible  extractors  have  baskets  that 
pivot  to  extract  either  side  of  a  comb  without  lifting  it.  Extractors  that 
remove  honey  from  one  side  of  the  comb  at  a  time,  called  tangential 
extractors,  operate  very  rapidly.  However,  if  turned  too  rapidly,  they 
may  break  combs  because  of  the  weight  of  the  honey.  Extraction  of 
honey  in  a  motor-driven  reversible  extractor  is  done  in  three  steps. 
First,  about  half  the  honey  is  removed  from  one  side  of  the  combs 
before  turning  or  reversing  them.  Then  the  second  side  is  completely 
extracted.  Finally,  the  comb  is  turned  again  and  the  remaining  honey 
is  removed. 

The  large  extractors,  holding  20  to  72  frames,  are  called  radial 
extractors  (Fig.  43).  Combs  are  arranged  in  them  like  spokes  in  a 
wheel  with  the  top  bar  at  the  rim.  The  honey  flows  from  both  sides  of 
the  comb  to  the  walls  of  the  extractor.  The  natural  upward  slant  of 
each  cell  and  the  centrifugal  force  make  the  movement  of  the  honey 
possible.  No  reversing  is  necessary  but  the  extractor  must  be  started 
slowly  and  operated  for  at  least  20  minutes  to  prevent  comb  damage 
and  remove  the  honey  completely. 

88 


Ext 


if. 


«!:i!: 


The  acids  of  honey  react  with  many  metals  including  steel  and  zinc 
used  for  galvanizing,  and  may  cause  damage  to  processing  and  storage 
equipment.  For  this  reason,  stainless  steel  is  the  most  suitable  material 
for  such  equipment.  Piping  of  stainless  steel,  glass,  or  plastic  approved 
for  use  in  food-processing  equipment  is  highly  desirable.  Galvanized 
extractors  and  tanks  should  be  lined  with  a  protective  material  approved 
for  such  use,  similar  to  that  used  to  line  honey  drums.  Many  products 
are  available  that  are  used  regularly  by  the  beverage  and  food  indus- 
tries. Most  types  of  paint  are  not  suitable  for  coating  honey  equipment 
and  are  worse  than  nothing  at  all.  Some  epoxy  coatings  are  also  unsuit- 
able because  their  solvents  and  other  ingredients  are  not  suitable  for  use 
in  contact  with  honey. 

Extracted  honey  is  most  attractive  when  it  is  clear  and  bright.  To 
produce  attractive  honey  it  is  important  to  prevent  the  incorporation  of 
air  bubbles  into  it.  This  means  that  you  must  prevent  the  honey  from 
falling  or  dripping  far  enough  to  produce  bubbles  and  foam.  Make  it 
flow  down  the  sides  of  containers  or  along  special  V-shaped  troughs 
whenever  it  is  being  moved.  Use  a  strainer  in  such  a  way  that  the 
honey  is  collected  close  beneath  it  rather  than  being  allowed  to  drip 
(to  the  bottom  of  a  large  container.  It  is  easier  to  prevent  air  bubbles 
than  to  get  them  out  later. 

After  the  honey  is  extracted,  it  will  contain  some  air  bubbles  and 
[bits  of  wax.  Most  of  these  can  be  removed  by  a  system  of  baffles  and 
screens  in  a  honey  sump  into  which  the  honey  flows  from  the  extractor. 
jThey  will  also  rise  to  the  top  of  warm  honey  in  a  can  or  tank.  The 
resulting  foam  can  be  skimmed  off  after  one  or  more  days  depending 
on  the  temperature  of  the  honey  and  the  tank  size.  It  is  important  to 
-remove  the  wax  before  final  heating  and  straining.  Otherwise  it  may 
change  the  flavor  and  appearance  of  the  final  product.  Honey  packers 
generally  prefer  honey  that  has  been  only  warmed  and  coarsely  strained 
br  settled.  For  final  packing,  honey  is  heated  to  145  °F.  (63°C.)  for 
30  minutes  and  strained  through  90-mesh  strainer  cloth.  The  heat 
liquefies  any  granules  present  and  thereby  retards  granulation.  It  also 
kills  yeasts  that  can  ferment  honey,  usually  after  it  has  granulated. 
iAfter  the  jars  and  cans  are  filled,  they  should  be  allowed  to  cool  before 
being  stacked.  Commercial  honey  processors  use  flash  heating  and  rapid 
:ooling  to  further  prevent  damage  to  honey  by  excess  heat.  Overheated 
honey  is  darkened  and  may  even  taste  burned.  Storage  temperatures 
and  the  length  of  storage  also  affect  honey  quality.  Changes  in  the  honey 
are  kept  at  a  reasonable  level  if  it  is  stored  at  temperatures  of  70°  to 
|75 °F.  (21°  to  24°C.)  after  processing.  Unprocessed  honey  is  best 
Stored  below  50 °F.  (10°C). 

89 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 

Many  beekeepers  feel  that  honey  should  not  be  heated.  They  are 
then  surprised  and  saddened  when  their  entire  stock  of  honey  becomes 
sour  and  off-flavored.  They  may  also  find  that  bottled  honey  begins  to 
leak  on  the  shelf  or,  in  some  cases,  expands  so  much  that  it  comes  out 
of  the  bottle  when  the  cap  is  removed.  All  these  symptoms  are  the  result 
of  fermentation  that  takes  place  in  unpasteurized  honey  of  high  mois- 
ture content  (above  17  percent)  and  in  granulated  honey.  We  measure 
and  speak  most  often  of  the  moisture  content  of  honey,  but  we  are 
actually  thinking  of  the  sugar  concentration,  which  governs  the  market 
quality  and  keeping  quality  of  honey.  Sugar-tolerant  yeasts  are  always 
present  in  honey,  but  they  are  unable  to  grow  in  it  and  to  change  its 
composition  if  the  sugar  concentration  is  about  83  percent  or  higher. 
When  honey  granulates,  part  of  the  sugar  crystallizes  out  of  the  solu- 
tion, leaving  the  liquid  portion  much  less  concentrated  and  allowing  the 
yeasts  to  grow  and  to  produce  the  alcohols  and  acids  that  change  the 
honey's  flavor.  The  gas  produced  often  expands  the  honey  out  of  its 
container.  To  prevent  such  changes,  heat  the  honey  as  previously  ex- 
plained or  store  it  below  50°F.  (10°C).  To  retard  granulation  and  to 
keep  all  the  subtle  flavors  of  freshly  extracted  honey,  store  it  in  a 
freezer  at  0°F.  (-18°C). 

Granulated  honey.  Smoothly  granulated  honey  is  a  pleasing  prod- 
uct that  can  be  handled  easily  on  the  table.  However,  many  honeys 
produce  coarse  granules,  especially  after  being  heated,  and  are  there- 
fore less  suitable  for  table  use  when  granulated.  To  return  any  granu- 
lated honey  to  liquid  form,  heat  it  in  a  water  bath  or  in  a  warm  oven 
to  bring  it  to  a  temperature  no  higher  than  145  °F.  (63°C.)  long  enough 
to  dissolve  the  crystals.  It  is  easy  to  make  finely  granulated  honey  for 
home  use  or  for  sale.  Use  about  10  percent  finely  granulated  honey  as 
a  starter.  The  commercial  product  called  creamed  honey  or  honey 
spread  makes  a  good  starter.  Blend  the  starter  thoroughly  at  room 
temperature  with  honey  previously  heated  to  dissolve  crystals  and  to 
destroy  yeasts.  Avoid  introducing  air  bubbles  into  the  mixture.  Put  it 
into  containers  and  store  it  at  a  temperature  as  close  as  possible  to 
57°F.  (13°C).  A  home  refrigerator  is  suitable  for  small  batches.  A 
dry,  cool  cellar  may  also  be  suitable.  The  honey  will  be  ready  to  use 
in  about  10  to  12  days. 


Marketing  the  Honey 

Packaging  and  labeling.  The  beginning  beekeeper  with  a  few  col- 
onies has  no  problem  in  disposing  of  the  honey.  Often  much  is  given 
away,  and  some  may  be  sold  to  neighbors.  As  the  number  of  colonies 
increases  and  management  improves,  the  beekeeper  must  decide  how 


90 


to  market  the  honey.  Choices  include  packing  it  in  jars  and  cans  and 
selling  it  to  consumers,  packing  it  for  sale  to  stores  or  to  wholesalers, 
or  selling  it  unprocessed,  in  60-pound  cans  or  55-gallon  drums,  to  indi- 
viduals or  companies  who  pack  it  for  resale.  When  the  honey  is  sold, 
the  beekeeper  must  conform  to  the  requirements  of  state  and  federal 
regulations  relating  to  food  and  drugs. 

Honey  sold  in  interstate  commerce  must  meet  the  requirements  of 
the  federal  fair  packaging  and  labeling  laws.  In  states  that  have  similar 
legislation,  such  as  Illinois,  honey  sold  within  the  state  must  also  be 
labeled  and  packaged  to  conform  with  the  law.  For  information  about 
regulations  in  other  midwestern  states,  contact  the  agency  responsible 
for  enforcing  food  and  marketing  regulations  for  the  state.  The  follow- 
ing summary  contains  the  principal  requirements  for  labeling  honey 
according  to  federal  and  Illinois  laws: 

1.  The  word  "honey"  must  appear  in  bold  type,  generally  parallel  to 
the  base  of  the  container. 

2.  Honey  sold  by  the  producer  must  bear  his  or  her  name  and 
address,  including  postal  zip  code.  Individuals  or  firms  packing  or 
distributing  purchased  honey  must  include  their  name,  address  (in- 
cluding zip  code),  and  words  such  as  "Distributed  by"  or  "Packed  by." 

3.  Containers  holding  1  pound  or  more  but  less  than  4  pounds  must 
show  the  weight  in  both  pounds  and  ounces.  For  example:  Net  wt. 
|l6  oz.  (1  lb.)  ;  Net  wt.  32  oz.  (2  lb.)  ;  or  Net  wt.  48  oz.  (3  lb.). 

4.  Containers  holding  less  than  1  pound  may  show  weight  only  in 
ounces;  those  holding  4  pounds  or  more  may  show  weight  in  pounds 
only.  For  example:  Net  wt.  8  oz.;  Net  wt.  4  lb.;  Net  wt.  5  lb.;  or 
Net  wt.  10  lb. 

5.  The  net  weight  must  be  printed  in  letters  whose  size  is  governed 
iby  the  area  of  the  principal  display  side  of  the  container.  The  area  is 
computed  as  follows: 

Rectangular  packages:  height  X  width  of  the  principal  display  side. 

Cylindrical  packages:  %0  X  height  X  circumference  of  the  package. 

Irregularly  shaped  packages:  %0  X  total  surface  area  or  the  entire 
;area  of  the  obvious  display  panel  such  as  the  top  of  the  package. 

The  minimum  type  sizes  that  may  be  used  to  show  the  weight  are 
as  follows: 

Area  of  display  panel  in  square  inches       Minimum  type  size 

5  or  less yi6  inch 

Between  5  and  25 1/8  inch 

Between  25  and  100 %c  inch 

Between  100  and  400 \/A  inch 

91 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 


i 


6.  Each  type  size  must  have  an  equal  clear  space  above  and  below  it 
and  a  clear  space  to  the  left  and  right  of  the  net-weight  declaration 
twice  as  wide  as  the  letter  "N"  in  the  word  "Net." 

7.  The  net-weight  statement  must  be  on  the  bottom  30  percent  of 
panels  with  an  area  greater  than  5  square  inches  as  computed  by  the 
methods  given  above. 

Copies  of  the  federal  law  and  additional  information  pertaining  to 
fair  packaging  and  labeling  may  be  obtained  from  the  Food  and  Drug 
Administration,  U.S.  Department  of  Health,  Education,  and  Welfare, 
Washington,  D.C.  20201. 

Containers  for  honey  should  be  new  and  clean.  Drums  for  bulk- 
honey  can  be  reused  and  should  be  recoated  as  needed,  but  new  gaskets 
are  necessary  each  time  the  drums  are  filled.  Five-gallon  cans  should 
not  be  reused. 

Grading.  Both  comb  and  extracted  honey  are  sold  and  purchased  by 
grades  established  by  the  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture. 
The  standards  for  grading  are  not  required,  but  they  allow  producers  j 
and  packers  to  buy  and  sell  a  quality  product  based  on  grades  established 
jointly  by  the  honey  industry  and  the  Department  of  Agriculture.  The  i 
quality  of  extracted  honey  is  measured  by  its  flavor,  its  freedom  from  | 
particles  or  sediment,  its  clarity,  and  its  moisture  content.  Comb  honey 
is  graded  for  many  characteristics  including  the  number  of  uncapped 
cells,  attachment  to  the  section  or  frame,  uniform  honey  and  cappings, 
and  freedom  from  damage.  Copies  of  Standards  for  Grades  of  Comb 
Honey  and  Extracted  Honey  are  available  from  the  Fruit  and  Vegetable 
Division,  Agricultural  Marketing  Service,  U.S.  Department  of  Agri- 
culture, Washington,  D.C.  20250.  Some  states  have  additional  grading 
requirements. 

Color  is  not  a  factor  of  quality  in  the  grading  system  but  it  is  im- 
portant in  the  sale  and  purchase  of  honey,  especially  in  large  lots. 
Honey  colors  range  from  water  white  to  dark  amber  as  measured  by  \ 
two  systems.  In  one,  the  USDA  Permanent  Glass  Color  Standards  i 
for  Extracted  Honey,  the  color  of  2-ounce  samples  of  honey  is  com- 
pared with  the  color  of  squares  of  tinted  glass  (Fig.  44).  In  the  other, 
called  the  Pfund  Color  Grader,  a  wedge-shaped  glass  trough  is  filled 
with  honey  and  matched  in  color  with  a  colored  glass  wedge.  The 
matching  area  on  the  wedge,  measured  in  millimeters,  gives  a  color 
rating  for  the  honey  sample. 

The  moisture  content,  or  soluble-solids  content,  of  honey  can  be 
measured  with  a  refractometer  or  a  honey  hydrometer.  Refractometers 
are  expensive  but  are  essential  items  of  equipment  for  anyone  dealing 


92 


U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture  Permanent  Glass  Color  Standards  for  Ex- 
tracted Honey.  (Fig.  44) 


Hand  refractom- 
eter  in  use  for  de- 
termining the  mois- 
ture  content  of 
extracted  honey. 

(Fig.  45) 


'in  large  quantities  of  honey.  Only  a  drop  of  honey  is  needed  to  obtain 
a  direct  reading  of  the  moisture  content.  An  attached  thermometer 
indicates  any  needed  temperature  correction  (Fig.  45).  The  honey 
hydrometer  is  a  simple  and  inexpensive  instrument  capable  of  giving  an 
accurate  reading  when  carefully  used.  It  is  a  weighted  glass  float  that 
|indicates  the  moisture  content  of  honey  by  the  depth  to  which  it  sinks 
fin  a  warm  sample  of  honey.  The  readings  are  corrected  for  the  tem- 
perature and  converted  to  percent  moisture  by  using  a  table  that  comes 
[with  the  instrument. 

Beekeepers  who  have  a  considerable  quantity  of  honey  for  sale  each 
(year  should  routinely  sample  each  lot  of  honey  as  it  is  extracted  or  put 
in  containers  (Fig.  46).  Several  samples  should  be  taken  from  a  day's 
output  to  get  a  reasonably  accurate  representation  of  the  honey.  All 
samples  and  the  cans  or  drums  from  which  they  came  must  be  clearly 
marked  to  relate  them,  and  a  record  should  be  kept  of  the  number  of 
containers  in  each  lot.  A  1-  or  2-pound  sample  will  provide  enough 
jhoney  to  send  small  samples  to  several  buyers.  If  beekeepers  send 
jsamples  and  know  the  color  and  the  moisture  content  of  their  honey, 


93 


Summer  Management:  Honey  Production 


Filling  a  60-pound 
can  of  honey.  The 
small  numbered 
sample  jars  can  be 
filled  with  repre- 
sentative samples 
of  each  batch  of 
honey.        (Fig.  46) 


they  are  prepared  to  bargain  for  the  best  possible  price  for  their  honey. 
The  U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture  provides  valuable  information 
about  current  prices  and  production  in  its  Honey  Market  News.  This 
publication  is  available  without  charge  from  the  Fruit  and  Vegetable 
Division,  Agricultural  Marketing  Service,  U.S.  Department  of  Agri- 
culture, Washington,  D.C.  20250. 

The  federal  government  has  operated  a  price  support  program  for 
honey  for  many  years.  Beekeepers  who  are  unable  to  sell  their  honey 
for  more  than  the  support  price  may  apply  to  sell  it  to  the  Commodity 
Credit  Corporation.  Such  honey  is  sampled  and  must  meet  certain  re- 
quirements of  class,  color,  floral  source,  quality,  grade,  and  condition  of 
containers.  Information  and  applications  are  available  from  county 
offices  of  the  Agricultural  Stabilization  and  Conservation  Service 
(ASCS).  This  program  has  been  changed  frequently  and  may  eventu- 1 
ally  be  discontinued.  However,  it  has  helped  beekeepers  and  the  honey 
industry  by  preventing  distressed  sales  of  honey  at  low  prices. 


94 


FALL  AUXTID  "V^IHSTTEIR, 
]VCA^TA.O-H3]y[ElSrT 


The  care  you  give  the  colony,  or  colonies,  in  the  fall  can  be  crucial 
to  your  success  the  following  year.  Because  of  this,  fall  management  is 
often  considered  the  starting  point  in  providing  strong  colonies  to  pro- 
duce the  next  year's  honey  crop. 

Each  colony  should  have  enough  honey  and  pollen  to  last  until 
spring.  This  means  40  to  60  pounds  of  honey  and  as  many  combs  with 
areas  of  stored  pollen  as  possible.  In  areas  with  long,  cold  winters,  bees 
may  need  as  much  as  90  pounds  of  honey.  A  well-filled  deep  hive  body 
with  some  empty  space  in  the  center  combs  provides  enough  stores  for 
a  strong  colony  wintered  in  two  hive  bodies.  It  is  more  difficult  to  rate 
the  pollen  supply,  but  colonies  with  a  shortage  can  be  given  combs  from 
other  colonies  or  given  stored  combs  that  contain  pollen.  Combs  can  be 
filled  with  trapped  pollen  as  explained  on  page  106.  Colonies  without 
sufficient  honey  should  be  given  full  combs  saved  for  the  purpose,  or 
fed  enough  sugar  syrup  or  diluted  honey  to  make  at  least  40  pounds  of 
stored  food. 

Bees  winter  best  on  combs  that  have  been  used  for  brood  rearing. 
If  possible,  do  not  winter  bees  on  all  new  honey  combs,  and  be  sure  that 
any  frames  of  foundation  are  replaced  with  drawn  comb.  Remove  the 
excluder  and  all  empty  supers.  If  you  have  no  other  place  to  store  empty 
combs,  you  can  leave  them  on  the  hive  above  an  inner  cover  with  the 
center  hole  open.  However,  it  is  better  to  store  combs  where  they  cannot 
be  damaged  or  blown  over  by  the  wind.  See  page  108  for  information 
on  fumigating  stored  combs. 

Weak  or  queenless  colonies  should  be  united  with  stronger  colonies 
that  have  queens.  See  page  131  for  details  on  how  to  unite  colonies. 
Colonies  in  a  single  brood  chamber  do  not  winter  well  in  the  Midwest. 
If  you  want  to  keep  the  individual  small  colonies  rather  than  unite  them, 
consider  putting  the  small  colony  above  a  double  division  screen  on  a 
large  colony.  A  double  screen  is  a  wooden  frame  holding  two  layers  of 
wire  screen,  usually  8-mesh.  The  screens  are  sufficiently  far  apart  that 
bees  on  either  side  cannot  touch.  A  rim  with  an  entrance  cut  in  one  end 
lets  the  division  screen  serve  as  a  bottom  for  the  top  colony  while  the 


95 


Fall  and  Winter  Management 

heat  from  the  colony  below  helps  to  keep  the  smaller  colony  warm.  To 
use  the  screen,  remove  the  cover  of  the  larger  colony  and  put  the  divi- 
sion screen  in  place  with  the  entrance  toward  the  back  of  the  hive  (Fig. 
47).  Put  the  small  colony  above  the  screen  after  making  certain  it  has 
a  good  supply  of  stored  honey  of  at  least  five  or  six  full  frames. 

Good  management  includes  a  careful  inspection  for  disease  in  the 
fall.  If  you  follow  a  program  of  disease  prevention  with  drugs  and 
antibiotics,  each  colony  should  be  treated  after  the  honey  crop  has  been 
removed  and  while  the  bees  are  still  active.  See  pages  136  to  137. 

As  the  weather  becomes  cooler  at  the  end  of  summer,  field  mice  look 
for  warm  places  to  spend  the  winter.  A  nest  in  the  lower  corner  of  a 
bee  hive  is  just  such  a  place.  For  this  reason  it  is  necessary  either  to 
use  the  ^-inch  entrance  or  to  restrict  any  deeper  entrance  used  during 
the  summer.  An  entrance  block,  a  piece  of  lath  with  an  entrance  slot, 
or  a  metal  entrance  reducer  can  be  used.  Do  not  make  the  entrance  less 
than  4  inches  wide  or  cover  it  with  hardware  cloth  because  the  bees  that 
die  during  the  winter  may  block  the  entrance.  A  top  entrance  hole,  % 
to  Yx  inch  in  diameter,  is  commonly  bored  into  supers  near  a  front 
handhold  to  provide  ventilation  and  to  release  moisture  from  the  hive 
in  winter.  Such  holes  are  probably  of  greatest  value  in  the  more  north- 
erly sections  of  the  Midwest,  where  they  allow  bees  to  fly  from  their 
hives  on  days  too  cool  to  permit  flight  from  the  regular  entrance.  During 
the  summer,  bees  do  not  store  honey  near  such  holes,  and  their  activity 
near  them  causes  some  problems  during  manipulation  of  the  colony. 
Bees  in  the  lower  Midwest,  as  in  central  Illinois,  winter  well  without 


A  double  division  screen  in  place  on  top  of  a  hive.    The  small  entrance  is 
suitable  for  winter  but  should  be  enlarged  for  use  at  other  times  of  the  year. 

(Fig.  47) 


96 


such  holes,  especially  if  the  hive  has  a  ^-inch-deep  entrance  open  the 
full  width  of  the  hive.  You  should  experiment  to  see  whether  top 
entrances  are  of  value  to  you  throughout  the  year  before  routinely  bor- 
ing holes  in  all  the  supers  as  many  people  suggest. 

Cellar  wintering  of  bees  and  wrapping  or  packing  of  hives  left  out 
}f  doors  were  once  common  in  the  Midwest.  Except  in  the  coldest  areas, 
most  bees  are  now  wintered  without  special  protection.  Unprotected 
;olonies  eat  more  honey,  but  this  disadvantage  is  offset  by  less  work 
in  the  fall  and  less  expense  for  the  needed  materials.  Winter  death 
(osses  of  entire  colonies  are  often  high.  There  is  a  growing  interest  in 
in  improved  type  of  indoor  wintering  using  a  combination  of  supple- 
mental heat,  ventilation,  insulation,  and  air  conditioning  to  produce 
ideal  wintering  conditions.  Colonies  are  held  from  about  November  to 
April  at  above-freezing  temperatures  that  keep  them  clustered.  Small 
tolonies  survive  easily  under  such  conditions  and  eat  much  less  honey 
than  large  colonies  wintered  out  of  doors.  Some  form  of  winter  pro- 
tection can  still  be  advantageous  for  the  person  who  wants  to  provide 
t.  Beekeepers  who  pack  their  hives  say  that  the  colonies  are  invariably 
stronger  and  in  better  condition  in  spring  than  colonies  that  are  left 
unprotected.  During  extended  cold  periods,  a  simple  wrapping  of  light- 
weight, black  roofing  paper  may  help  warm  a  colony  enough  to  prevent 
starvation  of  bees  that  would  otherwise  be  unable  to  move  the  cluster  to 
reach  additional  food.  The  paper  can  be  stapled,  cleated,  or  tied  around 
:he  hive  and  beneath  the  lid.  If  you  use  such  a  wrap,  be  sure  the  entrance 
;o  the  hive  will  not  be  covered  if  the  paper  moves. 


An  apiary  in  winter.  The  snow  fence  provides  wind  protection  until  the 
evergreens  grow  taller.  The  hives  face  south  and  the  slight  slope  allows  air 
drainage.  (Fig.  48) 


97 


Fall  and  Winter  Management 

Wind  protection  is  important  to  good  wintering.  Shrubs,  fences,  or 
other  artificial  windbreaks  help  the  colonies  survive  by  slowing  the  loss 
of  heat  from  the  hives  (Fig.  48).  Snow  may  completely  cover  the  hives 
without  damaging  the  bees  but  the  hives  should  not  be  located  where 
water  may  collect.  The  winter  apiary  site  should  also  be  on  a  slope  or 
in  an  area  where  cold  air  will  flow  away  from  the  hives  and  not  collect 
around  them.  If  your  winter  apiary  location  does  not  permit  the  sum 
to  shine  on  the  hives  or  is  undesirable  in  other  ways  for  wintering, 
plan  to  move  the  bees  to  a  better  location. 

Losses  of  bees  during  winter  are  often  high  in  spite  of  increasing 
knowledge  about  the  biology  and  management  of  honey  bees.  Many 
bees  of  all  ages  die  in  the  hive.  Losses  appear  to  be  greater  in  very 
large  and  very  small  colonies  as  compared  with  those  of  moderate  size. 
It  is  not  uncommon  for  more  than  half  of  the  bees  in  a  colony  to  die, 
and  for  10  percent  or  more  of  the  colonies  to  die.  Starvation,  either 
from  lack  of  honey  or  from  inability  to  reach  the  honey  in  extremely 
cold  weather  (cold  starvation),  is  the  most  common  cause  of  winter 
death  of  colonies. 


98 


]yLISOErJL^2STEO"CJS 

TECHNIQUES 
IKT   BEEKEEPING 


Caring  for  Extracting  Combs 

Good  combs  for  producing  extracted  honey  can  be  reused  for  many 
years.  As  a  result,  a  given  number  of  colonies  can  produce  more  ex- 
tracted honey  than  comb  honey  because  they  are  not  held  back  by  the 
need  to  make  new  comb  during  the  nectar  flow.  After  combs  are  ex- 
tracted, they  still  contain  some  honey  and  are  usually  referred  to  as 
"wet"  combs.  Beekeepers  do  not  agree  on  how  such  combs  should  be 
handled  except  that  they  must  be  fumigated.  The  combs  can  be  returned 
to  the  colonies  to  be  "dried,"  then  taken  off,  fumigated,  and  stored. 
This  involves  a  lot  of  work,  especially  when  the  bees  cluster  in  the 
supers  rather  than  going  back  down  into  the  lower  hive  bodies.  Placing 
the  supers  above  an  open  inner  cover  will  not  always  prevent  such  be- 
havior. It  is  best  to  store  the  combs  with  the  honey  on  them.  The  bees 
move  into  them  quickly  when  they  are  placed  on  hives  the  following 
season,  and  the  bees  benefit  slightly  from  the  extra  honey.  The  bees 
clean  out  and  liquefy  any  granulated  honey  so  that  such  combs  will  not 
induce  granulation  of  the  new  crop  any  more  than  will  combs  freed  of 
honey  in  the  fall.  If  you  prefer  to  clean  the  combs,  do  not  do  so  by 
exposing  them  in  or  near  the  apiary.  This  may  induce  serious  robbing 
'that  could  damage  your  colonies  and  spread  disease.  In  addition,  the 
combs  may  be  damaged  by  the  frenzied  activity  of  the  bees  as  they 
clean  them  out. 

Confining  Bees 

Bees  can  be  confined  to  their  hives  for  short  periods  to  move  them, 
ito  protect  them  from  pesticides,  or  to  keep  them  from  bothering  people 
or  animals  nearby.  Whatever  the  method  or  material  used  to  keep  them 
from  leaving  the  hive,  action  must  be  taken  when  the  bees  are  not  flying, 
either  during  the  night  or  in  cool  or  wet  weather.  The  simplest  closure 
is  a  V-shaped  piece  of  window  screen  or  hardware  cloth  pushed  into 
ithe  hive  entrance  (Fig.  49).  Any  other  openings  must  also  be  screened 
or  closed  at  the  same  time.  This  method  of  closing  hives  is  suitable  only 

99 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 


Closing  a  hive  with  a  V-shaped  piece  of  8-mesh  hardware  cloth.        (Fig.  49) 


A  hive  with  top  and 
entrance  screens  in 
place  for  moving.i 
Bees  can  move  into 
both  screens  to 
cluster  and  to  ven- 
tilate the  hive. 

(Fig.  50) 


100 


for  very  short  periods  when  the  weather  is  not  hot.  With  stronger 
I  colonies,  or  during  hot  weather,  or  for  longer  periods,  the  colony  needs 
|  extra  space  in  which  to  cluster.  This  can  be  provided  by  using  an 
entrance  screen  and  a  top  screen.  These  screens  have  wooden  frames 
that  give  the  bees  space  in  which  to  cluster  outside  the  hive  (Fig.  50). 
A  shallow  super  with  one  screened  surface  makes  a  good  top  screen  that 
can  be  stapled  or  cleated  to  the  hive. 

Bees  can  also  be  confined  by  covering  the  hives  with  plastic  sheeting, 
burlap,  or  other  materials.  The  coverings  are  draped  loosely  over  the 
hives  and  held  down  by  soil  around  the  edges.  Black  plastic  sheeting 
is  suitable  for  only  a  short  period  early  in  the  day  because  it  heats  up 
rapidly  in  the  sun.  Burlap  can  be  used  to  keep  bees  confined  for  a  day 
or  more.  In  hot  weather  it  can  be  kept  wet  to  cool  the  bees  beneath  it. 

Dividing  Colonies 

Splitting  a  strong  colony  of  bees  into  two  or  more  separate  units  is 
an  important  technique  in  beekeeping.  It  provides  new  colonies  to 
replace  losses  or  to  increase  numbers  of  colonies.  It  is  also  a  method 
of  swarm  control,  and  can  be  used  to  make  up  small  colonies  (nuclei) 
jfor  rearing  or  holding  queens.  To  divide  a  colony  you  must  first  find 
the  queen  as  explained  on  page  62.  If  you  are  unable  to  find  her  in  a 
large  colony,  put  a  queen  excluder  between  the  brood  chambers  and 
|close  the  hive.  Three  or  more  days  later  examine  the  colony  again.  The 
queen  will  be  in  the  brood  chamber  that  has  combs  with  eggs.  She  is 
easier  to  find  in  a  single  hive  body. 

Colonies  may  be  divided  initially  within  the  same  hive  by  using  a 
double  division  screen  as  described  on  pages  95  to  96.  Place  the  old 
queen  with  about  half  the  combs  of  brood,  mostly  unsealed  if  possible, 
;in  the  bottom  brood  chamber.  Add  an  extra  hive  body  with  empty 
combs  or  combs  with  some  honey  if  it  is  needed.  Put  the  double  divi- 
sion screen  on  top  of  the  second  body  with  the  entrance  facing  the 
tear  of  the  hive.  Above  it  put  the  second  brood  chamber  containing 
five  or  six  frames  of  brood,  mostly  sealed,  and  two  combs  of  pollen  and 
honey  on  each  side.  This  hive  body  initially  should  contain  about  two- 
thirds  of  the  bees.  You  must  shake  many  extra  bees  into  it  from  the 
combs  of  the  bottom  chamber  (Fig.  51)  because  the  older  field  bees  will 
return  to  the  bottom  story  leaving  only  the  younger  bees  in  the  new 
colony  on  top.  The  new  division  may  be  too  weak  to  keep  the  brood 
warm  if  an  insufficient  number  of  bees  is  present.  A  caged  queen  should 
je  introduced  into  the  top  colony  within  2  hours  for  best  results  but  no 
later  than  24  hours  after  making  the  division.  After  the  queen  is  ac- 


101 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 


09  fit 


\M 


^■S£u:  ■::■,  ■ 


*  *$&%&■  ■   -'*^/    BB 


Shaking  bees  from  a  comb  into  the  hive.    One  or  two  sharp  shakes  remove 
most  of  the  bees  with  little  antagonism  if  the  bees  are  smoked  first.  (Fig.  51) 


cepted  and  laying  well,  the  new  colony  can  be  put  on  a  bottom  board 
within  the  same  apiary.  Fewer  bees  will  be  lost,  however,  if  it  is  moved 
at  night  to  a  new  location  2  or  more  miles  away. 

Divisions  can  also  be  made  directly  into  a  complete  second  hive.  In' 
this  case,  give  the  new  colony  more  than  half  the  bees  and  four  to  six 
frames  of  sealed  brood.  The  hive  may  be  placed  near  the  parent  colony. 
However,  it  is  better  to  screen  the  entrance  of  the  new  hive  while 
making  up  the  colony  and  then  to  move  it  to  another  location  at  least  2 
miles  away  to  prevent  bees  from  returning  to  the  original  colony.  Put 
the  screened  colony  in  the  shade  after  you  finish  the  division  so  that 
it  will  not  be  damaged  by  overheating.  As  soon  as  it  is  moved  to  the 
new  location,  smoke  the  entrance  and  take  out  the  entrance  screen. 

The  same  general  system  of  dividing  can  be  used  to  make  small 
nucleus  colonies.  For  a  three- frame  nucleus,  take  one  or  two  frames  of 
brood  and  bees  and  a  frame  of  honey  from  a  strong  colony.  Pick 
mostly  sealed  or  emerging  brood  that  fills  only  a  third  or  one-half  the 
frame  if  possible.  Before  you  put  all  the  combs  into  the  hive,  shake  two 
or  three  additional  frames  of  bees  into  it.  Introduce  a  queen  or  a  queen 
cell  as  soon  as  possible  but  not  later  than  24  hours  after  making  the 
nucleus.  Although  the  nucleus  can  be  left  in  the  home  apiary,  it  will  do 
better  if  it  is  moved  to  another  location. 

New  colonies  of  all  sizes  may  be  made  from  brood,  bees,  and  combs 
from  several  colonies.  Use  the  same  general  techniques  as  explained 
above  and  assemble  the  colony  with  sufficient  bees  and  stored  honey  and 
pollen  to  get  it  started.  In  making  divides  and  nuclei,  use  small-  to 
medium-sized  brood  patterns  in  preference  to  very  large  areas  of  brood. 

102 


The  new  colony  may  not  be  able  to  care  for  a  large  amount  of  brood. 
By  using  sealed  brood,  you  reduce  the  number  of  bees  in  the  parent 
colony  and  rapidly  increase  the  number  in  the  new  colony. 

Feeding  Bees 

Honey  and  sugar.  More  honey  bee  colonies  die  from  lack  of  honey 
than  from  any  other  cause.  To  prevent  such  losses  the  beekeeper  must 
know  when  the  colonies  need  additional  food  and  the  best  way  to  give 
it  to  them.  There  are  two  main  periods  of  the  year  when  feeding  is 
most  often  needed.  The  early  spring  period,  after  brood  rearing  begins, 
is  the  most  critical  one.  Feeding  may  also  be  needed  in  the  fall  if  the 
summer  nectar  flow  was  a  failure  or  if  too  much  honey  was  taken  from 
the  hive  for  home  use  or  for  sale. 

A  comb  of  honey  put  into  the  hive  beside  the  brood  nest  is  the 
simplest  feeder.  Combs  of  honey  from  hives  with  a  surplus  can  be 
added  to  hives  short  of  food,  so  long  as  American  foulbrood  disease  is 
hot  present.  Brush  or  shake  bees  from  the  combs  before  exchanging 
Ithem.  Extracted  honey  can  be  fed  to  colonies  as  syrup  by  diluting  it 
one-fourth  to  one-half  with  warm  water.  Add  J4  teaspoonful  of  sodium 
sulfathiazole  per  gallon  for  disease  prevention.  For  directions  and  pre- 
cautions in  using  drugs  see  pages  136  to  137.  Because  of  the  danger 
that  purchased  honey  may  contain  bee  disease  organisms,  do  not  feed 
your  bees  honey  other  than  your  own. 

Feeding  excites  and  stimulates  the  colonies  being  fed.  This  excite- 
ment can  set  off  robbing  in  the  apiary,  particularly  of  those  colonies 
receiving  the  food.  To  reduce  or  prevent  robbing,  and  the  possible  loss 
Df  colonies,  feed  bees  late  in  the  day  after  most  flight  activity  has 
:eased.  Unless  the  weather  is  very  warm  and  all  colonies  are  strong, 
reduce  the  width  of  hive  entrances  with  cleats  so  that  colonies  can  better 
protect  their  entrances  if  robbing  takes  place. 

Table  sugar,  either  beet  or  cane,  can  be  used  in  place  of  honey  to 
feed  bees.  They  will  accept  sugar  in  several  different  forms,  including 
syrup,  fondant,  and  dry  granules.  Any  solid  form  of  sugar  must  be 
iquefied  by  the  bees  before  use  and  then  reduced  to  the  consistency  of 
ioney  if  it  is  stored.  It  takes  moisture,  sometimes  body  fluids,  to  liquefy 
ondant  and  dry  sugar.  Bees  must  also  expend  energy  to  remove  water 
from  syrup.  It  is  estimated  that  they  use  4  to  5  ounces  of  sugar  to 
:liminate  each  extra  pound  of  water  in  the  syrup.  If  you  want  to  pro- 
vide the  most  stored  food  in  relation  to  the  amount  of  sugar  fed,  use 
i  concentrated  sugar  syrup  made  from  16  pounds  of  sugar  to  each 
gallon  of  hot  water.  At  this  rate,  100  pounds  of  sugar  will  make  13  or 


103 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 

14  gallons  of  syrup.  When  fed  in  the  fall,  this  concentrated  syrup  will 
provide  up  to  11  pounds  of  stores  for  each  10  pounds  of  sugar  fed.  The 
process  is  less  efficient  when  bees  are  rearing  brood  in  the  spring.  You 
can  make  a  similar  syrup  by  using  two  volumes  of  sugar  to  one  volume 
of  hot  water. 

Dry,  granulated  sugar  can  be  used  for  emergency  feeding  but  is  nol 
suitable  for  colonies  that  must  have  food  immediately  to  survive.  Place 
it  within  the  hive  on  the  bottom  board,  in  an  open  container  above  the 
frames,  or  on  top  of  an  inner  cover  around  the  open  center  hole.  Browr 
sugar,  molasses,  plain  corn  syrup,  and  other  similar  materials  containing 
sugar  should  not  be  used  for  feeding  bees. 

There  are  several  methods  and  types  of  equipment  used  to  feed 
syrup  to  honey  bee  colonies.  The  beginner  often  uses  an  entrance 
feeder  that  holds  a  quart  jar.  It  is  easy  to  use  but  has  some  serious 
disadvantages.  For  package  colonies  and  other  small  colonies  the  syrupi 
in  the  feeder  gets  too  cold  and  is  too  far  from  the  cluster  during  coo'' 
weather.  If  you  use  one,  put  it  on  the  side  of  the  entrance  nearest  thei 
brood  nest  and  close  part  of  the  entrance  beside  the  feeder  to  reduce 
the  chance  of  robbing. 

The  division-board  feeder  hangs  inside  the  hive  in  place  of  a  frame 
(Fig.  52).  It  holds  about  2  quarts  and  can  be  refilled  without  removing; 
it  from  the  hive.  It  provides  food  quickly  to  strong  colonies  but  is  not 
a  good  choice  for  slow,  stimulative  feeding. 

The  best  all-purpose  feeder  is  the  friction  top  can  or  similar  large 
containers.  Five-  and  ten-pound  honey  cans,  unused  paint  cans,  anc 
gallon  glass  or  plastic  jars  can  be  filled  with  syrup  and  inverted  above 
the  cluster.  The  feeder  can  be  set  within  an  empty  hive  body,  eithen 
directly  on  the  frames  or  over  the  hole  of  an  inner  cover  (Fig.  53) 
Leave  part  of  the  inner  cover  hole  exposed  so  bees  can  get  out.  If  the 
feeder  leaks,  the  bees  may  collect  the  syrup  and  keep  it  from  running 
outside  the  hive  where  it  will  attract  robber  bees.  For  slow  feeding  and 
stimulation,  punch  5  to  10  holes  in  the  feeder  lid  with  a  threepenny  nail 
For  winter  or  emergency  feeding,  use  20  to  30  holes. 

There  are  two  emergency  methods  of  feeding  to  give  food  quickl) 
to  a  single  colony  or  to  a  group  of  colonies.  One  method  makes  use  oi 
open  tubs  or  troughs  filled  with  sugar  syrup.  Corks,  wooden  racks,  oi 
corncobs  are  added  to  give  the  bees  a  place  to  land.  The  tubs  are  placec 
in  the  apiary  beneath  a  temporary  cover  to  protect  them  from  rain 
This  is  a  poor  method  of  feeding  because  the  weaker  colonies  may  no 
get  the  food  they  need  to  survive.  Neighboring  colonies  can  also  gathei 
the  syrup  and  robbing  may  become  a  problem.  A  better  emergenc) 


104 


"I^t  *• 


A.  division-board  feeder  within  a  hive  body.   A  wooden  float  is  needed  inside 
the  feeder  for  the  bees  to  stand  on  when  taking  syrup.  (Fig.  52) 


^  plastic  jar  in  use  as  a  feeder  over  an  inner  cover.   An  empty  hive  body  and 
he  cover  enclose  the  feeder.  (Fig.  53) 


105 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 

method  makes  use  of  combs  filled  with  heavy  sugar  syrup.  To  fill  them, 
use  a  sprinkling  can,  a  coffee  can  with  the  bottom  full  of  nail  holes,  or 
a  garden  sprayer  free  of  insecticide  residues.  Hold  the  empty  combs 
over  a  tub  or  large  pan  and  sprinkle  or  spray  the  syrup  into  the  cells  of 
the  comb.  With  both  sides  filled,  a  comb  will  hold  several  pounds  of 
syrup.  Place  two  or  more  filled  combs  next  to  the  cluster  of  any  colony 
that  needs  food. 

Pollen,  pollen  supplements,  and  substitutes.  Pollen  for  feeding 
bees  is  obtained  by  the  use  of  pollen  traps  that  remove  fresh  pollen  pel- 
lets from  the  legs  of  incoming  field  bees.  (See  pages  47  and  129.)  For 
only  a  few  colonies,  combs  can  be  filled  with  the  pellets  and  used  im- 
mediately or  stored  for  later  use.  For  larger  numbers  of  colonies  this  I 
method  is  impractical.  To  fill  a  comb,  pour  fresh  pellets  from  a  pollen 
trap  into  the  cells  on  one  side  of  an  empty  comb,  tap  the  comb  several 
times  to  settle  the  pellets,  and  put  it  into  a  strong  colony  overnight.  The 
bees  will  pack  the  pollen  into  place  and  the  process  can  be  repeated  the 
next  day  for  the  other  side  of  the  comb.  The  pellets  from  the  trap  also 
may  be  dried  or  frozen  for  later  use. 

Pollen  substitutes  are  protein  materials,  used  alone  or  in  mixtures, 
that  bees  can  use  temporarily  for  rearing  brood.  Among  them  are  ex- 
peller-processed  soy  flour,  brewers'  yeast,  casein,  and  dried  milk.  When 
the  materials  are  mixed  with  natural  pollen  they  are  called  pollen  sup- 
plements. Bees  eat  the  supplements  much  more  readily  than  they  do  the 
substitutes  because  they  are  attracted  by  the  pollen.  Pollen  substitutes 
are  available  from  beekeeping  supply  companies  and  from  feed  com-' 
panies.  You  must  add  your  own  pollen  to  make  a  supplement. 

These  foods  can  be  given  to  bees  as  a  dry  mix  in  open  feeders  in 
the  apiary  or  as  a  moist  cake  or  patty  on  top  of  the  frames  in  the  hive 
directly  above  the  brood  nest  (Fig.  54).  For  open  feeding,  a  pan  oi 
dish  of  the  mixture  can  be  placed  in  any  open-front  box  with  an  over-! 
hanging  cover  to  keep  out  rain  and  dew  (Fig.  55).  Large-mesh  chicken 
wire  over  the  opening  lets  bees  in  but  keeps  out  other  animals. 

There  are  many  different  formulas  for  pollen  mixtures ;  they  maj 
be  purchased  ready  to  use  or  mixed  as  follows: 
Dry  mix:  2  lb.  brewers' yeast 

6  lb.  soy  flour 
2  lb.  dried,  ground  pollen  pellets,  if  available 

Pollen  cake:     15  lb.  soy  flour,  or  soy  flour-brewers'  yeast  mixture 
5  lb.  dried  pollen  pellets,  if  available 
13  lb.  water  1 
27  lb.  sugar  f  sugar  syrup 

106 


'ollen  cake  in  the  hive  above  the  brood  nest. 


(Fig.  54) 


5ees  visiting  a  box  containing  dry  pollen  mix. 
efilling  the  pan  containing  the  mixture. 


The  lid  is  hinged  for  ease  of 
(Fig.  55) 


107 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 

Add  enough  warm  water  to  the  pollen  pellets  to  make  a  paste.  Stiii 
the  pollen  paste  into  the  sugar  syrup  and  add  the  soy  flour.  Knead  the. 
mixture  into  a  smooth  dough.  Add  extra  water  or  soy  flour  if  needed, 
Put  1/2  to  1  pound  of  the  dough  between  sheets  of  waxed  paper  andij 
flatten  to  1/4-  to  ^-inch  thickness.  If  pollen  pellets  are  not  available, 
use  20  pounds  of  plain  soy  flour  or  a  pollen  substitute  mixture. 

Begin  feeding  the  dry  mix  or  pollen  cake  in  February  or  early 
March  and  make  it  available  to  the  bees  continually  until  natural  pollen 
is  available. 

Fumigating  Stored  Combs 

Honey  combs  not  protected  by  a  strong  colony  of  bees  must  be 
fumigated  to  prevent  damage  from  the  greater  wax  moth  and  other 
moth  pests.  A  beekeeper  must  assume  that  any  equipment  removed 
from  the  hives  during  the  bees'  active  season  may  be  infested.  Moth 
eggs  and  young  larvae  are  difficult  to  see.  The  equipment  must  be  fumi-i 
gated  to  kill  all  stages  of  the  moth  (egg,  larva,  pupa,  and  adult).  It 
must  also  be  guarded  against  later  infestation  as  long  as  it  is  in  storage. 

There  are  three  fumigants  approved  for  killing  wax  moths:  ethylene 
dibromide  (EDB),  carbon  dioxide  gas  (C02),  and  paradichlorobenzene 
(PDB).  Ethylene  dibromide  is  a  heavy,  clear  liquid  that  is  nonflam- 
mable and  nonexplosive.  It  forms  a  heavier-than-air  gas  that  kills  all! 
stages  of  the  wax  moth  including  the  egg.  Equipment  to  be  fumigated 
should  be  tightly  stacked  out  of  doors  or  in  a  well-ventilated  room  not 
being  used  by  people  during  the  24  to  48  hours  needed  for  fumigation. 
Place  1  tablespoonful  of  EDB  on  an  absorbent  pad  beneath  the  cover 
of  each  stack  of  not  more  than  eight  full-depth  supers  of  comb.  Use  2. 
tablespoonfuls  on  each  stack  if  the  temperature  is  below  60°F.  (16°C). 
EDB  may  be  used  on  empty  combs  and  on  combs  of  honey  to  be  ex- 
tracted. It  may  also  be  used  for  fumigating  combs  of  honey  to  be  used 
for  feeding  bees.  It  is  not  acceptable  for  fumigation  of  unprocessed 
comb  honey  for  human  consumption. 

Carbon  dioxide  is  the  only  fumigant  approved  for  comb  honey.  It 
must  be  used  in  a  relatively  airtight  room  or  container  in  which  you  can 
hold  a  concentration  of  98  percent  C02  for  4  hours  at  a  temperature  of 
100°F.  (38°C.)  and  50  percent  relative  humidity.  Although  carbon 
dioxide  is  not  a  toxic  gas,  it  must  be  used  with  care  as  a  fumigant.  At  a 
concentration  far  below  that  needed  to  kill  wax  moths  it  can  suffocate 
and  kill  humans.  Any  chamber  used  for  C02  fumigation  should'  be 
designed  to  include  an  exhaust  system  capable  of  removing  the  gas  in 
a  known  period  of  time.  Do  not  enter  the  chamber  until  the  system  has 
been  operated  at  least  that  long.  Makeshift  methods  of  fumigation  with 
108 


C02  may  also  be  dangerous  if  the  heavier-than-air  gas  flows  out  of  the 
container  being  used  to  hold  the  combs. 

Carbon  dioxide  kills  all  stages  of  the  wax  moth  and  can  be  used  on 
empty  as  well  as  full  combs.  Unless  comb  honey  is  treated  to  kill  wax 
moths,  it  may  become  unfit  for  sale  soon  after  being  harvested  if  wax 
moth  larvae  begin  to  tunnel  it  as  they  grow  and  look  for  food.  If  you 
have  a  limited  amount  of  comb  honey  or  access  to  a  large  amount  of 
freezer  space,  you  can  destroy  any  wax  moth  infestation  in  comb  honey 
by  freezing  it.  Temperatures  of  20°F.  (—7°C.)  will  kill  all  stages  in 
4i/£  hours.  At  5°F.  (  —  15°C.)  only  a  2-hour  exposure  is  needed. 

Paradichlorobenzene  is  a  white  crystalline  material  that  vaporizes 
slowly  in  air.  The  gas  is  heavier  than  air,  nonflammable,  and  nonex- 
plosive.  Place  approximately  6  tablespoonfuls  (3  ounces)  of  the  crystals 
on  a  paper  beneath  the  cover  of  a  stack  of  not  more  than  five  full-depth 
supers.  The  supers  should  be  tightly  stacked,  with  any  holes  and  large 
cracks  covered  with  tape.  PDB  kills  adult  moths  and  larvae  but  not  the 
eggs.  It  also  repels  moths  and  should  be  kept  in  the  stacks  at  all  times 
for  best  results.  Do  not  use  PDB  on  combs  containing  honey  because 
it  makes  it  toxic  and  inedible.  After  being  treated  with  PDB,  empty 
combs  should  be  aired  for  24  hours  or  more  before  being  used. 

If  you  have  only  a  few  supers  of  stored  combs,  you  should  check 
them  regularly  during  the  warm  season  for  any  sign  of  wax  moth.  For 
larger  amounts  of  comb,  it  is  better  to  fumigate  routinely  at  about 
monthly  intervals  unless  each  stack  is  protected  by  PDB.  Without  such 
precautions  you  may  find  one  or  more  stacks  of  valuable  combs  reduced 
'to  worthless  webs  and  debris. 

Handling  Beeswax 

Beeswax  is  an  important  byproduct  of  beekeeping  and  a  valuable 
ingredient  of  cosmetics,  candles,  polishes,  and  many  specialty  items.  It 
is  also  used  in  the  pure  form  to  make  comb  foundation.  The  beekeeper 

| has  several  sources  of  beeswax  including  cappings  from  honey  combs, 
damaged  combs,  and  the  bits  and  pieces  of  comb  scraped  from  hive 
bodies  and  frames.  From  10  to  12  pounds  of  wax  from  cappings  is 
obtained  for  each  1,000  pounds  of  honey,  depending  on  the  comb  spac- 

,  ing  and  yield  per  colony.  An  additional  1/2  to  24  pound  per  year  can  be 

I  saved  from  each  colony  by  collecting  all  the  burr  combs  and  scrapings. 

I  It  is  good  business  to  routinely  melt  very  old  combs  and  those  with 
large  areas  of  drone  cells,  wax-moth  damage,  and  mold.  These  should 
be  replaced  by  new  frames  with  foundation  to  maintain  good  combs 

I  throughout  the  entire  beekeeping  operation.  A  deep  super  of  old  combs 

:  will  yield  about  2J/2  pounds  of  wax. 

109 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 


Placing  a  comb  in  a  solar  wax  melter.  The  wax  pan  is  removed  through  the 
door  in  the  front.  A  screen  across  the  front  of  the  pan  for  the  combs  holds 
back  the  slumgum  while  allowing  melted  wax  to  run  into  the  lower  con- 
tainer. (Fig-  56) 


110 


Wax  from  cappings  is  light  colored  and  of  a  high  quality,  and 
should  not  be  mixed  with  darker  wax.  Cappings  should  be  melted  with 
a  large  volume  of  water  in  an  aluminum,  stainless  steel,  enameled, 
tinned,  or  galvanized  container.  Do  not  use  copper  or  uncoated  steel 
containers  because  they  discolor  the  wax.  Allow  the  wax  to  cool  slowly, 
scrape  any  impurities  from  the  bottom  of  the  cake,  and  store  it  until 
you  have  enough  to  sell. 

Large  numbers  of  combs  can  be  rendered  in  a  steam  chest  or  a  hot 
water  wax  press.  The  combs  can  also  be  taken  to  a  beekeeping  supply 
company  for  rendering.  There  is  a  charge  for  the  service  based  on  the 
amount  of  wax  recovered.  The  material  called  slumgum,  which  is  the 
residue  left  when  combs  are  melted  in  a  solar  melter  or  steam  chest,  is 
valuable  because  it  contains  up  to  30  percent  wax.  It  can  be  commer- 
cially rendered  for  a  fee  based  on  the  amount  of  wax  secured  from  the 
slumgum. 

The  solar  wax  melter  is  a  handy  piece  of  equipment  for  melting 
comb,  cappings,  and  other  sources  of  wax.  It  is  a  sloping  pan  within  a 
black,  insulated  box  with  a  glass  top,  often  of  double  glass  (Fig.  56). 
The  heat  of  the  sun  melts  wax  quickly  and  it  runs  into  a  pan  where  it 
can  be  removed  in  a  cake  the  next  morning.  The  melter  can  be  made 
any  size  to  fit  the  needs  of  the  beekeeper.  However,  it  should  be  rela- 
tively shallow  and  large  enough  to  expose  several  frames  or  excluders 
at  a  time.  It  also  can  be  designed  to  accept  cappings  baskets  made  from 
expanded  metal.  You  can  uncap  directly  into  such  baskets,  allow  them 
to  drain,  and  place  them  in  the  melter  to  render  the  wax.  A  plan  for  con- 
structing a  solar  wax  melter  can  be  found  on  page  46. 

Handling  Queen  Bees 

The  queen  is  all-important  to  the  colony,  and  the  techniques  of 
handling  and  introducing  queens  are  important  to  success  in  beekeeping. 
After  learning  to  find  the  queen  and  to  evaluate  her  quality,  you  must 
learn  to  handle  her  and  replace  her  if  necessary. 

Marking  and  clipping.  The  best  way  to  pick  up  a  queen  is  to  grasp 
both  pairs  of  wings  between  your  thumb  and  forefinger  without  pressing 
her  body,  especially  her  abdomen.  After  getting  her  up  off  the  comb, 
hold  her  against  the  forefinger  of  the  other  hand  and  trap  at  least  two 
of  her  legs  with  your  thumb.  Release  her  wings  and  you  are  ready  to 
mark  the  queen  or  clip  her  wings  (Fig.  57).  Before  handling  a  queen, 
you  can  practice  the  technique  on  drones. 

In  general,  a  laying  queen  cannot  fly  because  of  her  distended  abdo- 
men, and  she  does  not  sting  when  handled.  Mated  queens  that  are  not 


ill 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 


Holding  a  quee 
bee  in  preparatio 
for  marking  he: 
Her  legs  are  hel 
gently  but  firml 
between  the  thum 
and  forefinger. 

(Fig.  57 


laying,  such  as  those  purchased  for  requeening  or  in  a  package  of  bees 
can  fly  readily  and  will  do  so  when  released  from  their  cages.  Handl< 
them  only  in  a  closed  room  or  within  a  screened  cage  from  which  the] 
cannot  escape  (Fig.  58),  or  lightly  wet  the  queen  with  sugar  syru] 
before  opening  her  cage.  Clipped  queens  cannot  fly.  Virgin  queens  fty 
readily  and  may  also  sting  occasionally  when  handled. 

Queens  are  marked  to  make  them  easier  to  find  in  the  hive  and  t( 
indicate  their  ages.  Queens  of  the  dark-colored  races  (Caucasian  an( 
Carniolan)  should  always  be  marked  because  they  are  more  difficult! 
to  find  than  Italian  queens.  Fast-drying  enamel  paint  and  hot-fuel-prooi 
model  airplane  dope  are  satisfactory,  inexpensive  marking  material;- 
that  come  in  a  wide  range  of  bright  colors.  Apply  a  dot  of  the  materia 
to  the  queen's  thorax,  being  careful  not  to  get  it  on  her  antennae,  wings 
or  membranes.  You  can  practice  on  drones  before  attempting  to  marl 
a  queen.  Use  a  fine  brush  or,  better,  a  round-headed  pin  stuck  in  a  cork- 
Hold  the  queen  briefly  after  marking  her  to  let  the  mark  dry,  and  ther. 
release  her  on  a  comb.  In  Europe  an  international  marking  system  oi 
five  colors  is  used  to  relate  the  queen's  age  to  her  marking.  The  colors' 
and  years  represented  are  as  follows:  1976  —  white;  1977  —  yellow?. 
1978  —  red  ;  1979  —  green;  1980  —  blue ;  1981  on  —  repeat  sequence  of 
colors.  A  German  bee-supply  company,  listed  in  the  section  on  equip- 
ment dealers,  sells  queen-marking  sets  with  numbered  plastic  disks  in 
the  five  different  colors.  They  are  of  value  if  you  wish  to  identify  each 


112 


Using  a  screened  cage  to  confine  a  queen  and  her  attendants  while  handling 
them.  (Fig.  58) 


queen  individually.  The  company  also  sells  marking  tubes  that  can  be 
used  to  hold  worker  bees  for  marking.  (See  Figure  59  for  examples.) 
Queens  are  clipped  by  cutting  across  one  pair  of  wings  to  remove 
about  one-third  of  the  longer  wing.  A  fine  pair  of  scissors  such  as 
manicure  scissors  can  be  used.  Clipping  was  once  considered  to  be  a 
method  of  swarm  control  because  the  first  swarm  will  come  back  when 
the  queen  is  unable  to  fly.  It  is  actually  of  no  help  because  the  beekeeper 
usually  does  not  see  the  swarm  leave  and  return.  Shortly  thereafter  it 
Iwill  leave  for  good  with  a  virgin  queen.  Clipping  may  prevent  the  escape 
of  a  queen  being  handled  during  introduction,  but  it  is  more  often  used 
as  a  way  to  indicate  the  queen's  age.  To  use  it  for  this  purpose,  clip 
the  left  wing  in  odd  years,  the  right  wing  in  even  years.  Clipping  may 
jleacl  to  premature  supersedure  of  the  queen,  particularly  if  the  wings 
are  cut  so  short  that  the  queen's  balance  is  affected  as  she  moves  on  the 
'vertical  combs. 

Introducing.  Queen  introduction  is  an  important  part  of  bee  man- 
agement. A  new  queen  introduced  into  a  mean  colony  can  change  its 
temper  in  a  few  weeks  and  a  young  queen  can  more  than  pay  for  herself 
jby  the  increased  honey  production  of  her  colony.  Poor  queens  should 
i be  replaced  whenever  they  are  found,  and  most  colonies  should  be  re- 
'queened  at  least  every  2  years. 


113 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 


Bee-marking  equipment.  Marking  disks,  in  five  colors,  are  used  on  queens 
or  workers.  Worker  bees  held  in  the  tube  are  marked  through  the  netting. 
Model  airplane  dope  in  the  vials  is  applied  with  the  head  of  a  pin  stuck  in 
the  cork.  (Fig.  59) 


The  first  step  in  replacing  a  queen  is  to  obtain  a  young,  mated  queen 
from  a  bee  breeder.  The  queen,  together  with  6  to  12  attendant  bees 
and  a  supply  of  queen-cage  candy  for  food,  will  arrive  in  a  small 
wooden  cage  with  a  screen  top  (Fig.  60).  Give  the  bees  a  few  drops' 
of  water  on  the  screen  as  soon  as  the  cage  arrives.  If  you  cannot  intro- 
duce the  queen  that  day,  give  the  bees  water  twice  a  day  and  keep  them; 
in  a  warm  place  out  of  the  sun.  There  are  holes  in  each  end  of  the  cage 
that  are  covered  with  cork,  cardboard,  or  a  piece  of  metal.  In  prepara-i 
tion  for  introducing  the  queen,  remove  the  cover  from  the  hole  on  the< 
candy  end  to  expose  the  candy. 

The  next  step  in  introduction  is  to  make  certain  that  the  colony  that 
is  to  receive  the  queen  is  queenless  and  without  queen  cells.  Remove  i 
and  kill  the  old  queen,  if  there  is  one,  and  crush  any  queen  cells  with  a 
hive  tool  to  kill  the  larvae  in  them.  Within  2  hours,  place  the  new,  caged 
queen  in  the  hive.  Before  that,  however,  the  attendant  bees  (workers) 
in  the  queen  cage  should  be  removed.  Many  queens  are  introduced  with 
the  attendants  present  but,  because  the  colony  may  be  antagonistic; 
towards  them,  the  queen  will  have  a  better  chance  of  introduction  by  , 
herself.  Remove  the  cork  and  let  the  bees  and  queen  out  on  a  window  of 
a  room  in  which  the  lights  have  been  turned  off.  They  will  buzz  and  fan 
their  wings  but  will  rarely  sting.  As  soon  as  they  are  all  out,  pick  up 
the  queen  and  put  her,  head  first,  into  the  hole  in  the  cage.  If  you  don't 


114 


want  to  pick  her  up,  hold  the  cage  close  to  the  queen  and  "herd"  her 
into  it  with  your  fingers.  She  is  then  ready  to  be  introduced  to  the  colony 
just  prepared.  Wedge  the  cage,  candy  end  up,  between  the  top  bars  of 
two  frames  in  the  center  of  the  brood  nest  (Fig.  61).  Close  the  hive  and 
do  not  disturb  it  for  at  least  a  week. 

There  are  several  other  types  of  queen-introducing  cages  (Fig.  62). 
One  of  the  most  useful  is  the  push-in  cage  shaped  like  an  open-sided 
box,  made  of  either  metal  or  cardboard.  Both  kinds  work  on  the  same 
principle,  but  the  metal  cage  requires  the  addition  of  queen-cage  candy. 
Shake  the  bees  off  a  comb  of  emerging  brood  from  a  colony  ready  for 
a  new  queen.  Place  the  queen  beneath  the  cage  on  an  area  with  a  few 
cells  of  honey  and  emerging  bees  (Fig.  63).  Press  the  cage  at  least  ]/% 
inch  into  the  comb.  Replace  the  comb  in  the  brood  nest  and  leave  the 
hive  alone  for  at  least  a  week.  The  queen  will  be  released  when  the 
bees  eat  the  queen-cage  candy  in  the  tube  or  tear  the  cardboard  cage 
to  pieces. 

You  can  improve  your  chances  of  success  in  introducing  a  queen  if 
you  take  into  consideration  the  conditions  that  favor  acceptance.  Queens 
are  most  readily  accepted  by  small  colonies  and  during  a  nectar  flow. 


Queens  and  attendants  in  two  types  of  queen  cages.  One  compartment  is 
illed  with  candy  that  serves  as  food  for  the  bees  when  they  are  shipped  by 
nail.  (Fig.  60) 


115 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 


Introducing  j 
caged  queen  be- 
tween the  comb; 
of  a  queenless  col- 
ony. (Fig.  61' 


For  this  reason,  you  will  have  the  best  results  by  introducing  the  new 
queen  first  to  a  nucleus  or  small  colony  and  by  feeding  the  colony  a  light 
syrup  for  several  days  before  and  after  introducing  the  queen  if  there 
is  no  nectar  available  to  the  colony.  If  you  do  not  have  a  small,  queen- 
less  colony,  prepare  one  following  the  directions  in  the  section  or 
dividing  colonies,  page  101.  Then  introduce  the  queen  to  this  colony  as, 
just  explained.  When  she  is  laying  well,  unite  her  colony  with  the 
larger  one  that  needs  requeening,  after  first  being  sure  that  it  is  queen- 
less  and  without  queen  cells.  You  may  unite  it  by  the  paper  method  01 
by  just  setting  the  nucleus  in  the  colony  brood  chamber  after  removing 
an  equal  number  of  frames.  If  you  have  a  large  colony  that  needs  a 
queen  immediately,  you  have  no  choice  but  to  introduce  her  directl) 
into  that  colony.  Use  the  system  outlined  above  for  colonies  being  re- 
queened  routinely,  when  timing  is  not  so  critical. 

If  all  conditions  are  favorable  for  queen  acceptance,  old  and  new 
queens  sometimes  can  be  exchanged  directly  without  the  use  of  queen 
cages.  But  this  is  a  risky  procedure  except  under  ideal  conditions  and. 
therefore,  rarely  attempted  by  careful  beekeepers.  The  chance  of  getting 
a  queen  accepted  is  best  if  she  is  held  in  a  cage  within  the  colony  long 
enough  to  acquire  the  colony  odor  and  to  be  fed  through  the  screen  by 
the  workers.  You  can  improve  the  chances  of  acceptance  by  replacing 


116 


Different  types  of 
queen-introducing 
cages.  The  two  at 
the  top  are  com- 
mercial, dual-pur- 
pose introducing 
and  shipping  cages. 
The  bottom  two  are 
homemade  intro- 
ducing cages. 

(Fig.  62) 


Placing  the  queen 
beneath  a  push-in 
cage  on  a  comb  of 
emerging  brood. 
Note  the  queen  cage 
candy  in  the  tube 
portion  of  the  cage. 
(Fig.  63) 


117 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 

the  original  screen  on  the  queen  cage  with  8-mesh  hardware  cloth  wher 
you  remove  the  attendant  workers.  This  larger  mesh  allows  the  bees  tc 
feed  the  queen  properly,  a  job  that  is  difficult  or  impossible  through  the 
small  mesh  of  the  screen  provided  on  commercial  queen  cages.  Youi 
percentage  of  queen  acceptance  will  also  be  improved  if  you  leave  the 
candy  hole  of  the  cage  covered  for  two  or  three  days  before  removing 
the  cover  or  cork  on  a  second  visit  to  the  colony.  Obviously,  if  you  are 
requeening  large  numbers  of  colonies,  or  if  they  are  located  too  fat 
away  for  repeated  visits,  this  procedure  is  not  practical.  In  such  cases, 
be  sure  that  there  is  plenty  of  candy  in  the  cages  and  do  not  punch  a 
hole  through  the  candy  to  hasten  the  queen's  release.  She  is  much  more 
liable  to  be  killed  if  released  too  soon  than  if  she  comes  out  after  a 
delay. 

You  can  make  your  own  queen  cage  candy  to  use  for  introducing 
queens.  Stir  powdered  sugar  into  a  small  quantity  of  good-quality 
honey  that  you  know  came  from  disease- free  colonies.  You  will  need 
about  three  volumes  of  sugar  to  one  of  honey.  When  the  mixture  ben 
comes  too  thick  to  stir,  knead  additional  powdered  sugar  into  it  with 
your  hands.  Form  it  into  a  firm  ball  and  let  it  sit  for  several  hours  or 
overnight.  If  the  ball  slumps  and  becomes  softer,  add  more  powdered 
sugar,  then  store  the  finished  candy  in  a  sealed  plastic  bag  or  other  air- 
tight container.  Because  honey  is  a  possible  source  of  disease,  it  may 
not  be  used  in  queen  cage  candy  except  for  home  use.  Candy  for  queens 
sold  locally  or  shipped  must  be  made  with  commercial  invert  sugar, 
such  as  Nulomoline  or  "queen  cage  syrup,"  in  place  of  honey.  This 
invert  syrup  is  mixed  with  powdered  sugar  in  the  same  way  as  de- 
scribed above. 

Storing  queens.  Queens  are  stored  regularly  by  queen  breeders, 
who  must  have  large  numbers  available  for  sale  during  a  short  period 
of  time.  Beekeepers  may  also  need  to  store  queens  when  weather  is 
unfavorable  for  working  with  bees  and  when  they  receive  more  queens 
than  they  can  introduce  at  one  time. 

The  simplest  storage  method  for  holding  queens  as  long  as  one  to 
two  weeks  is  to  leave  them  in  their  shipping  cages  together  with  the 
attendant  workers.  When  the  queens  are  received,  the  cages  should  be 
separated  and  placed,  screen  side  up,  in  a  warm  place,  preferably  85°  to 
93°F.  (29°  to  34°C).  However,  the  cages  may  be  held  at  a  somewhat 
lower  temperature  if  necessary.  Do  not  store  the  cages  where  they 
receive  direct  sunlight.  Place  a  drop  or  two  of  water  on  the  screen  of 
each  cage  every  day,  but  be  careful  that  it  does  not  drip  onto  the  candy 
within  the  cage.  Cover  the  cages  with  a  sheet  of  cardboard  except  when 
giving  water  to  the  bees. 

118 


For  longer  periods  of  storage,  or  when  you  have  no  warm  place  in 
which  to  keep  them,  queens  can  be  held  within  a  honey  bee  colony.  Re- 
move all  attendant  bees  from  the  cages  leaving  only  the  queens.  If  there 
is  candy  in  the  cage,  be  sure  that  the  hole  on  that  end  of  the  cage  is 
closed  by  a  cork  or  by  some  other  material  the  bees  cannot  remove 
easily.  The  queens  can  be  placed  in  a  colony  with  a  queen  as  long  as  she 
is  beneath  an  excluder.  Place  the  queen  cages,  screen  side  down,  over 
the  center  frames  of  the  first  super  above  the  excluder.  Make  sure  that 
the  bees  have  access  to  the  screened  area  where  the  queen  is  located  in 
each  cage.  Naturally  the  colony  must  be  strong  enough  so  that  all  hive 
bodies  are  well  filled  with  worker  bees.  Put  a  cloth  over  the  cages  to 
hold  in  the  heat  and  add  an  empty  super  before  putting  on  the  lid. 
Larger  numbers  of  queen  cages  should  be  placed  in  a  frame  modified 
to  hold  them  within  the  colony  above  the  excluder.  Put  a  frame  of 
unsealed  brood  next  to  the  screened  sides  of  the  cages. 

In  strong,  queenless  colonies,  queens  may  be  stored  in  the  center 
of  the  brood  nest  in  a  frame  next  to  one  containing  unsealed  brood. 
The  colony  must  be  given  additional,  sealed  and  unsealed  brood  if  the 
queens  are  to  be  stored  in  it  for  more  than  a  week.  Do  not  allow  the 
colony  to  raise  a  queen  of  its  own  until  the  stored  queens  are  removed. 
In  well-maintained,  queenless  colonies,  stored  queens  can  be  kept  in 
good  condition  for  periods  of  one  to  two  months  if  necessary.  It  is 
better,  however,  to  put  them  into  nucleus  colonies  of  their  own  for 
such  extended  periods.  They  are  available  at  any  time  to  replace  lost  or 
failing  queens  in  large  colonies.  Unless  there  is  a  good  nectar  flow 
when  queens  are  being  stored  in  a  colony,  you  should  feed  the  colony 
with  sugar  syrup. 

Queen  rearing.  Queen  rearing  is  one  of  the  most  fascinating  parts 
of  beekeeping  but  is  beyond  the  scope  of  this  circular.  When  you  have 
mastered  keeping  bees  for  honey  production,  try  queen  rearing.  Books 
on  the  subject  are  available  at  libraries  and  from  beekeeping  supply 
!  companies. 

Hiving  Swarms 

Swarms  are  a  problem  to  the  beekeeper  and  to  people  who  are  con- 
fronted with  them  in  their  yards  or  some  other  location.  The  beginning 
beekeeper  can  use  them  to  gain  additional  colonies  or  to  strengthen 
established  ones.  However,  the  time  and  expense  of  obtaining  them  is 
often  more  than  the  small  value  of  the  bees  themselves.  Experienced 
beekeepers  should  consider  swarm  catching  a  service  and  charge  ac- 
cordingly for  their  time  and  expenses.  In  some  states  a  license  is  needed 
to  perform  this  service. 

119 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 

Swarms  are  not  always  gentle  and  you  should  wear  a  veil  and  use  ; 
smoker  while  working  with  them.  Prepare  a  single-story  hive  with  nin< 
combs,  either  empty  or  partially  filled  with  honey.  Foundation  is  les 
suitable  but  can  be  used  if  you  have  no  empty  combs  available.  If  thi 
swarm  is  close  to  the  ground,  or  clustered  on  a  branch  that  can  be  cm 
off,  smoke  the  bees  and  shake  them  into  the  open  hive  or  in  front  of  it 
In  some  cases  you  may  have  to  shake  the  bees  into'  a  pan,  burlap  bag,  O' 
other  container  in  order  to  carry  them  to  a  hive.  If  you  are  successfu 
in  getting  the  queen  with  the  rest  of  the  swarm,  the  bees  will  enter  thi 
hive  and  make  themselves  at  home.  They  should  be  moved  that  nigh 
to  a  permanent  location.  The  swarm  colony  can  be  allowed  to  develop  I 
or  can  be  used  to  strengthen  another  colony.  If  you  know  from  which 
colony  a  swarm  cams,  you  may  put  it  back  after  correcting  the  condill 
tions  that  caused  swarming  to  develop. 

Swarms   sometimes   come   from   colonies   infected   with   Americarj 
foulbrood  disease.  The  honey  carried  by  the  bees  can  infect  the  broocj 
of  the  new  colony.  This  serious  threat,  although  not  a  common  occur! 
rence,  can  be  eliminated  by  hiving  all  swarms  on  foundation  and  imme- 
diately feeding  them  1  gallon  of  sugar  syrup  containing  14  teaspoor 
of  sodium  sulfathiazole.  Swarms  hived  on  comb  can  also  be  fed  in  the 
same  way,  but  the  protection  from  disease  is  less  certain.  Whether  01 
not  you   feed  the  medicated  syrup,  carefully  inspect  the  colony  foi 
disease  at  least  twice  before  adding  another  hive  body  with  combs  01 
foundation. 

Identifying  Apiaries  and  Equipment 

Hives  and  apiaries  located  away  from  the  beekeeper's  home  should 
be  marked  to  show  ownership.  Such  identification  helps  to  prevent 
vandalism  and  theft  because  it  indicates  that  someone  owns  the  bees. 
Otherwise  people  frequently  believe  that  bees  have  been  abandoned 
because  they  do  not  see  anyone  visit  the  apiary.  Identification  is  also 
essential  if  beekeepers  are  to  be  notified  of  pesticide  applications  01 
other  farm  operations  affecting  their  colonies. 

One  form  of  identification  is  the  owner's  name  and  address  stencilled 
in  large  letters  on  the  hives  or  on  a  prominent  sign  beside  the  apiary. 
The  letters  should  be  at  least  1  inch  high  so  that  a  person  who  is  afraid 
of  the  bees  can  read  the  sign  at  a  distance. 

Frames  and  other  wooden  hive  parts  can  be  identified  by  names  or 
symbols  stencilled,  stamped,  or  branded  on  the  wood  (Fig.  64). 


120 


A  branding  iron 
and  propane  torch 
used  to  identify 
frames  and  other 
wooden  equipment. 
(Fig.  64) 


Keeping  Records 

Beekeeping  records  are  of  two  general  types  —  management  and 
[financial.  Management  records  include  all  the  details  of  the  work  and 
Dbservations  related  to  keeping  bees.  If  the  information  is  recorded 
regularly,  it  will  soon  be  valuable  for  planning  work,  for  increasing 
your  knowledge  of  the  biology  of  honey  bees,  and  for  relating  manage- 
ment to  expenses  and  income.  Even  a  simple  diary  kept  up  to  date  can 
be  a  worthwhile  and  enjoyable  part  of  keeping  bees.  Some  of  the  things 
to  record  are  local  weather  data,  dates  on  which  nectar  and  pollen  plants 
bloom,  colony  losses,  colony  weight  records,  and  the  dates  of  doing 
such  jobs  as  spring  inspection,  supering,  removing  honey,  and  extracting. 

Financial  records  are  essential  for  anyone  who  keeps  enough  col- 
pnies  to  sell  honey.  They  should  be  detailed  enough  to  make  a  financial 
[summary  each  year  for  your  own  information  and  for  computing  in- 
come taxes  and  other  reports  required  for  business.  Farm  record  books 
(are  available  from  extension  service  publication  offices.  Although  they 
are  designed  for  general  farming,  they  can  be  modified  for  keeping 
detailed  records  of  a  beekeeping  business.  Apiary  record  booklets  are 
also  available  from  several  sources  in  the  Midwest.  Check  with  your 
extension  beekeeping  specialist  or  entomologist  for  details. 


121 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 

Bank-operated  recordkeeping  services  can  be  adapted  for  beekeeping 
enterprises  as  well  as  for  farm  businesses.  They  simplify  recordkeeping 
for  tax  purposes  and  may  prove  helpful  in  making  short-  or  long-term 
loans.  Lending  institutions  need  net  worth  statements  and  cash  flow 
records  in  support  of  loan  applications. 

Killing  Bees 

Honey  bee  colonies  should  be  killed  when  they  become  infected  with 
American  foulbrood  disease,  when  they  are  living  in  the  walls  of  a 
building  or  some  other  unsuitable  location,  or  when  bee  equipment  must 
be  freed  quickly  of  all  bees.  Any  material  used  to  kill  a  colony  in  a 
hive  must  have  no  residual  effect  that  would  prevent  reuse  of  the  combs 
or  wooden  parts.  Insecticides  cannot  be  used  for  this  reason.  Although 
it  is  highly  toxic,  the  best  material  to  use  is  powdered  calcium  cyanide, 
sold  as  Cyanogas  A-Dust.  In  contact  with  water  or  moisture  from  the 
air  it  releases  cyanide  gas.  The  material  is  poisonous  and  extremely 
dangerous.  It  must  be  used  only  outdoors  and  with  proper  precautions 
to  avoid  breathing  the  gas  or  dust.  When  not  in  use,  it  should  be  kept 
in  a  locked,  dry  place.  Cyanide  is  not  readily  available  for  purchase, 
and  its  use  may  ultimately  be  banned.  You  should  check  with  your  state 
Department  of  Agriculture  or  extension  entomologist  to  learn  the  latest 
ruling  on  the  use  of  cyanide  and  the  availability  of  alternative  materials 
for  killing  bees. 

Kill  the  bees  in  a  hive  when  they  are  not  flying,  either  in  the  evening 
or  early  morning.  Sprinkle  a  tablespoon ful  of  the  cyanide  dust  on  a 
piece  of  paper  or  cardboard  several  inches  square  and  slip  it  into  the 
hive  entrance.  If  you  are  dealing  with  a  strong  colony,  be  sure  to  spread 
the  dust  over  a  rather  large  area.  The  dying  bees  will  sometimes  cover 
a  small  pile  of  dust  and  prevent  it  from  vaporizing  properly.  Close 
the  entrance  and  leave  the  hive  alone  for  at  least  30  minutes  to  allow 
the  gas  to  dissipate. 

Colonies  in  buildings  should  be  killed  only  with  the  insecticide 
carbaryl  (Sevin).  Fumigants  are  too  dangerous  for  this  purpose.  It  is 
important  to  first  locate  the  brood  nest  in  the  wall  to  learn  whether  it 
can  be  reached  by  insecticide  sprayed  or  dusted  into  the  flight  hole. 
Sometimes  the  brood  nest  is  a  long  distance  from  the  entrance.  By  tap-  > 
ping  and  listening  you  can  locate  the  main  group  of  bees  on  a  cold  day 
or  at  night  when  the  bees  are  not  flying.  Apply  the  dust  or  spray  at  the 
entrance  or  through  a  hole  drilled  close  to  the  brood  nest.  Use  the  mate- 
rial at  the  concentration  recommended  on  the  label  for  control  of  bees 
and  wasps.  After  the  bees  have  been  killed,  the  dead  bees  and  comb 


122 


should  be  removed  from  the  wall  and  burned  or  buried.  The  location 
will  be  attractive  to  other  swarms  because  of  the  odors  present.  Filling 
the  cavity  with  insulation  or  some  other  nonflammable  material  will 
prevent  bees  from  nesting  in  the  same  location  again. 

Moving  Bees 

Midwest  beekeeping  is  gradually  becoming  more  migratory  as  more 
colonies  are  moved  to  sources  of  nectar  and  are  used  for  pollination. 
Even  those  beekeepers  who  don't  regularly  move  their  hives  must  some- 
times move  them  short  or  long  distances. 

The  field  bees  from  hives  moved  short  distances  —  a  few  feet  to 
as  much  as  a  mile  or  more  —  tend  to  return  to  the  original  hive  location. 
As  they  fly  out  into  familiar  territory  they  use  the  landmarks  and  flight 
paths  that  bring  them  back  to  the  old  hive  location.  If  one  hive  of  a 
gjroup  is  moved  a  short  distance,  its  returning  field  bees  will  join  hives 
beside  the  old  location.  It  is  better,  if  possible,  to  move  all  the  hives 
together,  a  few  yards  at  a  time,  when  relocating  them  a  short  distance. 
Move  the  bees  in  the  evening  or  early  morning  after  thoroughly  smoking 
the  entrance  and  any  other  openings.  You  may  leave  the  entrance  open 
or  screen  it  closed  with  a  folded  piece  of  window  screen  or  8-mesh 
hardware  cloth.  (See  Figure  49.)  Careful  handling  usually  makes  it 
unnecessary  to  fasten  the  hive  parts  together  to  move  colonies  within 
|an  apiary  or  close  to  it.  However,  if  you  want  to  fasten  them  together, 
lo  so  at  least  4  hours  before  moving  the  bees. 

Most  bee  moving  involves  distances  great  enough  to  put  the  field 
oees  into  territory  unfamiliar  to  them.  No  exact  minimum  distance  can 
3e  given  because  it  varies  with  each  area  and  with  the  foraging  distances 
3f  the  field  bees.  In  some  areas  a  1-mile  move  is  sufficient,  but  a  good 
iverage  distance  is  2  miles.  Naturally,  the  farther  you  move  the  bees  the 
ess  likely  is  the  chance  that  some  foragers  will  return  to  the  old  location. 

The  best  time  to  move  colonies  is  about  dusk  when  most  of  the  bees 
are  no  longer  flying.  Early  morning  is  less  suitable  because  the  increas- 
ng  light  intensity  and  rising  temperature  make  the  bees  eager  to  leave 
:he  hive.  If  you  have  difficulties,  it  is  better  to  have  the  extra  time  avail- 
ible  at  night.  A  cool,  rainy  day  is  also  a  good  time  to  move  bees  at  any 
lour  so  long  as  the  bees  are  not  flying. 

The  beginning  beekeeper  who  moves  bees  by  truck  or  trailer  should 
nake  preparations  to  complete  the  job  without  accidents.  Prepare  the 
colonies  a  day  or  more  ahead  of  the  move  by  fastening  the  hive  parts 
[ogether.  Use  hive  staples,  lath,  or  steel  or  plastic  strapping.  If  you  use 
Staples  don't  put  more  than  four  between  any  two  hive  parts.  Drive 

123 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 

them  in  so  they  make  an  angle  of  about  45  degrees  with  the  crack  where 
the  hive  parts  meet  (Fig.  65).  Lath  cleats  are  placed  on  opposite  sides 
of  the  colony  and  nailed  in  place  with  two  or  more  threepenny  or  four- 
penny  nails  in  each  hive  part.  Be  sure  to  smoke  the  hive  well  before  you 
hit  it  with  the  hammer.  Steel  strapping  is  easy  to  use  and  holds  the  hives 
tightly  but  it  requires  special,  fairly  expensive  equipment.  Plastic  tapes 
are  equally  good  and  are  easier  to  fasten  with  simple  equipment.  In  hot 
weather,  especially  with  strong  colonies,  moving  screens  should  be  used 
in  place  of  the  regular  hive  cover.  Cover  an  empty  shallow  super  or 
similar  wooden  frame  with  window  screen  or  8-mesh  hardware  cloth 
and  place  it,  screen  side  up,  over  the  hive.  (See  Figure  50.)  The  bees 
can  cluster  in  the  space  and  ventilate  the  colony  through  the  screen. 
Fasten  the  hive  together  with  the  screen  in  place.  Cut  an  entrance  screen 
for  each  hive  the  exact  length  of  the  entrance  and  about  4  inches  wide,  i 
Fold  it  into  a  loose  V  that  will  slip  into  the  entrance  and  stay  in  place. 
Seal  or  plug  all  other  holes  in  the  hive. 


Hive  staples  in  place  to  hold  hive  parts  together  for  moving 


124 


When  you  are  ready  to  load  the  hives,  put  on  a  veil  and  light  a 
;moker.  Smoke  the  hive  entrance  well  and  wait  a  minute  or  two  before 
lipping  in  the  entrance  screens.  If  bees  are  clustered  on  the  front  of 
he  hive  you  may  have  to  smoke  them  more  than  once  and  wait  several 
ninutes  before  they  all  go  into  the  hive.  Place  the  hives  in  a  truck  or 
railer  with  the  entrances  facing  forward.  Arrange  the  hives  as  close 
ogether  as  possible  in  order  to  reduce  bouncing  and  shifting  while  en 
oute  and  tie  them  in  place  if  possible.  At  the  new  location  put  all  the 
lives  in  place,  smoke  the  entrances  well,  and  remove  the  entrance 
creens  immediately.  You  may  remove  the  top  screens  at  this  time  or 
eave  them  in  place  with  a  cover  over  them  until  you  have  time  to 
remove  them. 

The  advanced  amateur  or  the  commercial  beekeeper  usually  moves 
kes  without  entrance  or  top  screens  except  on  occasions  when  special 
>recautions  are  needed.  Hives  moved  regularly  should  have  the  bottom 
>oards  nailed  in  place  and  should  be  equipped  with  covers  that  are  the 
ame  width  as  the  hive  bodies.  Proper  hive  equipment  and  a  flat-bed 
;ruck  with  hooks  on  which  to  tie  the  ropes  reduce  problems  in  moving 
!>ees  (Fig.  66).  A  typical  move  by  a  commercial  beekeeper  may  take 
ilace  as  follows.  At  dusk  the  beekeeper  drives  into  the  bee  yard  and 
>repares  to  load  the  hives  onto  the  truck  with  its  headlights  off  but  with 
he  running  lights  on  and  engine  running.  The  running  lights  provide 
pme  light  to  see  by,  and  the  vibration  of  the  engine  helps  to  calm  the 
lees  after  they  are  loaded  onto  the  truck.  With  the  help  of  another 
Person,  or  with  a  hive  loader,  the  beekeeper  quickly  places  the  hives, 
Ine  to  three  tiers  deep,  in  rows  of  five  across  the  truck.  Each  colony  is 
moked  before  it  is  loaded,  and  the  bees  on  the  truck  are  smoked  peri- 
odically if  they  show  signs  of  unrest.  As  soon  as  the  load  is  in  place, 
pe  beekeeper  ties  each  row  using  a  trucker's  hitch  and  a  good-quality, 
k-inch  hemp  or  polypropylene  rope.  At  the  new  location,  the  lights  are 
urned  off,  the  engine  is  left  running,  and  the  smoker  is  lighted.  After 
he  entire  load  is  smoked,  the  ropes  are  untied  and  the  hives  unloaded. 
The  beekeeper  is  ready  to  leave  the  apiary  as  soon  as  the  smoker  is  out 
nd  the  ropes  are  coiled. 

Hive  loaders  make  bee  moving  a  one-man  task.  They  are  also  useful 
or  handling  honey  supers  and  other  equipment.  (See  Figures  66  and 
p\)  Heavy-duty  loaders  can  handle  two  hives  on  a  pallet  or  one  above 
he  other  for  loading  two  tiers  at  a  time.  A  tractor  with  a  fork  lift  can 
e  used  for  loading  pallets  with  six  or  more  hives.  Such  palletized  hives 
re  preferred  by  apple  growers  for  use  in  hilly  orchards  where  a  tractor 
nust  move  the  bees  to  their  locations  among  the  trees.  The  hives  are 
trapped  to  the  pallets  and  tied  with  ropes  to  the  truck. 

125 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 


Moving     bees     with    ai 
electric  hive  loader. 

(Fig.  66; 


Cradle  of  hive  loadei 
with  control  buttons 
Spring-loaded  clamps  fit 
into  the  hive  handholds 
to  support  the  hive. 

(Fig.  67} 


126 


In  most  states,  colonies  must  be  inspected  and  a  permit  must  be  ob- 
tained before  bees  can  be  moved  into  the  state.  These  procedures  may 
also  be  required  for  movement  between  counties.  Before  moving  your 
bees,  inquire  about  the  regulations  at  your  state  Department  of  Agri- 
ulture  or  other  responsible  agency. 


c 


Repelling  Bees 

When  robbing  gets  started  in  an  apiary,  it  may  be  necessary  to  repel 
robber  bees  from  weak  colonies,  open  hives,  and  any  equipment  stacked 
in  the  apiary.  The  first  thing  to  do  is  reduce  the  size  of  entrances  of 
all  weak  colonies  or  nuclei.  For  extended  periods,  place  a  cleat  over  all 
but  an  inch  or  two  of  the  entrance.  As  a  temporary  measure,  stuff  grass, 
leaves,  or  similar  materials  into  the  entrance  so  that  only  a  small  open 
area  is  left  to  be  defended  by  the  bees.  To  make  it  easier  for  the  bees 
to  remove  the  material  later,  do  not  push  it  in  too  tightly.  If  you  must 
continue  to  work,  expose  as  little  of  the  hive  as  possible.  Set  supers  flat 
on  the  inverted  cover  and  put  wet  cloths  over  the  top  of  them.  Do  not 
set  any  frames  outside  the  hive  or  expose  honey,  syrup,  or  bits  of  comb 
to  the  robber  bees.  Under  severe  robbing  conditions  cover  the  open  top 
of  the  hive  with  wet  cloths,  leaving  only  enough  space  to  examine  one 
comb. 

There  are  no  effective  repellents  available  for  use  on  crop  plants  to 
reduce  insecticide  damage  to  bees.  It  is  also  difficult  to  repel  bees  from 
their  accustomed  watering  places  such  as  bird  baths  and  other  places 
where  they  are  not  wanted.  Solutions  containing  pine  tar,  or  having  the 
odor  of  phenol,  are  slightly  repellent  to  honey  bees  and  may  be  useful. 

Saving  Queenless  Colonies  and  Helping  Weak  Ones 

When  you  are  certain  that  a  colony  is  without  a  queen,  there  are 
several  things  you  can  do  for  it,  depending  on  the  type  of  colony  in- 
volved and  the  time  of  year.  The  queen  lost  from  a  new  package  colony 
must  be  replaced  very  quickly  if  the  colony  is  to  survive  and  be  pro- 
ductive. Get  a  queen  locally  if  possible.  In  some  localities,  such  as  the 
Chicago  area,  queens  are  available  from  bee  supply  dealers.  Unfortu- 
nately, by  the  time  you  are  sure  a  package  colony  is  queenless,  it  may 
be  too  late  to  get  either  another  queen  or  a  replacement  package.  As  a 
last  resort  in  such  cases,  you  may  want  to  put  a  swarm  into  your 
equipment.  By  giving  your  name  to  the  police  department  you  can  be 
notified  of  the  location  of  swarms. 

Even  small,  queenless  colonies  can  usually  produce  a  queen  if  they 
have  eggs  and  young  larvae  or  are  given  a  comb  containing  them  from 


127 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 

another  colony.  Insert  a  comb  with  a  small  amount  of  brood,  less  than 
one-fourth  of  a  frame,  into  the  center  of  the  cluster.  Queens  produced 
under  the  adverse  conditions  in  small  colonies  are  rarely  very  good  and 
should  be  replaced  later,  but  they  can  keep  a  colony  alive  and  growing. 

After  a  honey  bee  colony  has  been  queenless  for  about  two  weeks, 
worker  bees  begin  to  lay  eggs.  They  do  not  lay  in  a  neat  pattern  as  the 
queen  does.  They  scatter  eggs  more  randomly  and  put  several  eggs  in 
each  cell.  The  eggs  are  usually  on  the  sides  of  the  cell  instead  of  at  the 
base  where  they  are  placed  by  a  queen.  The  presence  of  laying  workers 
in  a  colony  makes  it  difficult  to  introduce  a  new,  laying  queen.  The  best 
treatment  is  to  remove  the  combs  in  which  workers  have  laid  and  to 
replace  them  with  one  or  more  frames  of  unsealed  worker  brood  with 
adhering  bees.  The  added  brood  suppresses  egg  laying  by  the  workers, 
and  the  young  bees  are  more  receptive  to  a  new  queen  than  are  the 
older  bees  that  make  up  a  large  part  of  the  population  of  a  queenless 
hive.  As  soon  as  you  have  added  the  brood  and  bees,  you  can  introduce 
a  new  queen  by  placing  her  cage  between  the  added  frames.  Do  not  try 
to  get  rid  of  laying  workers  by  moving  the  hive  or  by  "shaking  out" 
the  combs.  Such  methods  are  unsuccessful  because  laying  workers  can 
fly  as  well  as  their  nonlaying  sisters. 

Colonies  in  an  apiary  are  often  of  different  strengths,  or  popula- 
tions, especially  in  the  spring.  Even  those  with  good  queens  may  be 
slow  in  gaining  size  because  of  a  heavy  loss  of  bees  during  the  winter. 
You  can  help  the  smaller  colonies  by  adding  frames  of  sealed  or  emerg- 
ing brood  and  bees  from  the  larger  ones.  Before  making  such  a  transfer, 
find  the  queen  in  the  larger  colony  or  make  sure  she  is  not  on  any  comb 
being  transferred.  Add  one  or  more  frames  with  brood  and  bees,  giving 
one  for  each  four  frames  covered  by  bees  in  the  smaller  colony.  On  a 
nice,  warm  day  when  the  bees  are  flying  well,  you  can  use  another 
method  to  help  the  small  colony.  Shake  the  bees  from  several  frames 
of  brood  directly  in  front  of,  and  close  to,  the  entrance  of  the  weak 
colony.  Select  combs  from  a  large  colony  after  locating  the  queen.  The 
young  bees  will  enter  the  colony  with  little  or  no  resistance.  The  older 
bees  that  have  previously  flown  will  return  to  their  original  colony. 

A  swarm  can  also  be  used  to  strengthen  a  weak  colony  rather  than 
to  start  a  new  one.  Collect  the  swarm  in  a  container,  such  as  a  card- 
board box,  from  which  you  can  easily  dump  it.  Place  an  excluder,  with 
an  empty  deep  super  above  it,  over  the  frames  of  the  weak  colony. 
Smoke  both  the  colony  and  the  swarm  and  dump  the  swarm  bees  into 
the  empty  super.  Continue  to  smoke  the  bees  enough  so  that  they  move 
down  through  the  excluder.  Find  and  remove  the  swarm  queen,  remove 
the  excluder  and  super,  and  replace  the  hive  cover. 

128 


These  methods  of  helping  weaker  colonies  do  two  things  for  you. 
They  reduce  the  size  of  the  large  colonies  and  aid  in  swarm  prevention. 
They  also  produce  colonies  of  more  equal  strength  that  can  be  manipu- 
lated more  uniformly.  Honey  production  can  be  improved  by  bringing 
the  colonies  into  a  nectar  flow  neither  weak  nor  so  big  that  they  are 
ready  to  swarm.  Brood  added  to  package  colonies  will  also  help  them 
to  reach  full  strength  much  faster  than  colonies  not  given  such  help. 

Transferring  Bees 

Many  publications  have  been  written  about  transferring  bees  from 
primitive  hives,  buildings,  and  trees  to  modern  hives.  They  usually 
suggest  tearing  open  the  colony  and  fitting  the  combs  into  new  frames. 
Another  method  uses  a  screen  cone  or  bee  escape  over  the  flight  hole  so 
that  bees  can  come  out  but  not  reenter  the  hole.  The  displaced  bees  are 
supposed  to  enter  a  hive  located  beside  the  entrance. 

Transferring  bees  is  no  job  for  the  beginner,  and  it  is  not  worth- 
while for  the  experienced  who  can  obtain  all  the  bees  they  need  by  di- 
viding their  colonies.  Rather  than  risk  the  possibility  of  being  seriously 
stung  for  little  reward,  you  should  resist  the  temptation  to  transfer  a 
colony  and,  instead,  should  kill  the  bees  or  leave  them  alone.  If  you 
want  to  try  removing  bees  from  a  building,  do  the  job  for  a  fee,  not 
[just  for  the  bees  and  any  honey  in  the  colony.  You  might  consider 
transferring  bees  as  a  sport  or  a  form  of  recreation,  but  it  is  not  a  good 
way  to  begin  beekeeping  or  to  increase  your  number  of  colonies. 

Trapping  Pollen 

Trapped  pollen  is  of  value  for  feeding  bees.  It  will  become  increas- 
ingly important  as  natural  sources  of  pollen  become  scarcer  and  as  more 
colonies  are  used  for  spring  pollination  of  crops  such  as  apples.  A 
market  has  developed  for  pollen  for  use  by  commercial  beekeepers  to 
feed  their  colonies. 

Pollen  traps  vary  in  some  features  of  design  but  all  of  the  available 
models  have  a  double  screen  of  5-mesh  hardware  cloth  that  scrapes 
some  of  the  pollen  pellets  from  the  legs  of  incoming  pollen-collecting 
bees  (Fig.  68).  The  pollen  falls  through  another  screen  into  a  box  or 
tray  where  it  is  inaccessible  to  the  colony  and  can  be  removed  without 
disturbing  the  bees.  The  traps  remove  only  part  of  the  incoming  pollen 
and  they  stimulate  colonies  to  collect  more.  They  probably  reduce  honey 
production  if  used  on  the  same  colony  for  more  than  a  week  or  two  at 
ia  time.  However,  the  value  of  the  pollen  for  supplemental  feeding  can 
■easily  offset  the  loss  of  part  of  the  honey  crop  from  a  few  colonies. 

129 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 

The  pollen  should  be  collected  from  the  traps  at  least  three  times  per 
week  and  dried  or  frozen  for  storage.  If  you  wish  to  dry  the  pollen,  use 
shallow  layers  exposed  to  the  air  or  heated  at  moderate  temperatures, 
not  over  140°F.  (60°C),  in  an  oven.  Ants,  wax-moth  larvae,  and  small 
beetles  are  often  found  in  the  pollen.  The  ants  can  be  discouraged  by 
use  of  sticky  barriers  or  pans  of  oil  surrounding  the  supports  for  the 
hive  (Fig.  68).  Rain  ruins  pollen  quickly  and  all  traps  seem  to  be  vul- 
nerable to  it.  In  selecting  a  pollen  trap,  choose  the  design  that  will  best 
keep  rain  out  and  provide  the  maximum  area  of  ventilation  for  the  hive. 
A  plan  for  building  a  pollen  trap  is  given  on  page  48. 


Pollen  trap  and  stand  that  fit  beneath  the  hive.  Bees  enter  through  the  wide 
entrance  and  crawl  upward  into  the  hive  through  the  double  screen.  The 
pollen  falls  through  the  bottom  screen  and  is  removed  on  a  tray  from  the 
rear  of  the  hive.  (Modified  from  an  original  design  by  the  Ontario  Agricul- 
tural College  in  Canada.)  (Fig.  68) 


130 


Uniting  Bees 

Weak  colonies  are  often  liabilities  instead  of  assets.  This  is  espe- 
cially true  when  they  have  poor  queens  or  have  been  queenless  so  long 
that  laying  workers  are  present.  Such  colonies  will  not  make  any  honey 
and  are  not  good  risks  for  wintering.  They  should  be  united  with  a 
moderately  strong  colony  with  a  good  queen.  Uniting  two  weak  colonies 
will  not  produce  one  strong  colony. 

Kill  any  queen  present  in  the  weak  colony  and  place  the  hive,  with- 
iut  a  bottom  board,  above  a  single  sheet  of  newspaper  over  the  open 


$ 


y 


s 


Jniting  a  small  colony  with  a  larger  one  by  the  paper  method.  (Fig.  69) 

131 


Miscellaneous  Techniques  in  Beekeeping 

top  of  the  stronger  colony  (Fig.  69).  Punch  a  few  small  slits  in  the 
paper  to  make  it  easier  for  the  bees  to  remove  it.  In  hot  weather  wait 
until  late  afternoon  so  the  heat  and  lack  of  ventilation  will  not  damage 
the  upper  colony.  The  bees  will  remove  the  paper  with  little  fighting 
and  the  colonies  will  be  united.  Any  colonies  united  in  the  fall  should 
be  checked  again  before  winter  to  be  sure  that  the  clusters  are  together 
and  that  the  hive  has  sufficient  stores  for  winter. 

Although  the  newspaper  method  is  the  safest  way  to  unite  bees  and' 
causes  few  losses  of  bees,  colonies  may  be  united  without  the  precau-i 
tions  mentioned  above.  You  can  unite  bees  from  several  hives  in  the 
same  way  as  you  can  make  divides  and  nuclei  from  frames  of  brood 
and  bees  from  several  colonies.  If  none  of  the  queens  are  of  special 
value,  put  all  the  bees  together  without  finding  or  killing  any  queens. 
The  youngest  queen  is  most  likely  to  survive  and  only  rarely  will  all  of 
the  queens  be  killed.  The  united  colony  should  be  checked  after  a  week 
or  two  for  the  presence  of  the  queen  and  its  general  condition  and 
arrangement.  When  colonies  are  united,  the  returning  field  bees  from 
the  relocated  hives  are  disoriented  briefly.  They  soon  join  the  united 
colony  and  settle  down  with  only  minor  problems. 


132 


DISEASES,   PESTS, 
J±2XU   PESTICIDES 
AFFECTING   liOHSTEY   BEES 


The  honey  bee  is  subject  to  many  diseases  and  pests  as  are  other 
insects  and  livestock.  The  diseases  differ  in  their  severity  but  all  of 
them  can  be  prevented  or  controlled  by  proper  management.  Such  man- 
agement includes  knowing  and  recognizing  the  symptoms  of  diseases, 
inspecting  colonies  regularly,  and  applying  control  measures  promptly 
when  disease  is  found.  Drugs  and  antibiotics  are  effective  in  preventing 
disease  but  cannot  substitute  for  good  management.  They  must  be  used 
at  the  proper  time  and  dosage  to  avoid  contamination  of  honey. 

The  diseases  of  bees  are  usually  divided  into  two  classes  —  those 
that  attack  the  developing  stages  (the  brood),  and  those  that  attack 
adult  bees.  In  general,  the  brood  diseases  are  more  serious  and  their 
symptoms  are  more  definite  and  distinctive  than  those  of  the  adult 
diseases.  It  takes  experience  and  close  observation  to  distinguish  a  dis- 
eased larva  or  pupa  from  a  healthy  one,  or  one  dead  from  other  causes. 
This  experience  can  be  gained  only  by  frequent  examination  of  the 
combs  of  a  colony.  This  is  one  of  the  reasons  why  the  beginning  bee- 
keeper must  open  the  colonies  regularly. 

Brood  Diseases 

American  foulbrood.  This  disease,  usually  called  AFB,  has  always 
been  a  problem  in  beekeeping.  It  is  caused  by  a  bacterium,  or  germ, 
called  Bacillus  larvae,  which  has  a  long-lived,  resistant  spore  that  can 
remain  dormant  for  more  than  50  years  in  combs  and  honey.  When 
food  containing  spores  is  fed  to  a  young  larva,  the  spores  germinate 
land  multiply  until  they  kill  the  developing  bee  just  after  its  cell  is 
sealed.  Until  that  time  no  symptoms  of  the  infection  are  visible  except 
perhaps  a  slight  graying  or  dullness  of  the  usually  glistening  white 
immature  insect.  The  infected  bee  dies  as  a  larva  stretched  lengthwise 
in  the  cell,  or  as  a  new  pupa  with  the  body  features  of  an  adult  bee. 
The  capping  of  an  infected  cell  may  be  slightly  sunken  and  darker  than 
healthy  ones  around  it.  Adult  bees  often  puncture  the  cappings  of  in- 
jected cells  and  may  remove  them  entirely.  Since  there  are  also  holes 


133 


Diseases,  Pests,  and  Pesticides  Affecting  Honey  Bees 


A  dead  larva  im 
fected  with  Amer- 
ican foulbrooc 
shown  head  on.  H 
shows  the  typical 
melted  appearance 
even  color,  and 
straight  position  iri 
the  cell.  The  celt 
walls  and  cappings 
were  broken  to  ex- 
pose the  larva. 

(Fig.  70) 


in  cells  containing  healthy  larvae  being  capped,  you  must  learn  to  dis- 
tinguish them  from  abnormal  ones.  Worker,  drone,  and  queen  larvae 
and  pupae  are  all  susceptible  to  American  foulbrood. 

The  larva  or  pupa  that  dies  of  AFB  always  lies  perfectly  straight  on 
the  lower  side  of  the  cell  (Fig.  70).  It  loses  its  pearly  white  color  and 
rapidly  turns  light  brown  similar  to  the  color  of  coffee  with  cream. 
As  it  continues  to  decay  and  become  dried,  it  turns  dark  brown  and, 
finally,  it  turns  into  a  black  dried  scale  on  the  lower  side  of  the  cell. 
Other  characteristic  symptoms  of  American  foulbrood  are  the  some- 
what glossy,  uniform  color  of  the  dead  larva  or  pupa,  and  the  melted 
look  as  the  body  and  the  body  wall  rot.  Sometimes  the  bacteria  make 
the  pupal  tongue  stick  to  the  top  of  the  cell.  When  this  happens,  the 
tongue  looks  like  a  smooth,  fine  thread  extending  vertically  across  the 
cell.  However,  many  advanced  cases  of  American  foulbrood  do  not 
show  this  symptom. 

The  bacteria  rot  the  skin  of  the  developing  bee  and  turn  the  body 
into  a  slimy  mass  that  becomes  stickier  as  it  dries.  This  condition  is 
the  basis  for  the  "ropiness"  test  that  can  be  used  to  aid  in  diagnosing  the 
disease.  When  making  a  diagnosis,  you  should  carefully  remove  the 
capping  from  a  cell  that  appears  abnormal,  but  do  not  touch  its  con- 
tents until  you  have  closely  examined  their  color,  position,  and  other 
features.  Only  then  should  you  touch  the  dead  remains  with  a  straw, 
toothpick,  or  match  stick.  Do  not  use  a  hive  tool  for  this  purpose.  Watch 


134 


to  see  what  happens  when  you  poke  the  remains.  The  larva  or  pupa  with 
AFB  will  often  collapse  into  a  rubbery  mass.  Stir  it  with  the  stick  and 
withdraw  it  slowly.  If  it  strings  or  "ropes"  out,  see  how  far  it  will  pull 
out.  More  important  however,  is  what  happens  when  the  string  breaks. 
If  the  cell  is  infected  with  American  foulbrood,  the  mass  on  the  stick 
should  look  like  a  drop  with  no  sign  of  the  drawn-out  string.  The  re- 
mains left  in  the  cell  should  be  smooth  with  no  sign  of  the  drawn-out 
piece.  In  contrast,  a  cell  infected  with  European  foulbrood  usually 
strings  out  and  breaks  off  like  a  piece  of  dough  or  taffy. 

The  odor  of  American  foulbrood  is  distinctive  but  is  not  a  reliable 
indicator  because  people's  sensitivities  to  odors  vary  so  widely,  and 
the  odor  may  be  strong  or  weak.  The  odor  is  similar  to  that  of  old- 
fashioned  animal  glues  that  are  now  rarely  used.  However,  it  is  better 
jto  rely  on  your  eyes  to  diagnose  the  disease. 

The  black  scales  resulting  from  infection  with  American  foulbrood 
blend  with  the  color  of  dark  combs  and  are  difficult  to  recognize.  To  see 
them,  hold  the  comb  so  that  sunlight  strikes  the  lower  side  of  the  cells. 
The  faint  outline  of  the  scale  and  the  slightly  raised  head  portion  of  it 
will  then  be  evident.  When  examining  combs  of  dead  colonies,  look  for 
any  sign  of  scales.  They  may  be  the  only  disease  symptom  present  in 
ithe  hive. 

American  foulbrood  is  spread  by  the  exchange  of  infected  honey 
and  combs  between  colonies,  either  by  the  beekeeper  or  by  robber  bees. 
Infected  colonies  rarely  recover  and  as  they  become  weakened  and  die, 
they  are  often  robbed  by  bees  from  nearby  colonies.  Reduce  the  size  of 
the  entrance  of  any  weak  colony,  and  close  any  dead  colony  and  remove 
it  from  the  apiary.  You  must  be  certain  that  weak  or  dead  colonies  do 
not  have  AFB  before  you  exchange  any  combs  or  honey  from  them  or 
anite  them  with  other  colonies. 

If  you  need  help  in  inspecting  your  colonies  or  diagnosing  disease,  it 
s  available  in  most  states  on  request  from  the  Department  of  Agricul- 
ture. The  best  time  for  inspection  is  the  period  from  mid-March  to 
ibout  June  1st,  before  the  nectar  flow  begins.  Samples  of  diseased  comb 
for  laboratory  examination  can  be  sent  to  the  Bee  Pathology  Laboratory, 
Entomology  Building  A,  Agricultural  Research  Center,  U.S.  Depart- 
nent  of  Agriculture,  Beltsville,  Maryland  20705.  Select  a  sample  of 
brood  comb  about  5  inches  square  that  contains  large  numbers  of 
iffected  cells.  Mail  it  in  a  strong  cardboard  or  wooden  box  without  an 
lirtight  wrapping.  Samples  that  are  crushed  or  moldy  because  of  im- 
>roper  packing  make  diagnosis  impossible. 

Disease  control  is  primarily  the  responsibility  of  each  beekeeper, 
vho  must  learn  the  symptoms  of  the  diseases  and  inspect  the  colonies 

135 


Diseases,  Pests,  and  Pesticides  Affecting  Honey  Bees 

carefully  for  the  presence  of  American  foulbrood.  At  the  minimum 
inspect  your  bees  in  the  spring  and  the  fall.  It  may  also  pay  you  t 
inspect  colonies  before  putting  on  the  honey  supers  and  when  you  r« 
move  honey.  At  least  one  of  the  latter  two  inspections  is  essential  if  yo 
have  previously  lost  any  colonies  to  American  foulbrood.  Bee  disease 
are  spread  more  often  within  beekeeping  operations  than  between  then 
and  lack  of  inspection  is  a  major  cause  of  such  spread. 

Most  state  laws  require  the  burning  of  colonies  of  bees  infecte< 
with  American  foulbrood.  The  colony  must  be  killed  and  all  the  con 
tents  of  the  hive  burned,  including  bees,  combs,  frames,  and  hone) 
(See  page  122  for  directions  for  killing  bees.)  The  fire  should  be  buil 
in  a  pit  and  the  ashes  covered  afterwards.  The  cover,  bottom  boarc 
and  hive  bodies  should  be  scraped  and  then  scorched.  A  blowtorch  o 
weed  burner  is  suitable  for  scorching  small  quantities  of  equipmenl 
For  large  quantities,  brush  the  inside  surfaces  with  a  mixture  of  one 
half  gasoline  and  one-half  motor  oil  and  stack  the  hive  bodies  four  o 
five  high.  Light  the  stacks  and  allow  them  to  burn  long  enough  to  lightl; 
char  the  wood.  Place  a  cover  over  the  stack  to  put  out  the  fire.  After 
ward,  separate  the  hive  bodies  and  be  sure  that  all  the  fire  is  out  or  i 
may  later  burn  up  the  equipment. 

Many  methods  of  saving  and  treating  diseased  colonies  have  beej 
tried  and  found  to  be  ineffective.  These  methods  sometimes  requir 
more  expense  and  labor  than  the  value  of  the  diseased  colonies.  Whei 
not  done  properly,  the  treatments  often  spread  disease.  Inspection  an( 
prevention  are  the  best  methods  of  control.  The  two  medicinal  agent; 
that  are  valuable  for  preventive  feeding  for  American  foulbrood  an 
sodium  sulfathiazole  and  oxytetracycline  HC1  (Terramycin).  Neithe: 
material  kills  the  disease  organism  but  they  prevent  its  growth  whet 
present  in  low  concentrations  in  the  food  fed  to  larvae. 

Sulfathiazole  is  a  stable  material  suitable  for  use  in  sugar  syrup  o) 
honey.  Use  14  teaspoon  per  gallon  of  feed.  Higher  dosages  may  be  toxu 
to  the  bees  and  are  no  more  effective  in  controlling  the  disease.  Sulfa 
thiazole  powder  mixed  with  an  equal  volume  of  powdered  sugar  can  b( 
used  at  the  rate  of  1/2  teaspoon  per  colony  and  placed  on  one  or  two  to{ 
bars  in  the  brood  nest. 

Terramycin  is  relatively  unstable  in  honey  or  syrup  solutions  and  i; 
best  used  as  a  dust  in  mixture  with  powdered  sugar.  It  is  available  I 
at  least  two  forms  and  in  three  concentrations  of  the  active  ingredient 
Terramycin  TM-50D  contains  50  grams  active  material  per  pound 
Terramycin  Animal  Formula  Soluble  Powder  (TAFSP),  usuall) 
called  TM-25,  contains  25  grams  active  material  per  pound,  and  Terra- 
mycin Feed  Premix   (TM-10)   contains  10  grams  active  material  pel 

136 


Ml 


pound.  All  of  these  compounds  must  be  diluted  with  powdered  sugar 
for  application  to  colonies  of  bees.  A  ready-to-feed  mixture  is  also 
available.  The  desired  dosage  of  200  milligrams  per  ounce  feeding  can 
be  achieved  as  follows: 

Product  Amount  Amount 

formulation  of  drug  of  sugar 

10  g/lb.  2i/4  tsp.  ( i/3  oz. )  3  tbsp.  ( 1  oz. ) 

25g/lb.  1      tsp.  0/6  oz.)  3  tbsp.  (loz.) 

50  g/lb.  y2  tsp.  (Via  oz. )  3  tbsp.  ( 1  oz. ) 

For  larger  quantities,  increase  the  amounts  according  to  the  number  of 
colonies  to  be  fed,  or  follow  directions  supplied  by  the  manufacturer. 

Place  3  level  tablespoon fuls  of  the  drug-sugar  mixture  over  the  top 
of  the  frames  at  the  outer  edge  of  the  brood  nest.  The  drug  in  this  con- 
centration is  toxic  to  larvae  and  should  be  kept  from  contact  with  brood. 
Do  not  increase  the  dosage  for  any  reason,  but  decrease  the  amount  of 
the  drug  mixture  given  to  weak  colonies. 

Any  medicinal  agents  or  mixtures  should  be  applied  only  after 
inspection  in  the  spring  at  least  2  months  before  the  main  nectar  flow. 
They  may  be  used  again  after  the  honey  is  removed  in  late  summer 
or  during  the  fall.  Use  them  with  care  at  the  proper  dosages,  and  follow 
the  directions  and  precautions  on  the  labels.  The  products  are  available 
at  beekeeping  supply  companies,  livestock  supply  stores,  and  feed  stores. 

European  foulbrood.  This  brood  disease,  usually  called  EFB,  ap- 
pears to  be  much  less  common  than  American  foulbrood  in  the  Midwest. 
It  is  caused  by  a  bacterium,  Streptococcus  pluton,  that  does  not  always 
kill  the  infected  larva  but  sometimes  may  kill  large  numbers  of  larvae 
very  rapidly.  The  disease  and  its  symptoms  are  highly  variable,  prob- 
ably because  of  the  presence  of  several  other  organisms  in  the  dead 
and  dying  larvae.  EFB  does  not  usually  kill  the  colony,  but  a  heavy 
infection  will  seriously  reduce  honey  production.  It  is  not  necessary 
for  beekeepers  to  kill  colonies  infected  with  EFB,  but  it  is  essential  to 
be  able  to  distinguish  European  from  American  foulbrood  disease. 

Larvae  infected  with  EFB  usually  die  while  still  coiled  in  the  bottom 
of  the  unsealed  cell.  This  is  distinctly  different  from  what  occurs  with 
AFB.  In  some  instances  the  disease  may  also  affect  sealed  larvae  and, 
rarely,  pupae.  When  this  happens,  the  larva  usually  dies  in  a  partially 
curled  or  distorted  position,  only  rarely  lying  straight  on  the  lower  side 
of  the  cell  as  it  does  when  infected  with  American  foulbrood.  Affected 
larvae  are  not  always  the  same  color,  as  with  AFB,  but  may  be  yellow, 
gray,  or  brown,  or  a  mixture  of  these  colors.  The  air  tubes,  or  tracheae, 

137 


Diseases,  Pests,  and  Pesticides  Affecting  Honey  Bees 

often  remain  visible  in  the  larva  infected  with  EFB.  Their  presence 
helps  to  distinguish  the  disease  from  AFB,  in  which  no  tracheae  can  be 
seen  in  the  decaying  brood.  The  odor  of  European  foulbrood  may  be 
described  as  being  sour  or  similar  to  the  odor  of  rotting  fish.  As  with  I 
AFB,  it  is  best  not  to  use  odor  for  diagnosis  because  of  its  variability! 
and  the  differences  in  the  ability  of  people  to  distinguish  odors. 

The  typical  consistency  of  EFB-infected  larvae  is  doughlike.  The 
remains  may  be  somewhat  ropy  but  less  slimy  and  elastic  than  those  of 
AFB-infected  bees.  When  pulled  out  of  the  cell,  the  material  reacts  like 
dough  or  taffy  when  the  pieces  separate.  Dried  scales  in  comb  mayj 
appear  similar  to  those  of  American  foulbrood  if  lying  straight  in  the  | 
cells.  However,  most  of  them  are  turned  or  twisted  in  the  cell  and  can 
be  easily  removed,  whereas  the  scales  of  AFB  are  difficult  to  remove. 
Worker,  drone,  and  queen  larvae  are  all  susceptible  to  EFB. 

European  foulbrood  may  be  controlled  by  use  of  Terramycin  in  the 
same  way  as  American  foulbrood.  This  dual  control  exerted  by  the 
antibiotic  makes  it  a  good  choice  for  preventive  feeding  where  both 
diseases  are  a  threat.  Honey  bee  strains  vary  in  their  resistance  to 
European  foulbrood.  When  only  one  or  a  few  colonies  are  affected, 
they  should  be  requeened  with  a  different  strain  of  bees.  The  organisms 
associated  with  European  foulbrood  are  usually  present  even  in  hives 
that  do  not  show  symptoms  of  disease.  The  susceptibility  of  the  particu- 
lar strain  of  bees  and,  perhaps,  nutritional  factors  bring  about  the  ap- 
pearance of  the  disease  at  damaging  levels. 

Sacbrood.  Sacbrood  disease  is  caused  by  a  virus  and  is  common 
but  rarely  serious  in  the  Midwest.  Like  European  foulbrood,  it  must  be 
distinguished  from  American  foulbrood. 

The  presence  of  sacbrood-infected  larvae  produces  a  spotted  ap-' 
pearance  of  the  brood  combs,  a  condition  shared  with  all  other  brood' 
diseases.  The  larvae  die  extended  on  the  lower  side  of  the  sealed  cells, 
and  after  they  die  part  or  all  of  the  cappings  may  be  removed  by  the 
adult  bees.  The  skin  of  the  dead  larva  does  not  rot  as  it  does  if  the 
larva  has  died  of  foulbrood.  Instead,  it  remains  tough  and  encloses 
the  watery  contents  like  a  sack,  giving  the  disease  its  name.  The  head  of 
the  dead  larva  darkens  more  rapidly  than  the  rest  of  the  body  and 
stays  upright  in  the  cell.  It  has  been  compared  with  the  tip  of  a  wooden 
Dutch  shoe  (Fig.  71).  The  elevated  head  of  the  completely  dried  larva 
remains  readily  visible  in  the  cell.  Such  a  scale  is  easily  removed  fror 
the  cell. 

Sacbrood  is  most  common  in  the  spring,  usually  affecting  only  a  few 
cells  in  a  comb.  Occasionally  a  very  susceptible  queen  may  have  large 


138 


Two  larvae,  in  un- 
capped cells,  infec- 
ted with  sacbrood 
disease.      (Fig.  71) 


•  numbers  of  affected  larvae.  The  disease  usually  requires  no  treatment. 
In  severe  cases,  the  colony  should  be  requeened  with  a  young  queen 
from  a  different  strain  of  bees. 

Other  brood  diseases.  Another  brood  disease  has  become  estab- 
lished in  many  areas  of  the  Midwest.  It  is  called  chalkbrood  and  is 
caused  by  a  fungus  organism  called  Ascosphaera  apis.  The  fungus  kills 
the  larva  after  it  is  stretched  out  in  the  cell,  turning  it  into  a  hard,  white 
mummy.   It  may  be  covered  with  small  black  spots,  which  are  the 

,  reproductive  bodies  of  the  fungus.  Such  mummies  can  be  seen  in  the 
combs  of  infected  colonies  and  on  the  landing  boards  of  the  hives  where 
they  are  often  dropped  by  house-cleaning  bees.  The  disease  may  become 
severe  in  some  colonies  but  is  not  expected  to  be  a  serious  problem  for 
beekeepers.  There  are  probably  differences  in  resistance  among  strains 
of  bees,  and  requeening  with  a  different  strain  may  be  of  value  in  some 

,  cases.   No  control  measures  using  drugs  or  chemicals  are  approved 

;  as  yet. 

Diseases  too  rare  to  discuss  are  parafoulbrood,  a  bacterial  disease 

j  similar  to  European  foulbrood,  and  stonebrood,  caused  by  a  fungus. 
Plant  poisoning  of  brood  is  also  rare  in  the  Midwest. 

Chilled  or  starved  brood  may  sometimes  be  confused  with  diseased 

i  brood.  Such  brood  is  usually  found  outside  the  cluster  area  of  small 
colonies  and  lacks  most  of  the  specific  symptoms  of  the  diseases  because 
all  brood  stages  may  be  affected.  When  the  weather  warms  or  the  colony 
receives  a  new  supply  of  food,  the  bees  will  quickly  clean  out  all  of  the 
dead  brood. 


139 


Diseases,  Pests,  and  Pesticides  Affecting  Honey  Bees 

Adult  Bee  Diseases 


Adult  bees  suffer  from  several  diseases  that  are  usually  found  i 
most  colonies  but  rarely  cause  serious  damage.  In  some  other  parts  c 
the  world,  a  mite,  Acarapis  woodi,  causes  acarine  disease  when  it  infesl 
the  tracheae,  or  breathing  tubes,  of  the  bee's  thorax.  This  mite  has  nc 
been  found  in  the  United  States  or  Canada,  and  both  countries  prohib 
the  importation  of  adult  bees  to  prevent  the  introduction  of  acarin 
disease.  Several  other  species  of  mites  infest  honey  bees  in  the  Unite 
States  and  elsewhere.  Mites  already  present  in  the  United  States  causi 
damage  to  the  bees,  but  the  extent  of  such  damage  has  not  been  mea 
sured.  Some  mites  found  in  honey  bee  colonies  in  other  countries,  par 
ticularly  in  the  tropics,  cause  serious  injury  to  developing  brood.  Fo 
this  reason,  importation  of  immature  stages  is  no  longer  permitted  i 
order  to  prevent  the  accidental  introduction  of  additional  pests  into  thi 
country. 

Nosema  disease.  Nosema  disease  is  an  infection  of  the  digestiv 
organs  of  the  adult  bee  by  a  single-celled  organism,  a  protozoan  calld 
Nosema  apis.  Small  numbers  of  infected  bees  may  be  found  at  almos 
any  time  of  year  in  apiaries  throughout  the  United  States.  The  natura 
defenses  of  the  individual  and  the  colony  against  disease  tend  to  keq 
it  under  control.  However,  when  the  bees  are  confined  to  the  hives  b;l 
poor  spring  weather,  or  subjected  to  stress  from  moving  or  special  ma 
nipulations,  such  as  those  for  queen  rearing  and  for  shaking  packag 
bees,  the  disease  may  reach  damaging  levels.  The  lives  of  infected  bee 
are  shortened,  and  affected  colonies  are  weakened  but  rarely  killed. 

Nosema-infected  colonies  do  not  show  any  symptoms  that  are  typi 
cal  of  the  disease.  For  this  reason,  positive  diagnosis  can  be  made  onh 
by  examination  of  bees  for  the  presence  of  spores  of  Nosema  apis.  Td 
do  this,  ground-up  abdomens  or  alimentary  tracts  must  be  examinee 
under  a  microscope  at  400  X  magnification  to  detect  the  organism. 

The  disease  is  cyclical  in  its  severity  in  the  colony,  with  the  greates 
infection  in  late  spring  and  the  least  in  late  summer  or  fall.  It  can  b<i 
controlled,  at  least  in  part,  by  feeding  the  antibiotic  fumagillin  (Fumidi 
B).  Complete  control  is  difficult  because  of  the  chronic  nature  of  thi; 
infection  in  the  bee's  alimentary  canal.  The  antibiotic  must  be  available 
to  the  bees  for  a  considerable  time  to  rid  them  of  the  organism.  Th( 
spores  of  the  nosema  organism  are  spread  within  and  outside  the  colon) 
with  food  and  water.  Infected  bees  soil  the  combs  and  spread  infectior 
within  the  colony.  However,  nosema  infection  does  not  cause  dysentery 
but  bees  suffering  from  dysentery  may  or  may  not  have  nosema  disease. 
Empty   combs   contaminated   with   spores   may   be   heated   to    120°F 


140 


(49°C.)  for  24  hours  to  kill  the  spores.  Treatment  is  not  necessary 
except  where  a  serious  problem  exists.  Control  with  fumagillin  is  most 
effective  in  the  fall  when  the  normal  level  of  the  disease  is  lowest.  Treat- 
ment in  the  spring  is  less  effective,  and  colonies  generally  overcome  the 
disease  without  help.  Affected  colonies  may  recover  more  quickly  if  given 
frames  of  brood  and  bees  from  other  colonies. 


pans 


eli 


nttta 


Dysentery.  Although  it  is  not  a  disease,  dysentery  is  considered 
here  because  so  many  beekeepers  think  of  it  as  a  disease  symptom, 
especially  of  nosema  disease.  Bees  with  dysentery  are  unable  to  hold 
their  waste  products  in  their  bodies  and  they  release  them  in  the  hive  or 
close  to  it.  The  condition  is  recognized  by  the  dark  spots  and  streaks  on 
combs,  on  the  exterior  of  the  hive,  and  on  the  snow  near  the  hive  in  late 
winter  (Fig.  72).  Dysentery  is  caused  by  an  excessive  amount  of  water 
n  a  bee's  body.  The  consumption  during  the  winter  of  coarsely  granu- 
ated  honey  or  honey  with  a  high  water  content  is  one  cause  of  the 
disease.  Damp  hive  conditions  may  also  contribute  to  the  problem. 
Good  food  and  proper  wintering  conditions  are  important  to  prevent 
he  problem  but  there  is  no  specific  control  for  it  once  the  bees  are 
ffected.  The  colony's  recovery  may  be  helped  if  it  is  given  combs  of 
ow-moisture  honey  or  fed  heavy  sugar  syrup.  Combs  from  colonies 
with  dysentery  can  be  used  safely  in  other  colonies. 


Dysentery  of  bees  is  indicated  by  the  spotting  of  the  hive  and  the  snow 
around  it  in  late  winter.  (Fig.  72) 


141 


Diseases,  Pests,  and  Pesticides  Affecting  Honey  Bees 


Paralysis.  Paralysis  is  the  name  given  to  several  similar  ailments  o: 
bees  caused  by  viruses.  Affected  bees  often  shake  and  twitch  and  ar< 
unable  to  fly.  In  some  cases  the  infected  bees  die  within  a  day  or  two 
in  others,  the  life  of  the  bee  may  only  be  shortened  to  about  two-third: 
its  usual  length.  Normal  bees  may  pull  and  bite  the  infected  bees,  caus 
ing  their  bodies  to  be  partially  hairless  and  shiny.  The  abdomens  o 
such  bees  may  also  be  enlarged.  At  present  there  are  no  special  control* 
except  to  requeen  the  colony  with  a  queen  from  a  totally  unrelatec 
strain  of  bees.  There  appear  to  be  distinct  differences  in  susceptibility 
of  different  lines,  races,  and  strains  of  honey  bees  to  the  viruses. 

Other  diseases  of  adult  bees.  Adult  bees  also  suffer  from  othei 
diseases  such  as  septicemia  and  amoeba  disease.  Both  are  extremely  rar< 
and  of  little  importance  in  the  United  States. 

Pests  of  Honey  Bees 

Wax  moths.  The  greater  wax  moth,  Galleria  mellonella,  is  a  seri 
ous  pest  of  honey  comb  in  most  areas  of  the  United  States.  The  adul 
moths  are  gray-brown  and  about  ^4  incri  long.  In  the  daytime  they  arc 
usually  seen  resting  with  their  wings  folded  like  a  tent  over  their  bodiei 
(Fig.  73).  When  disturbed,  the  moths  usually  run  rapidly  before  taking 
flight.  They  lay  their  eggs  on  unprotected  honey  combs  and  in  the  cracks 
between  hive  bodies  of  colonies  of  bees.  The  grayish-white  larvae  (Fig 
74)  are  kept  under  control  by  the  bees  in  normal  colonies  and  do  nc 
harm.  They  may  completely  ruin  the  combs  in  weak  or  dead  colonie; 
and  in  stored  equipment.  Unless  they  are  controlled,  they  feed  on  th( 


Adult  greater  wa> 
moths  in  a  typica 
resting  position  or 
comb  foundation. 
(Fig.  73! 


142 


cocoons,  cast  skins,  and  pollen  in  the  combs,  and  reduce  them  to  a  mass 
of  webs  and  waste  products  (Fig.  75).  Keeping  strong  colonies  and 
fumigating  stored  equipment  (see  page  108)  are  the  best  ways  to  avoid 
damage  from  wax  moth. 

Several  other  less  common  moth  larvae  are  sometimes  found  in 
combs.  They  usually  feed  only  on  the  pollen  in  individual  cells  and  are 
rarely  pests.  Fumigation  for  greater  wax  moth  controls  all  such  moths. 


Larvae     of     the 

greater  wax  moth, 

nearly   full   grown. 

(Fig.  74) 


A  stored  comb  ruined  by  feeding  of  wax  moth  larvae.    Cocoons  are  visible 
among  the  webbing  and  on  the  frame  top  at  the  bottom  of  the  illustration. 

(Fig.  75) 


143 


Diseases,  Pests,  and  Pesticides  Affecting  Honey  Bees 

Mice.  Mice  are  a  pest  of  stored  combs  and  unoccupied  combs  in 
bee  hives,  usually  in  the  fall  and  winter.  They  chew  the  combs,  eat 
pollen,  and  build  nests  among  the  combs.  In  the  late  fall,  hive  entrances 
should  be  reduced  to  y%  inch  in  depth  either  by  entrance  cleats  or  by 
reversing  the  bottom  board  to  the  shallow  side.  Excluders  or  tight  covers 
on  stacks  of  stored  combs  will  help  to  keep  them  mouse-free.  Since 
mice  may  chew  into  the  supers,  storage  areas  should  be  protected  with 
bait  boxes  containing  an  effective  mouse  poison.  In  apiaries  where  mice 
are  a  serious  problem,  poison  bait  may  be  placed  beneath  the  hives  or  in 
bait  boxes  within  an  empty  hive.  Use  all  poisons  with  care,  keep  them 
out  of  reach  of  children,  and  follow  the  directions  on  the  labels. 

Skunks.  Skunks  feed  on  bees  at  night  by  scratching  at  the  front 
of  the  hive  and  eating  the  bees  as  they  come  out  to  investigate  the 
disturbance.  People  rarely  trap  skunks  for  their  pelts,  and  the  animals 
are  increasing  in  numbers  in  many  areas.  It  is  not  unusual  to  find  sev- 
eral in  one  apiary.  The  skunks  weaken  the  colonies  by  eating  large 
numbers  of  bees  and  are  most  damaging  in  the  fall  and  winter  after 
brood  rearing  has  ceased.  They  also  make  the  colonies  mean  and  diffi- 
cult to  handle.  If  a  colony  suddenly  stings  more  often  and  more  bees 
fly  around  your  veil,  look  for  scratching  in  the  soil  at  the  front  corners 
of  the  hives.  Where  skunks  are  numerous,  they  may  dig  enough  to  leave  i 
a  trench  in  front  of  the  hive.  Their  presence  can  also  be  detected  by 
fecal  pellets  that  are  composed  largely  of  honey  bee  remains.  Control 
skunks  by  trapping  or  poisoning  them  according  to  recommendations 
of  your  county  agent  or  extension  adviser. 

Other  pests  of  bees.  Ants,  toads,  bears,  birds,  dragonflies,  and  other 
animals  prey  on  bees.  Ants  can  be  controlled  by  treating  their  nests 
with  an  approved  insecticide.  Such  materials  are  generally  highly  toxic  < 
to  bees  and  should  not  be  used  close  to  the  hives.  Single  colonies  can 
be  placed  on  stands  or  benches  protected  by  oil  or  sticky  barriers.  The 
other  pests  are  generally  not  a  problem  in  the  Midwest.  However, 
purple  martins  eat  bees  as  well  as  other  insects  and  may  weaken  colonies 
in  areas  where  there  are  large  numbers  of  nesting  sites.  Woodpeckers 
and  flickers  sometimes  make  holes  in  hives. 

Human  beings  are  often  a  serious  pest  of  bees  kept  in  outapiaries. 
They  may  tip  the  hives  over  with  their  cars  or  by  hand,  shoot  holes  in 
them,  or  steal  honey  and  leave  the  hive  covers  off.  Apiaries  should  be 
visited  regularly  to  watch  for  such  damage.  The  problem  may  be 
lessened  by  posting  your  name  and  address  in  the  apiary  in  a  conspic- 
uous place. 


I 


m. 


144 


Pesticides  and  Honey  Bees 

Toxicity  of  pesticides.  Many  materials  that  are  used  to  control 
insects,  weeds,  and  plant  diseases  are  toxic  to  honey  bees.  These  pesti- 
cides are  placed  in  three  groups  in  relation  to  their  effects  on  bees. 
Highly  toxic  materials  are  those  that  kill  bees  on  contact  during  ap- 
plication and  for  one  or  more  days  after  treatment.  Bees  should  be 
moved  from  the  area  if  highly  toxic  materials  are  used  on  plants  the 
bees  are  visiting.  Among  the  materials  in  this  group  are  the  following: 


aldicarb  (Temik) 

arsenicals 

azinphosethyl  (Ethyl  Guthion) 

azinphosmethyl   (Guthion) 

Azodrin 

BHC 

Bidrin 
;  Bomyl 

carbaryl   (Sevin) 

carbofuran   (Furadan) 

chlorpyrifos  (Dursban,  Lorsban) 

diazinon 

dichlorvos  (DDVP,  Vapona) 

dimethoate  (Cygon,  De-Fend) 
[EPN 

famphur   (Famophos) 

fensulfothion  (Dasanit) 

fenthion   (Baytex) 

Gardona 

heptachlor 


Imidan,  Prolate 

lindane 

malathion,  dilutea 

malathion,  low  volume 

Matacil 

Mesurol 

Metacide 

methomide   (Monitor) 

methomyl  (Lannate,  Nudrin) 

methyl  parathion 

Methyl  Trithion 

mevinphos   ( Phosdrin ) b 

Mobam 

naled  (Dibrom)b 

parathion 

phosphamidon   (Dimecron) 

propoxur  (Baygon) 

Zectran 

Zinophos 


a  Kills  bee  primarily  on  contact. 

b  Short  residual  activity.  Can  usually  be  applied  safely  when  bees  are  not  in 
flight.  Do  not  apply  over  hives. 

Moderately  toxic  materials  can  be  used  with  limited  damage  to  bees 
if  they  are  not  applied  over  bees  in  the  field  or  at  the  hives.  Correct 
dosage,  timing,  and  method  of  application  are  essential.  This  group 
includes  the  following: 


i  Abate 

Banol 

carbophenothion   (Trithion) 

chlordane 
■  Ciodrin 
|  DDT 

demeton   (Systox) 

disulfoton  (Di-Syston) 

endosulfan  (Thiodan) 

endothion 

endrin 


formetanate   (Carzol) 

methyl  demeton  (Meta  Systox) 

mirex 

oxydemetonmethyl  (Meta  Systox 

R) 

Perthane 

phorate  (Thimet) 
phosalone  (Zolone) 
Pyramat 
ronnel  (Korlan) 
tartar  emetic 


145 


331 


Diseases,  Pests,  and  Pesticides  Affecting  Honey  Bees 

The  greatest  number  of  materials  are  included  in  the  relatively 
nontoxic  group.  These  pesticides  can  be  used  around  bees  with  few 
precautions  and  a  minimum  of  injury  to  bees.  The  following  list  in- 
cludes some  of  the  materials  in  this  group: 

allethrin  ferbam  (Fermate) 

Aramite  folpet  (Phaltan) 

Bacillus  thuringicnsis  Galecron,  Fundal 

binapacryl  (Morocide)  glyodin 

Bordeaux  mixture  maneb 

captan  methoxychlor 

chlorbenside  Morestan 

chlorobenzilate  nabam 

chloropropylate  nicotine 

copper  compounds  Omite 

cryolite  ovex 

Dessin  Plictran 

dicofol   (Kelthane)  Polyram 

Dilan  pyrethrum 

Dimite   (DMC)  rotenone 

dinitrocyclohexylphenol  sabadillaa 

(DNOCHP)  Strobane 

dinocap  (Karathane)  sulfur 

dinoseb  (Premerge)  Sulphenone 

dioxathion   (Delnav)  tetradifon  (Tedion) 

dodine   (Cyprex)  toxaphene 

Dyrene  trichlorfon  (Dylox,  Proxol) 

ethion  zineb 

fenson  ziram 


°  Twenty-percent  dust  may  cause  bee  losses. 

Pesticides  damage  colonies  in  several  ways.  Most  often  they  kill  the 
field  bees  without  other  effects  on  the  colony.  In  some  instances  the 
bees  die  in  large  numbers  after  returning  to  the  hive.  Many  bees  are 
also  lost  in  the  field  and  the  colony  is  weakened  but  not  usually  killed. 
Sometimes  materials  are  carried  by  the  bees  to  the  hive  where  they  kill 
brood  and  young  bees  in  the  colony.  The  entire  colony  may  die  when 
this  happens. 

Methods  of  application.  Losses  from  pesticides  can  be  minimized 
by  cooperation  among  beekeepers,  farmers,  and  spray  operators.  Several 
basic  principles  should  be  followed  to  prevent  losses  of  bees  and  to 
avoid  injury  to  people  and  farm  animals.  The  first  of  these  is  to  apply 
the  proper  dosages  and  follow  the  recommendations  on  the  label.  The 
method  of  application  is  also  a  factor  to  consider.  Ground  application 
is  generally  safer  than  air  application.  The  material  and  its  formulation 
play  important  roles  in  its  toxicity  to  bees.  In  general,  sprays  are  safer 


146 


than  dusts,  and  emulsifiable  concentrates  are  less  toxic  than  wettable 
powders.  Materials  applied  as  granules  are  the  least  hazardous.  At 
present  there  are  no  safe,  effective  repellents  that  can  be  used  to  keep 
bees  away  from  treated  areas. 

Proper  timing  of  applications  of  pesticides  allows  the  use  of  mod- 
erately toxic  materials  on  crops  visited  by  bees.  Bees  visit  different 
crops  at  different  times  and  for  different  periods  during  the  day.  The 
timing  of  treatment  of  a  crop  should  relate  to  these  bee  visits.  Squashes, 
pumpkins,  and  melons  are  attractive  to  bees  early  in  the  day  but  close 
their  blossoms  in  the  afternoon.  Afternoon  and  evening  treatments, 
after  the  flowers  close,  are  safest  for  bees.  Sweet  corn  sheds  pollen 
early  and  is  visited  by  bees  most  heavily  in  the  morning.  Applications 
of  insecticides  to  sweet  corn  are  least  dangerous  when  made  as  late  as 
possible  in  the  day,  especially  if  the  insecticide  is  kept  off  the  tassels. 
For  most  crops,  pesticide  applications  are  safest  for  bees  if  they  are 
made  between  7  p.m.  and  7  a.m. 

The  beekeeper's  obligation.  Beekeepers  have  responsibilities  in 
preventing  losses  to  their  bees  and  in  learning  to  accept  some  damage, 
especially  in  providing  pollination  services.  In  some  areas,  honey  bee 
losses  must  be  anticipated  and  the  risk  weighed  against  the  possible 
returns  from  honey  or  pollination  fees.  Beekeepers  should  be  familiar 
with  commonly  used  pesticides  and  their  toxicity  to  bees.  They  should 
know  as  much  as  possible  about  the  relationships  between  their  bees 
and  the  nectar  and  pollen  plants  in  their  territory. 

It  is  essential  that  the  owners  of  bees  can  be  located  easily  when  a 
nearby  crop  or  the  surrounding  area  is  being  treated  with  toxic  mate- 
rials. Therefore,  a  beekeeper  should  provide  his  or  her  name,  address, 
and  telephone  number  to  owners  of  land  on  which  the  bees  are  located. 
This  information  should  also  be  posted  in  the  apiary  in  large,  readable 
letters.  Beekeepers'  organizations  should  compile  directories  of  apiary 
locations  and  their  owners  in  each  county,  and  make  them  available,  to- 
gether with  marked  maps,  at  the  office  of  the  county  extension  adviser 
or  county  agent. 

Beekeeper  indemnification  program.  The  United  States  Depart- 
ment of  Agriculture  operates  a  beekeeper  indemnity  payment  program 
for  losses  of  bees  by  pesticide  applications.  Beekeepers  are  reimbursed 
for  proven  losses  of  bees  from  pesticides  recommended  by  the  Depart- 
ment. To  be  eligible,  beekeepers  must  register  their  bees  before  July  15 
■  of  each  year  with  the  Agricultural  Stabilization  and  Conservation  Ser- 
vice (ASCS)  office  in  their  home  counties.  Such  registration  is  in  addi- 
tion to  any  other  required  by  the  state.  The  program  is  authorized  to 


147 


s 

SI! 
I 

vi 


9 


Diseases,  Pests,  and  Pesticides  Affecting  Honey  Bees 

continue  through  the  1977  fiscal  year  but  may  be  discontinued  after  that 
time.  For  up-to-date  information  and  registration  forms,  contact  your 
county  ASCS  office.  Losses  must  be  reported  immediately  so  that  an 
inspection  may  be  made  of  the  damaged  colonies. 


Kit 


i 


148 


:POLLI2KT.A.TIO:iSr 
BY  HOIMEY  BEES 

Pollination  is  the  transfer  of  pollen  grains,  the  male  sex  cells  of  a 
flower,  from  the  anther  where  they  are  produced  to  the  receptive  sur- 
face, or  stigma,  of  the  female  organ  of  a  flower.  Since  the  honey  bee 
is  the  most  important  insect  that  transfers  pollen  between  flowers  and 
between  plants,  the  word  "pollination"  is  often  used  to  describe  the 
service  of  providing  bees  to  pollinate  crop  plants.  This  service  is  now 
more  important  than  ever  in  the  Midwest  because  the  acreage  of  insect- 
pollinated  crops  is  large  as  compared  with  the  number  of  all  kinds  of 
bees  (honey  bees,  bumble  bees,  and  solitary  bees)  that  are  available  to 
provide  pollination.  In  many  states  the  estimated  number  of  colonies 
(hives)  of  bees  has  dropped  drastically  in  recent  years.  For  example, 
in  Illinois  the  estimated  number  of  hives  dropped  from  101,000  in  1964 
to  49,000  in  1974.  These  two  figures  are  probably  much  more  accurate 
than  some  of  the  older,  larger  estimates  that  may  have  reflected  state 
pride  more  than  reality.  Because  of  the  reduction  in  numbers  of  bees, 
growers  in  any  state  can  no  longer  assume  that  there  are  sufficient  num- 
bers of  bees  nearby  to  produce  the  best  possible  crop  from  insect- 
pollinated  plants. 

Honey  bees  are  good  pollinators  for  many  reasons.  Their  hairy- 
bodies  trap  pollen  and  carry  it  between  flowers.  The  bees  require  large 
quantities  of  nectar  and  pollen  to  rear  their  young,  and  they  visit 
flowers  regularly  in  large  numbers  to  obtain  these  foods.  In  doing  so, 
they  concentrate  on  one  species  of  plant  at  a  time  and  serve  as  good 
pollinators  for  this  reason.  Their  body  size  enables  them  to  pollinate 
flowers  of  many  different  shapes  and  sizes.  The  pollination  potential 
of  the  bees  is  increased  because  they  can  be  managed  to  develop  high 
populations.  The  number  of  colonies  can  also  be  increased  as  needed 
and  the  colonies  can  be  moved  to  the  most  desirable  location  for  polli- 
nation purposes. 

Honey  bees  are  most  active  at  temperatures  between  60°F.  (16°C.) 
and  105 °F.  (41  °C).  Winds  above  15  miles  per  hour  reduce  their  activ- 
ity and  stop  it  completely  at  about  25  miles  per  hour.  When  conditions 
for  flight  are  not  ideal,  honey  bees  work  close  to  their  colonies.  Although 


149 


Pollination  by  Honey  Bees 


they  may  fly  as  far  as  5  miles  in  search  of  food,  they  usually  go  no 
farther  than  1  to  li/2  miles  in  good  weather.  In  unfavorable  weather, 
bees  may  visit  only  those  plants  nearest  the  hive.  They  also  tend  to< 
work  closer  to  the  hive  in  areas  where  there  are  large  numbers  of  at- 
tractive plants  in  bloom. 

The  following  midwestern  crops  must  be  pollinated  by  bees  to  pro- 
duce fruit  or  seed: 


Alfalfa 

Apple 

Apricot 

Blackberry 

Blueberry 

Cherry 

Clovers 

Sweetclovers,  white   and  yellow 
True  clovers 

Alsike 

Ladino 

Red 

White  Dutch 
Cranberry 


Cucumber 

Muskmelon,  cantaloupe 

Nectarine 

Peach 

Pear 

Persimmon,  native 

Plum,  prune 

Pumpkin 

Raspberry 

Squash 

Sunflower 

Trefoil 

Watermelon 


The  following  crops  set  fruit  or  seed  without  insect  visits  but  yields 
and  quality  may  be  improved  by  honey  bees: 

Eggplant  Okra 

Grape  Pepper 

Lespedeza  Soybean 

Lima  bean  Strawberry 

Honey  bees  visit  several  important  crops  but  do  not  improve  their 
yields  of  fruit  or  seed.  These  include  the  following: 


Field  bean 
Pea 


String  or  snap  bean 
Sweet  corn 


The  provision  of  bees  for  pollination  of  crop  plants  is  a  specialized 
practice,  not  just  a  sideline  of  honey  production.  Beekeepers  who  sup- 
ply bees  for  pollination  must  learn  the  skills  of  management  that  are 
necessary  for  success  in  this  phase  of  beekeeping.  Such  skills  include 
the  development  and  selection  of  strong  colonies  that  are  able  to  pro- 
vide the  large  force  of  field  bees  needed  to  do  the  job  of  transferring 
pollen.  This  task  of  the  beekeeper  is  hardest  to  accomplish  for  fruit 
pollination  early  in  the  year.  Each  beekeeper  or  organization  of  bee- 
keepers should  set  minimum  standards  for  colony  strength  and  size  to 
use  as  a  basis  for  establishing  prices  and  for  providing  the  best  possible 
service.  The  number  of  bees,  and  not  the  number  of  hives,  is  the  true 


150 


unit  of  measure,  and  growers  need  to  be  told  and  shown  what  standards 
are  being  used  to  measure  the  honey  bee  colonies  for  pollination.  For 
example,  colonies  for  apple  pollination  should  be  housed  in  a  two-story 
hive  with  a  laying  queen.  There  should  be  four  or  more  frames  with 
brood  and  sufficient  bees  to  cover  them.  There  should  also  be  a  reserve 
food  supply  of  10  pounds  of  honey  or  more.  Colonies  rented  to  pollinate 
crops  that  bloom  later  in  the  year  should  be  proportionately  stronger, 
with  five  or  six  frames  with  brood,  approximately  600  to  800  square 
inches.  In  the  field,  the  colonies  must  be  supered  and  examined  at 
intervals  to  keep  them  in  suitable  condition  for  pollination. 

The  number  of  standard  colonies  that  are  needed  per  acre  of  crop 
plants  varies  in  relation  to  the  attractiveness  of  the  crop,  the  competi- 
tion from  surrounding  sources  of  nectar  and  pollen,  and  the  percentage 
of  flowers  that  must  produce  fruit  or  seed  to  provide  an  economic  re- 
turn. Most  crops  are  adequately  pollinated  by  one  strong  hive  of  bees 
per  acre.  However,  red  clover  grown  for  seed  should  have  two  or  more 
colonies  per  acre  moved  to  the  field  as  soon  as  it  begins  to  bloom  (Fig. 
76).  Alfalfa  requires  three  to  five  colonies  per  acre.  Hybrid  cumumbers 
grown  at  plant  populations  of  40,000  to  70,000  or  more  plants  per  acre 
for  machine  harvest  may  require  up  to  four  hives  per  acre.  The  higher 
number  of  hives  may  be  needed  where  other  cultivated  plants  or  weeds 
compete  strongly  for  the  attention  of  the  bees. 


Pollination  of  second-crop  red  clover  for  seed.  Honey  bees  are  effective  pol- 
linators of  red  clover  in  July  and  August  when  other  clovers  have  ceased  to 
bloom.  Illinois  produces  more  red  clover  seed  than  any  other  state,  about 
one-sixth  of  the  total  production.  (Fig.  76) 


151 


Pollination  by  Honey  Bees 


9    ">**,       ^.J;*^ 

£^N& 

ag&Si| 

w*  y^^-  ^^ 

5$| 

"'.""'iSr 

m**5^ 

n  * 

^mJL4 

3^9 

Honey  bee  hives  placed  in  groups  in  an  apple  orchard  in  southern  Illinois. 

(Fig.  77) 

Bees  for  pollination  should  be  placed  within  or  beside  the  crop  to  be 
pollinated.  For  apples,  place  groups  of  5  to  15  hives  at  intervals  of 
200  to  300  yards  (Fig.  77).  They  should  be  moved  into  the  orchard  at 
10  to  25  percent  bloom.  For  cucumbers  and  other  cucurbits,  bees  should 
be  moved  to  the  field  when  the  first  female  flowers  appear,  not  before. 
Place  the  bees  in  a  single  group  for  small  fields.  For  fields  larger  than 
30  acres,  place  the  bees  in  two  or  more  groups  at  the  edges  of  the  field 
but  leave  no  more  than  %o  mi'e  between  groups.  Bees  seem  to  work 
better  upwind  from  their  hives  than  downwind,  so  it  is  probably  worth- 
while to  locate  more  colonies  on  the  downwind  side  of  the  field  or 
orchard  than  on  the  side  from  which  the  wind  blows. 

Bees  need  a  nearby  source  of  water  such  as  a  farm  pond  or  a  stock 
tank  with  cork  floats  on  which  they  can  land.  Water  is  important  in 
the  early  spring  for  brood  rearing  and  later  for  cooling  the  hives.  In 
fruit  pollination  the  bees  benefit  from  full  sun  and  shelter  from  the 
wind.  Later  in  the  year,  some  afternoon  shade  is  helpful. 

Contracts  for  honey  bee  pollination  services  should  be  a  regular 
part  of  the  business  when  more  than  a  few  hives  are  involved.  Con- 
tracts prevent  problems  that  may  arise  from  misunderstanding,  and 
they  serve  to  emphasize  the  obligations  and  rights  of  both  grower  and 
beekeeper.  Contracts  should  include  provisions  relating  to  pesticide 
usage,  colony  standards  and  the  rights  of  the  grower  to  examine  the 
colonies,  rights  of  access  by  the  beekeeper,  pollination  fees  and  time  of 
payment,  and  a  statement  about  the  timing  of  movements  of  bees  to  and 
from  the  crop. 


152 


Colony  rental  fees  vary  in  relation  to  the  expenses  involved  and  the 
length  of  time  the  colonies  are  needed.  The  potential  or  actual  honey 
production  of  the  rented  colonies  is  also  a  factor  in  establishing  prices 
for  summer-blooming  crops,  with  higher  prices  for  less  productive 
plant  species.  Additional  moves  and  the  movement  of  colonies  by  grow- 
ers may  increase  or  lower  the  price.  The  Honey  Market  News  (see 
page  94)  publishes  typical  prices  being  charged  for  pollination  services. 


153 


SELECTED  SOURCES 
OF  IN"FOrtlvlA.TI03Sr 
OUST  BEEKEEPING 
J±2<IJD  EQUIPMENT 

Books,  Handbooks,  and  Manuals 

Bailey,  L.  1963.  Infectious  diseases  of  the  honey-bee.  Land  Books,  Ltd.,  London 

176  p.  Out  of  print. 
Butler,  C.  G.  1974.  The  world  of  the  honeybee.  3rd  ed.  Collins,  London.  226  p. 
Crane.  E.,  ed.  1975.  Honey :  a  comprehensive  survey.  Crane,  Russak  &  Co.,  New 

York.  608  p. 
Dadant  &  Sons,  ed.  1975.  The  hive  and  the  honey  bee.  4th  ed.  Dadant  &  Sons, 

Inc.,  Hamilton,  Illinois.  740  p. 
Dade,  H.  A.   1962.  Anatomy  and  dissection  of  the  honeybee.  Bee  Research  As- 
sociation, London.  158  p.  +  20  foldout  plates. 
Eckert,  J.  E,  and  F.  R.  Shaw.  1960.  Beekeeping.  The  Macmillan  Co.,  New  York.. 

536  p. 
Free,  J.  B.  1970.  Insect  pollination  of  crops.  Academic  Press,  New  York.  544  p. 
Frisch,  K.  von.  1967.  The  dance  language  and  orientation  of  bees.  Belknap  Press,  • 

Cambridge,  Massachusetts.  566  p. 
Frisch,  K.  von.  1971.  Bees.  Their  vision,  chemical  senses,  and  language.  2nd  ed. 

Cornell  University  Press,  Ithaca,  New  York.  157  p. 
Kelley,  W.  T.  1976.  How  to  keep  bees  and  sell  honey.  8th  ed.  Walter  T.  Kelley 

Co.,  Clarkson,  Kentucky.  144  p. 

Killion,  C.  E.  1951.  Honey  in  the  comb.  Killion  and  Sons,  Paris,  Illinois.  114  p.  > 
Out  of  print. 

Laidlaw,  H.  H.,  Jr.,  and  J.  E.  Eckert.  1962.  Queen  rearing.  University  of  Cali- 
fornia Press,  Berkeley.  165  p. 

Lindauer,  M.  1971.  Communication  among  social  bees.  3rd  printing  with  appen- 
dices. Harvard  University  Press,  Cambridge,  Massachusetts.  161  p. 

Lovell,  H.  B.  1966.  Honey  plants  manual.  A.  I.  Root  Company,  Medina,  Ohio. 
64  p. 

Lovell,  J.  H.  1926.  Honey  plants  of  North  America.  A.  I.  Root  Company,  Medina, 
Ohio.  408  p.  Out  of  print. 

McGregor,  S.  E.,  ed.  1971.  Beekeeping  in  the  United  States.  U.S.  Department 
of  Agriculture  Handbook  335.  U.S.  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington, 
D.C.  147  p. 

Morse,  R.  A.  1974.  The  complete  guide  to  beekeeping.  2nd  ed.  E.  P.  Dutton  & 
Co.,  New  York.  219  p. 

Pellett,  F.  C.  1938.  History  of  American  beekeeping.  Collegiate  Press,  Inc., 
Ames,  Iowa.  213  p.  Out  of  print. 

Pellett,  F.  C.  1976.  American  honey  plants.  Dadant  &  Sons,  Inc.,  Hamilton, 
Illinois.  467  p.  Reprint  of  1947  edition. 

154 


Root,  A.  I.,  E.  R.  Root,  H.  H.  Root,  and  J.  A.  Root.  1975.  The  ABC  and  XYZ 
of  bee  culture.  36th  ed.  A.  I.  Root  Company,  Medina,  Ohio.  726  p. 

Root,  H.  H.  1951.  Beeswax.  Chemical  Publishing  Company,  Inc.,  Brooklyn,  New 
York.  154  p.  Out  of  print. 

Snodgrass,  R.  E.  1956.  Anatomy  of  the  honey  bee.  Comstock  Publishing  Associ- 
ates, Ithaca,  New  York.  334  p. 

Wenner,  A.  M.  1971.  The  bee  language  controversy..  Educational  Programs  Im- 
provement Corporation,  Boulder,  Colorado.  109  p. 

White,  J.  W.,  Jr.,  M.  L.  Riethof,  M.  H.  Subers,  and  I.  Kushnir.  1962.  Composi- 
tion of  American  honeys.  U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture  Technical  Bulle- 
tin 1261.  U.S.  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington,  D.C.  124  p. 

Periodicals 

American  Bee  Journal.  Hamilton,  Illinois  62341.  Monthly. 

Bee  World.   Hill  House,  Chalfont  St.  Peter,  Gerrards  Cross,   Bucks.,  England 

SL9  ONR.  Quarterly. 
Gleanings  in  Bee  Culture.  Medina,  Ohio  44256.  Monthly. 
The  Speedy  Bee.  Route  1,  Box  G-27,  Jesup,  Georgia  31545.  Monthly  newspaper. 

Beekeeping  Organizations 

American  Beekeeping  Federation,  Inc.,  Route  1,  Box  68,  Cannon  Falls,  Minnesota 

55009. 
American  Honey  Producers  Association,  Inc.,  Box  368,  Minco,  Oklahoma  73059. 
Write  to  your  extension  beekeeping  specialist  or  state  apiary  inspector  for  current 

addresses   for  state  and  local  beekeeping  associations.   In  Illinois,  write  to 

Extension  Apiculturist,   107b  Horticulture   Field  Laboratory,   University  of 

Illinois,  Urbana,  Illinois  61801. 

Beekeeping  Supplies  and  Equipment 

Dadant  &  Sons,  Inc.  Hamilton,  Illinois  62341. 
Chr.  Graze  KG.  D-7057  Endersbach,  West  Germany. 
Hubbard  Apiaries.  Onsted,  Michigan  49265. 
Walter  T.  Kelley  Co.  Clarkson,  Kentucky  42726. 
Leahy  Manufacturing  Co.  Higginsville,  Missouri  64037. 
August  Lotz  Co.  Boyd,  Wisconsin  54726. 

A.  I.  Root  Co.  Medina,  Ohio  44256  and  Council  Bluffs,  Iowa  51501. 
For  sources  of  package  bees  and  queens  consult  current  issues  of  beekeeping 
magazines. 

Apiary  Inspection,  Registration,  and 
Beekeeping  Information 

In  most  states,  apiary  inspection  and  registration  are  carried  out  by  employees 
of  the  state  Department  of  Agriculture.  They  can  provide  information  about 
laws  relating  to  bee  diseases,  registration,  and  movement  of  colonies.  They 
may  also  be  able  to  provide  inspection  and  diagnosis  of  bee  disease  samples 
on  request.  For  such  services  in  Illinois,  write  the  Chief  Apiary  Inspector, 
522  South  Jefferson,  Paris,  Illinois  61944. 

155 


Selected  Sources  of  Information 

Beekeeping  and  pollination  information  is  available  through  the  Cooperative 
Extension  Service  at  the  college  of  agriculture  of  the  land  grant  university 
in  each  state.  Extension  apiculturists  or  entomologists  are  available  in  every 
state.  In  Illinois,  help  is  available  from  the  Extension  Apiculturist,  107b 
Horticulture  Field  Laboratory,  University  of  Illinois,  Urbana,  Illinois  61801. 

The  U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture  publishes  information  about  bees  and  bee- 
keeping and  provides  laboratory  diagnosis  for  adult  and  brood  diseases  of  I 
bees.  Requests  for  information  and  samples  for  examination  can  be  sent  to 
the  Bioenvironmental  Bee  Laboratory,  Agricultural  Research  Center,  Belts- 
ville,  Maryland  20705. 


156 


GhLOSS^RY 


Abdomen  —  the  last  major  body  region  of  the  bee,  one  of  three 

regions. 
Acarine  disease  — -  a  disease  of  adult  bees  caused  by  a  mite,  Acarapis 

woodi,  infesting  the  tracheae.  Not  known  to  be  present  in  North 

America. 
Adrenalin  —  a  drug  used  for  treatment  of  severe  reactions  to  bee 

stings;  also  called  epinephrine. 
Alimentary  canal  or  tract  —  the  passage  in  the  bee's  body  that  food 

passes  through  from  mouth  to  anus. 
American  foulbrood    (AFB)  —  an  infectious  disease  of  immature 

honey  bees  caused  by  a  bacterium,  Bacillus  larvae. 
Apiary  —  a  place  where  bees  are  kept. 
Apiculture  ■ —  beekeeping. 

Balling  — ■  the  clustering  of  bees  tightly  around  a  queen  bee,  usually 

in  an  attempt  to  kill  her. 
Bee  blower  —  a  portable  machine  that  produces  large  volumes  of 

rapidly  moving  air  to  blow  bees  from  combs. 
Bee  brush  —  a  soft-bristled  brush  used  for  removing  bees  from  combs. 
Bee  escape  —  a  metal  tube  through  which  bees  can  move  in  only 

one  direction. 
Bee  space  - —  a  }4-  to  ^-inch  space  through  which  a  bee  can  move 

freely;  the  space  between  the  frames  and  exterior  parts  of  a  hive. 

Bees  will  not  build  comb  in  it  or  seal  it  with  propolis,  thereby 

allowing  the  frames  to  be  removed  easily. 
Bee  veil  —  a  wire  screen  or  cloth  enclosure  worn  over  the  head  and 

neck  to  protect  them  from  bee  stings. 
Beeswax  —  a  substance  secreted  from  glands  on  the  bee's  abdomen 

that  is  used  to  construct  comb. 
Benzaldehyde  —  a  liquid  used  to  drive  bees  from  honey  combs;  a 

component  of  oil  of  bitter  almond.  It  has  a  smell  that  is  pleasant  to 

humans. 
Boardman  feeder  —  see  entrance  feeder. 
Bottom  board  — -  the  floor  of  a  hive. 

157 


Glossary 

Brood  —  the  immature  stages  of  the  bee   (egg,  larva,  and  pupa) 

considered  together. 
Brood  chamber  —  the  part  of  the  hive  in  which  young  bees  are 

reared.   It  usually  includes  one  or  two  hive  bodies  with  combs. 
Brood  nest  —  the  area  within  the  combs  in  which  young  bees  are 

reared.   It  may  include  only  part  of  one  comb  or  many  combs. 
Burr  comb  —  small  pieces  of  comb  built  between  combs  and  parts 

of  the  hive. 
Butyric  anhydride  —  a  liquid  used  to  drive  bees  from  honey  combs. 

It  has  an  odor  unpleasant  for  humans  similar  to  that  found  in 

rancid  butter  and  perspiration. 
Carniolan  bee  —  a  dark  honey  bee  race  originating  in  southeastern 

Europe. 
Castes  —  the  different  forms  of  adult  female  bees  in  a  colony;  workers 

and  queens. 
Caucasian  bee  —  a  dark  honey  bee  race  originating  in  the  Caucasus. 
Cell  —  a  single  compartment  in  a  honey  comb. 
Chunk  honey  —  a  piece  or  pieces  of  comb  honey  packed  in  a  jar 

with  liquid  extracted  honey. 
Cleansing  flight  —  bee  flight,  after  a  period  of  confinement,  to  dis- 
pose of  feces  or  body  wastes. 
Colony  —  an  entire  honey  bee  family  or  social  unit  living  together: 

in  a  hive  or  other  shelter. 
Comb  —  a  beeswax  structure  composed  of  two  layers  of  horizontal 

cells  sharing  their  bases,  usually  within  a  wooden  frame  in  a  hive. 

The  words  "comb"  and  "frame"  are  often  used  interchangeably; 

for  example,  a  frame  of  brood,  a  comb  of  brood. 
Comb  foundation  —  a  sheet  of  beeswax  embossed  on  each  side  with 

the  cell  pattern. 
Comb  honey  —  honey  in  the  sealed  comb  in  which  it  was  produced ; 

also  called  section  comb  honey  when  produced  in  thin  wooden 

frames  called  sections,  and  bulk  comb  honey  when  produced  in 

shallow  frames. 
Creamed  honey  —  finely  granulated  honey  produced  by  adding  fine 

honey  crystals  to  liquid  honey. 
Cucurbit  — -  a   plant  in   the   family   Cucurbitaceae,   which   includes 

squash,  pumpkin,  watermelon,  muskmelon,  and  cucumber. 
Cut  comb  honey  —  a  portion  of  comb  honey  cut  from  a  larger  comb. 


158 


an 


Division-board  feeder  —  a  waterproof,  plastic  or  wooden  syrup  con- 
tainer the  size  of  a  frame,  used  to  feed  bees  within  the  hive. 

Division  screen  —  a  wooden  frame  with  two  layers  of  wire  screen 
that  serves  to  separate  two  colonies  within  the  same  hive,  one  above 
the  other. 

Draw- — to  shape  and  build,  as  to  draw  comb. 

Drawn  comb  —  a  comb  constructed  on  a  sheet  of  foundation. 

Drifting  —  the  return  of  field  bees  to  colonies  other  than  their  own. 

Drone  layer,  drone-laying  queen  —  a  queen  that  is  unable  to  lay 

fertilized  eggs  because  of   failure  to  mate  or  lack  of   sufficient 

spermatozoa;  a  queen  whose  eggs  produce  drones  in  worker  cells. 
Dysentery  — -  a  malady  of  adult  bees  marked  by  an  accumulation  of 

excess  feces  or  waste  products,  and  by  their  release  in  and  near  the 

hive. 

Entrance  feeder  —  a  wooden  runway  that  fits  into  the  hive  entrance 
so  that  bees  may  obtain  syrup  from  a  jar  inverted  into  it. 

Enzyme  —  an  organic  substance  produced  in  plant  or  animal  cells 
that  causes  changes  in  other  substances  by  catalytic  action. 

Epinephrine  —  see  adrenalin. 

Ethylene  dibromide  - —  a  liquid  used  to  fumigate  honey  combs  for 
control  of  wax  moth. 

European  foulbrood  (EFB)  • —  an  infectious  disease  of  immature 
honey  bees  caused  by  a  bacterium,  Streptococcus  pluton. 

Excluder  —  a  thin  grid  of  wire,  wood  and  wire,  sheet  plastic,  or  sheet 
zinc,  with  spaces  wide  enough  for  workers  to  pass  through  but  not 
queens  or  drones.  It  is  used  between  hive  bodies  to  confine  queens 
to  one  part  of  a  hive. 

Extracted  honey  —  liquid  honey  removed  from  the  comb  by  means 
of  an  extractor  or  other  methods  of  separation. 

Extractor  (honey  extractor)  —  a  hand-  or  power-driven  device  that 

removes  honey  from  the  comb  by  centrifugal  force. 
Field  bee  (forager)  —  worker  bee  that  collects  nectar,  pollen,  water, 

and  propolis  at  locations  outside  the  hive. 
Foulbrood  —  a  general  name  for  infectious  diseases  of  immature 

bees  that  cause  them  to  die  and  their  remains  to  smell  bad.    The 

term  most  often  refers  to  American  foulbrood. 
Foundation  —  see  comb  foundation. 


159 


Glossary 

Frame  —  a  wooden  rectangle  that  surrounds  the  comb  and  hangs 
within  the  hive.  It  may  be  referred  to  as  Hoffman,  Langstrotb,  or 
self-spacing  because  of  differences  in  size  and  widened  end  bars 
that  provide  a  bee  space  between  the  combs.  The  words  "frame" 
and  "comb"  are  often  used  interchangeably;  for  example,  a  comb! 
of  brood,  a  frame  of  brood. 

Fume  board  —  a  general  name  for  any  shallow  wooden  cover  used 
to  hold  repellents  for  driving  bees  from  honey  combs. 

Fumigant  —  a  material  that  acts  as  a  disinfectant  or  pesticide  in  a 
gaseous  form  when  exposed  to  air. 

Genetic  or  hereditary  makeup  —  the  characteristics  of  an  individual 
inherited  from  its  parents. 

Granulated  honey  —  honey  in  which  crystals  of  a  sugar  (dextrose) 
have  formed. 

Granulation  —  the  formation  of  sugar  (dextrose)  crystals  in  honey. 

Head  —  the  first  major  body  region  of  an  insect,  bearing  the  eyes, 
antennae,  and  mouthparts. 

Hive  —  a  wooden  box  or  other  container  in  which  a  honey  bee  col- 
ony lives. 

Hive  body  —  a  single  wooden  rim  or  shell  that  holds  a  set  of  frames. 
When  used  for  the  brood  nest,  it  is  called  a  brood  chamber;  when 
used  above  the  brood  nest  for  honey  storage,  it  is  called  a  super. 
It  may  be  of  various  widths  and  heights  and  adapted  for  comb 
honey  sections. 

Hive  cover  —  the  roof  or  lid  of  a  hive. 

Hive  loader  —  a  mechanically  operated  boom  and  cradle  for  manip- 
ulating hives  and  placing  them  on  a  truck. 

Hive  tool  ■ — ■  a  metal  bar  used  to  loosen  frames  and  to  separate  the 
parts  of  a  hive. 

Honey  —  a  sweet,  viscid  fluid  produced  by  honey  bees  from  nectar 
collected  from  flowers. 

Honeydew  —  a  sweet  liquid,  primarily  plant  sap,  excreted  by  plant- 
feeding  insects  and  often  collected  by  honey  bees. 

Honey  flow  —  see  nectar  flow. 

House  bee  —  a  young  worker  bee,  1  day  to  2  weeks  old,  that  works 
only  in  the  hive. 

Hybrid  bees  —  the  offspring  resulting  from  crosses  of  two  or  more 
selected  inbred  lines  (strains)  of  bees;  the  offspring  of  crosses  be- 
tween races  of  bees. 


160 


Inbreeding  — -  a  breeding  system  that  features  mating  of  related  indi- 
viduals. 
Inner  cover  —  a  thin  wooden  hive  lid  used  beneath  a  telescoping 

cover. 
Italian  bee  - —  a  yellow  honey  bee  race  originating  in  Italy. 
Langstroth  hive  —  a  hive  with  movable  frames  made  possible  by 

the  bee  space  around  them.   It  was  invented  by  L.  L.  Langstroth. 
Larva,  larvae  —  the  grublike  or  wormlike  immature  form  of  an  insect  ; 

the  second  stage  in  metamorphosis. 
Laying  worker  —  a  worker  bee  that  produces  eggs  that  normally 

develop  into  drones. 
Legume  —  the  common  name  for  plants  of  the  pea  family,  Legumi- 

nosae,  including  clover,  sweetclover,  vetch,  alfalfa,  and  many  other 

nectar  and  pollen  plants. 
Metamorphosis  ■ —  the  series  of  changes  through  which  an  insect 

passes  from  the  egg  to  larva,  pupa,  and  adult. 
Nectar- — a  sweet  liquid  secreted  by  plant  glands  (nectaries)  usually 

located  in  flowers,  but  also  found  on  other  parts  of  plants. 
Nectar  flow  —  the  period  when  abundant  nectar  is  available   for 

bees  to  produce  honey  for  storage  in  the  combs  of  the  hive. 

Nosema  disease  —  an  infectious  disease  of  adult  bees  caused  by  a 
protozoan,  Nosema  apis. 

Nuc  —  abbreviation  for  nucleus. 

Nuc  box  —  a  small  hive  used  for  housing  a  small  colony  or  nucleus. 

Nucleus,  nuclei  —  a  small  colony  of  bees  with  a  queen  and  enough 
workers  to  cover  two  to  five  frames  or  combs. 

Nurse  bee  —  a  young  bee,  usually  2  to  10  days  old,  that  feeds  and 
cares  for  immature  bees. 

Outapiary  — ■  an  apiary  located  some  distance  from  the  beekeeper's 
home. 

Ovary- — -the  egg-producing  part  of  the  female  reproductive  system. 

Package  bees  - —  2  to  4  pounds  of  worker  bees,  usually  with  a  queen, 
in  a  screen-sided  wooden  cage  with  a  can  of  sugar  syrup  for  food. 

Pallet  —  a  cleated  wooden  stand  on  which  supers  are  stacked  for 
bulk  handling;  also  used  to  hold  two  to  seven  hives  for  moving, 
especially  for  pollination  service. 

Paradichlorobenzene  (PDB) — a  white  crystalline  substance  used 
to  fumigate  combs  and  to  repel  wax  moths. 


161 


Glossary 

Paralysis  —  a  disease  of  adult  bees  caused  by  a  virus. 

Pentachlorophenol  (penta)  —  a  liquid  wood  preservative  used  for 
hive  parts. 

Pesticide  — a  general  name  for  materials  used  to  kill  undesirable; 

insects,  plants,  rodents,  and  other  pests. 
Pfund  color  grader  —  an  instrument  used  to  classify  the  color  of 

samples  of  liquid  honey. 
pH — a  symbol  for  a  measure  of  relative  acidity  or  alkalinity  of 

solutions;  values  below  7  are  acid,  values  above  7  are  alkaline. 
Pistil  —  the  female  part  of  a  flower  that  includes  the  ovary,  style, 

and  stigma. 
Play  flight  —  short  flight  in  front  of  the  hive  taken  by  young  bees 

when  they  first  leave  the  hive;  an  orientation  flight. 
Pollen  —  male  sex  cells,  usually  very  small  and  powdery,  produced 

in  the  anthers  of  a  flower. 
Pollen  basket  ■ —  an  area  on  a  bee's  hind  leg  where  pollen  is  packed 

and  carried  with  help  from  a  central  spine  and  surrounding  hairs. 
Pollen  insert  —  a  device  placed  in  the  hive  entrance  to  apply  live 

pollen  to  outgoing  bees  for  cross-pollination,  as  in  apples. 
Pollen  substitute  —  a  mixture  of  materials  such  as  soy  flour,  casein, 

brewers'  yeast,   and  dried  milk   fed  to  bees   to   stimulate   brood 

rearing. 

Pollen  supplement  —  a  mixture  of  pollen  substitute  and  pollen  fed 
to  bees  to  stimulate  brood  rearing. 

Pollen  trap  —  a  device  that  removes  pollen  pellets  from  bees'  legs  as 
they  enter  the  hive. 

Pollination  —  the  transfer  of  pollen  from  the  anther  to  the  stigma, 
the  receptive  surface  of  the  female  organ  of  a  flower;  in  beekeep- 
ing terms,  pollination  often  refers  to  the  service  of  providing  bees 
for  pollination  of  crop  plants. 

Pollinator  —  an  agent,  such  as  an  insect,  that  transfers  pollen. 

Pollinizer  —  a  plant  that  furnishes  pollen  to  another  plant. 

Propolis  —  plant  resins  collected  from  plants  by  bees  to  use  in  seal- 
ing cracks  and  crevices  in  hives;  bee  glue. 

Pupa,  pupae  —  the  inactive  third  stage  in  the  complete  metamor- 
phosis of  an  insect.   The  adult  body  form  is  evident  at  this  stage. 

Queen-cage  candy  —  a  firm  mixture  of  powdered  sugar  and  liquid 
invert  sugar  used  in  queen  cages  as  food  for  the  queen  and  her 
attendant  bees. 


162 


bt 


le 


Queen  excluder  —  see  excluder. 

Queenless  colony  —  a  honey  bee  colony  without  a  queen. 

Queenright  colony  —  a  honey  bee  colony  with  a  queen. 

Rabbet  —  a  piece  of  wood  or  metal  on  which  the  frame  ends  hang  in 
the  hive;  a  cutout  area  used  as  a  frame  rest. 

Refractometer  —  an  instrument  for  measuring  the  percent  of  soluble 
solids  in  a  solution,  designed  to  read  directly  in  percent  moisture; 
used  for  measuring  the  percent  moisture  in  honey  and  nectar. 

Reproductive  system  —  the  organs  of  the  body,  either  male  or  fe- 
male, concerned  with  producing  offspring. 

Requeening  —  removal  of  a  queen  from  a  colony  and  introduction 
of  a  new  one. 

Robber  bee  —  a  field  bee  from  one  colony  that  takes,  or  tries  to 
take,  honey  from  another  colony. 

Robbing  —  the  stealing  of  honey  from  a  colony  by  bees  from  another 
colony. 

Royal  jelly- — a  mixture  of  glandular  secretions  of  worker  bees  fed 
to  developing  queens. 

Sacbrood  —  a  virus  disease  of  immature  honey  bees. 

Scale  colony  —  a  hive  that  is  maintained  on  a  scale  and  whose  weight 
changes  are  measured  and  recorded  daily  or  at  other  frequent 
intervals. 

Scout  bee  —  a  field  bee  that  locates  new  sources  of  food,  water,  or 
propolis,  or  a  new  home  for  a  swarm. 

Sealed  brood  —  immature  bees  in  their  late  larval  and  pupal  stages 

within  capped  cells  of  the  comb. 
Section   comb    honey  —  honey   in   sealed    comb    produced    in    thin 

wooden  frames  called  sections. 

Sex  alleles  —  hereditary  characteristics  of  bees  that,  in  part,  deter- 
mine the  sex  of  the  individual  bee. 

Slumgum  —  the  refuse  from  melted  combs  after  all  or  part  of  the 
wax  is  removed. 

Smoker  —  a  steel  container  with  an  attached  bellows  in  which  burn- 
ing materials  furnish  smoke  to  repel  and  subdue  honey  bees. 

Social  bees  —  bees  that  live  in  groups  or  colonies,  such  as  bumble 

bees,  stingless  bees,  and  honey  bees. 
Solar  wax  melter  (solar  extractor)  —  a  glass-covered  box  used  for 

melting  combs  and  cappings  by  heat  from  the  sun. 


163 


Glossary 

Solitary  bees  —  bees  that  live  alone  and  whose  offspring  individually 

survive  the  winter,  usually  in  an  immature  stage  in  a  cell  in  the 

ground  or  a  variety  of  other  sites. 
Spiracles  —  the  openings  to  an  insect's  internal  breathing  tubes,  the 

tracheae. 
Stigma  —  the  receptive  surface  of  the  female  organ  of  a  flower  that 

receives  the  pollen. 
Super  —  a  hive  body  used  for  honey  storage  above  the  brood  chann 

bers  of  a  hive. 
Supering  —  placing  supers  of  comb  or  foundation  on  a  hive,  either 

to  give  more  room  for  brood  rearing  or  for  honey  storage. 
Supersedure  —  replacement   by   the   bees   of  an   established   queen 

with  a  new  one  without  swarming. 
Swarm  - —  a  group  of  worker  bees  and  a  queen  (usually  the  old  one) 

that  leave  the  hive  to  establish  a  new  colony;  a  word  formerly  used 

to  describe  a  hive  or  colony  of  bees. 
Telescoping  cover  —  a  hive  cover,  used  with  an  inner  cover,  that  ex- 
tends downward  several  inches  on  all  four  sides  of  a  hive. 
Thorax  —  the  middle  body  region  of  an  insect  to  which  the  wings 

and  legs  are  attached. 
Trachea,  tracheae  —  the  breathing  tube  of  an  insect. 
Transferring  — ■  moving  bees  and  comb  from  a  natural  nest  in  a 

cavity  or  container  to  a  movable  frame  hive. 
Uncapping  — ■  cutting  a  thin  layer  from  a  comb  surface  to  remove 

the  wax  covering  from  sealed  cells  of  honey. 
Uncapping   knife  — ■  a   knife,   usually   heated,   for  cutting   cappings 

from  honey  comb. 
Uniting  —  combining  one  honey  bee  colony  with  another. 
Unsealed  brood  —  eggs  and  larvae  in  open  cells. 
Virgin  queen  —  an  unmated  queen. 
Wax  moth  —  an  insect  whose  larvae  feed  on  and  destroy  honey  bee 

combs. 
Wired  foundation  —  comb  foundation  manufactured  with  vertical 

wires  embedded  in  it  for  added  strength. 
Wiring  —  installing  tinned  wire  in  frames  as  support  for  combs. 


lit, 
:•■ 
ill 


1 


k 


164 


■1 


Ki 


"DEX 


ne  disease,  140 
alin,  58 
kjcan  foulbrood  (AFB),  62,  83-84,  103, 
2  133-137 
icba  disease,  142 
■SO,  130,  144 

w:  arrangement,  56-57;   identification, 
%  144,  147 ;  location,  56-57,  98 
Mr  inspection,  laws,  136,  155 

fDlower,  81,  83;  books,  154-155;  brush, 
4  dances,  15-17;  escape,  80;  gloves,  34; 
image,  15-17;  space,  20,  37,  52;  spot- 
in  (feces),  57 ;  stings,  58-59  ;  waterer,  58 ; 
eialso  Drone  bee,   Queen  bee,  Worker 

i>,  80 

ftping:  how  to  start,  52-53;  organiza- 
m,  155;  periodicals,  155;  supplies  and 
qipment,  155;  terms,  157-164;  when  to 
It,  52-53 

•as  nuisances,  57-58,  68,  73 ;  as  pollina- 
I  149-150;  confining  to  hive,  99-101, 
I  how  to  kill,  122 ;  number  in  Illinois, 

^jax:  processing,  44-45,   111;   secretion 
■workers,  7,   70,   77;   sources,   109-111; 
ifes,  109 
■dehyde,  80 
>*-,  bee,  81,  83 
albee,  154-155 
«-s'  yeast,  47,  106 

o:  chamber,  23,  25;  chilled,  139;  dis- 
is;,  83-84,  133-139;  pattern,  62; 
fifed,  139 

■j  nest :  characteristics,  13,  64;  han- 
Utt,  64;  location  in  hive,  13-14,  60,  76; 
atjrn,   13,  62;  size,   13-14;  temperature, 

•libee,  34 

Ifebmb  honey,  19,  79 

iyft  anhydride,  80 

^esqueen  introduction,  115 
id:  queen  cage,  118 
>$gs,  4,  45,  111 
rfyl  (Sevin),  122 


Carbon  dioxide  fumigation,  108-109 

Carniolan  race,  characteristics,  12 

Caucasian  race  :  characteristics,  12  ;  drone 
relations,  8 

Chalkbrood,  139 

Chunk  honey,  19 

Clothing,  beekeeper's,  34 

Cold  starvation,  98 

Colonies:  dividing,  101-103;  uniting,  128, 
131-132 

Colony:  clustering  temperature,  64;  confin- 
ing to  hive,  99-101;  dividing,  75,  101-103; 
equalizing,  128;  examining,  58-61,  66-67; 
fall  management,  80,  95-98;  feeding,  66, 
103-108;  food  reserves,  65,  69;  inspecting 
for  disease,  52,  55,  62,  67;  killing,  122; 
movement  in  hive,  14,  67;  moving,  102, 
123-127;  preparing  for  winter,  80,  95-98; 
reversing,  67 ;  space  in  spring,  65-66,  74 ; 
spring  management,  65-67,  70;  standards 
for  pollination,  150-151 ;  summer  manage- 
ment, 73-78 ;  supering,  66,  76-78 

Comb  foundation,  7,  23-25,  29 

Comb  honey,  18-19,  24,  76,  86,  92,  108-109 

Combs:  care  of  stored,  99,  108-109;  culling, 
67;  handling,  29,  60;  rendering,  44 

Communication:  alarm,  15;  by  food  and 
odor,  15,  70;  dances  (language),  15-16; 
presence  of  queen,  15 

Confining  bees  to  hive,  99-101 

Creamed  honey,  19,  90 

Cut  comb  honey,  19,  23,  25,  79 

Cyanide  dust,  122 

Dadant,  Charles,  20 

Dadant-depth  frames,  41-42 

Dadant-depth  super,  23 

Dances,  bee,  15-17 

Disease:  acarine,  140;  American  foulbrood 
(AFB),  62,  83-84,  103,  120,  133-137; 
amoeba,  142;  chalkbrood,  139;  diagnosis 
service,  135 ;  drugs  and  antibiotics,  67,  96, 
103,  120,  136-137,  138,  140-141;  dysentery, 
140-141;  European  foulbrood  (EFB),  137- 
138;  nosema,  140-141;  para  foulbrood,  139; 
paralysis,  142;  sacbrood,  138-139;  septi- 
cemia, 142 ;  stonebrood,  139 


165 


Index 

Diseases:  adult,  140-142;  brood,  83-84,  133- 
139 ;  in  purchased  bees,  52,  55 

Division  screens,  95-96,  101 

Divisions,  making,  75,  101-103 

Drifting  of  bees,  56-57 

Drone  bee :  appearance,  3 ;  congregation 
(mating)  areas,  8,  10;  development,  8,  12; 
diploid,  8;  expulsion  from  hive,  8;  in 
worker-sized  cells,  8;  mating,  8,  9;  num- 
bers, 7 

Drone-laying  queen,  10 

Dysentery,  140-141 

Embedder:  electrical,  30,  42-44;  spur,  29 

Embedding  board,  29,  42-44 

Epinephrine,  58 

Escape  board,  80 

Ethylene  dibromide  (EDB),  108 

European  foulbrood  (EFB),  137-138 

Excluder,  34,  44-45,  75-76,  95 

Extracted  (liquid)  honey,  19,  76,  87-90,  92 

Extracting  honey,  84,  87-88 

Extractors,  honey,  87-88,  89 

Fall  management,  80,  95-98 

Feeders,  104 

Feeding:     emergency     methods,     104-106; 

equipment,  54,  104;  honey  and  sugar,  80, 

103-106;  package  bees,  53-54;  pollen  and 

pollen  mixtures,  68,  106-108 
Fermentation  of  honey,  79,  85,  89,  90 
Foundation:  embedding  wires  in,  29,  42,  44; 

installing  in  frames,  24,  29;  proper  use,  7, 

25,   74,   78;   types,  23;   use  of   full   hive 

bodies,  62,  76,  78 
Frames :  assembling,  27-28 ;  handling  29,  60 ; 

making,  39;  number  in  hive,  61-62;  types, 

24;  wiring,  28,  39,41-42 
Fumagillin  (Fumidil  B),  140-141 
Fume  board,  80-81 
Fumidil  B  (fumagillin),  140-141 
Fumigation  of  combs,  84,  108-109 

Gauntlets,  34 
Gloves,  34 
Granulated  honey,  19 

Hanging  out,  74 

Hive:  assembly,  27,  37;  buying  used,  52 
construction,  23,  36-39;  entrances,  25,  37 
96 ;  equipment  needed  for  one,  21,  23 
fastening  together,  25 ;  identification,  120 
loader,  57,  125;  number  of  combs,  61-62 
painting,  32,  39;  parts,  21,  25;  stand,  27 
staples,  123-124;  tool,  32;  types,  20 


Honey:  acids,  18,  89;  color,  76,  92 
standards,  92;  bulk  comb,  19;  chui 
comb,  18-19,  76,  86,  92;  composite 
creamed,  19,  90;  cut  comb,  19,  23, 
enzymes,  17-18;  extracted  (liquid), 
87-90,  92 ;  extracting,  84,  87-88 ;  extr 
87-88,  89;  fermentation,  79,  85,  i 
flavor,  76 ;  fumigation  of  comb  hone 
109;  grades,  92;  granulated,  19,  90? 
ulation,  18-19,  89;  heating,  89-90; 
84;  hydrogen  peroxide,  18;  hydrc 
92-93;  in  brood  nest,  13-14;  labelir 
92;  making,  17-18;  marketing, 
moisture,  18,  79,  85,  90,  92;  price  si 
94;  processing  by  bees,  17-18,  77;  { 
sing  by  man,  84-90;  processing  equi 
84-89;  refractometer,  92-93;  ren 
from  hive,  64,  79-84 ;  sampling,  93 ;  < 
comb,  19,  23-24;  stomach,  17;  stora; 
86-87,  89-90;  straining,  89;  sugar 
sump,  89;  types,  19;  use  by  colon 
yeasts,  89,  90 

Honey  Market  News,  94,  153 

Honey  plants,  57,  69-72 

Honey  war,  1 

Honeydew,  17,  72 

Hydrogen  peroxide  in  honey,  18 

Hydrometer,  honey,  92-93 

Indemnification  for  bee  losses,   147-14 
Insecticides :  to  kill  colonies,   122 ;  tra 

145-147 
Inspection  for  disease :  before  buying 

52,   55;   before  moving,   127;   impor 

62,  83,  135-136;  timing,  67,  83-84,  96 

135-136 

Introducing  queens,  54-55,  101,   113-11 
Isopentyl  acetate,  15 
Italian  race :  characteristics,   12 ;   dron 

lations,  8 

Killing  bees  in  hives  and  buildings,  1Z 


Labels  for  honey,  91-92 

Langstroth  hive,  20 

Langstroth,  L.  L.,  20 

Language,  bee,  15-17 

Laws:  bee  disease,  136,  155;  honey  mai 
ing,  91-92;  importing  bees,  140;  inspec, 
155;  labeling,  91-92;  moving  permits, 

Laying  worker,  8,  128,  131 

Learning  by  bees,  14-15 

Loader,  bee  hive,  57,  125 

Location  of  hives,  56-57 


166 


■;  :ines,  bee,  155 
k  96,  144 
ni|on  bees,  140 

g  bees,  57,  102,  123-127 

g  screens,  99-101,  124 

.-,  17,  65,  69,  76,  77,  78 
-  and  pollen  plants  57,  69-72 
ia  disease,  140-141 
oxes,  37 

is  colonies  (nuclei)  :  making,  75,  101- 
starting  with,  52-53,  55 
loline,  118 

izations,  beekeeping,  155 
tracycline  HC1,  136 

ge  bees  :  feeding,  53-54 ;  helping,  129 ; 

tiling,  54-55 ;  shaking,  83 ;  size  to  buy, 

starting  with,  52,  53-55 

,  37,  39,  84,  125 

ichlorobenzene   (PDB),   108-109 

>ulbrood,  139 

sis,  142 

(paradichlorobenzene),  108-109 

:hlorophenol,  27,  32 

icals,  beekeeping,  155 
-■tide  indemnification,  147-148 
Ides,  99,  145-148 
i>f  bees,  96,  142-144 

■  color  grader,  92 
lights,  5 

■zed  light,  14 

1:  collection,  70;  feeding,  68,  95,  106- 

■1  in  brood  nest,  13-14;  storage,  49,  130; 

m  and  trapping,  47-50,    106,    129-131; 

»y  colony,  7,  64,  68 

Mtion:    alfalfa,    151;   apple,    151,    152; 

■  specialty,  150;  colony  standards,  150- 
I  contracts,   152;   cucumber,   151,   152; 

m  per  acre,  151;  Midwest  crops,  150; 

laiment  of  hives,  152;  red  clover,  151; 

m.\  fees,   153;  value  and  use  of  bees, 

,:9-153 

>|is,  5,  12,  37,  72-73 

*  bee:  appearance,  3;  cages,  115;  clip- 
ii,  27,  113;  development,  9-10,  12;  egg 
l*S,  8,  10,  62;  egg  production,  10; 
■rig,  62,  101;  gland  secretions,  15,  73; 
■ling,  60,  111-119;  introducing,  54-55, 
31113-118;  judging,  62;  length  of  life, 
3;narking,  111-113;  mating,  9-10;  rear- 
i|34,  119;  replacement  by  man,  114-115, 

I  139,  142 ;  replacement  by  workers, 
-I;  storing,  118-119;  supersedure,  10,  73 


Queen  cage  candy,  118 

Queen  cage  syrup,  118 

Queen  cell  cups,  9-10,  75 

Queen  cells,  10,  15,  34,  73,  75,  114,  116 

Queen  excluder,  34,  44-45,  75-76,  95 

Queenless  colony,  saving,  127-128 

Races  of  bees,  12,  112 

Records :    bee   management,    121 ;    financial, 

121-122 
Refractometer,  honey,  92-93 
Registration  of  bees,  147,  155 
Removing  honey,  64,  79-84 
Repellents  for  removing  honey,  80-81 
Repelling  bees,  127 
Requeening,  83,  138,  139,  142 
Reversing,  67 

Robbing,  45,  65,  99,  103,  127,  135 
Royal  jelly,  10 

Sacbrood,  138-139 

Scale  colony,  77 

Screens  for  hives,  99-101,  124 

Section  comb  honey,  19,  23-24,  79 

Septicemia,  142 

Sevin  (carbaryl),  122 

Sex  alleles,  8,  62 

Skunks,  144 

Slumgum,  45,  111 

Smoke:  effect  on  bees,  59;  preventing  sting- 
ing, 59;  use,  finding  queen,  62;  use,  mov- 
ing bees,  125 ;  use,  opening  hive,  55,  59, 
60-61,  66;  use,  removing  honey,  80-81 

Smoker:  fuel,  59;  sizes,  32;  use,  59,  60-61, 
62,  66,  80-81 

Solar  wax  melter,  44-46,  111 

Soy  flour,  47,  106,  108 

Spring  management,  65-67,  70 

Starvation,  cold,  98 

Stings:  avoiding,  59;  emergency  treatment, 
58-59;  reaction  to,  58;  removing,  59 

Stonebrood,  139 

Sulfathiazole,  103,  120,  136 

Summer  management,  73-78 

Supering,  66,  76-78 

Supersedure,  10,  73 

Supplies  and  equipment,  155 

Support  pins,  25,  29 

Swarming:  causes,  65,  73,  76;  detection,  74- 
75;  odors,  15;  prevention,  67,  74-75,  101, 
129;  timing,  73 

Swarms:  disease  carried  by,  120;  hiving, 
119-120;  makeup,  73;  selection  of  home, 
17;  starting  with,  55 


167 


Index 

Temperature  :  brood  nest,  13  ;  clustering,  13, 
64;  effect  on  flight,  149;  effect  on  fumi- 
gants,  108;  honey  granulation,  90;  honey 
processing,  87,  89-90;  honey  storage,  79, 
86-87,  89-90,  109;  pollen  drying,  130; 
spring  inspection,  66 ;  to  kill  Nosema,  140- 
141 ;  to  kill  wax  moth,  109 

Terramycin,  136-137,  138 

Top  entrance,  96 

Transferring  bees,  55,  129 

Travel  stain,  79 

Uncapping,  87,  111 

Uniting  colonies,  128,  131-132 

Veils:  making,  50-51;  types,  34;  use,  34,  50 


Water  and  bees,  56,  57-58,  78,  152 

Wax,  see  Beeswax 

Wax  moth,  84,  108-109,  142-143 

Wind:  effect  on  flight,  16,  149,  152;  pre 
tion  from,  56,  98,  152 

Winter :  losses  of  bees,  67,  98 ;  prepara 
for,  80,  95-98 

Wiring  board,  28,  39-42 

Wiring  frames,  28,  39,  41-42 

Wood  preservative,  27,  32,  39 

Worker  bee:  abilities,  14;  appearance 
dances,  15-17;  development,  4,  12;  du 
5;  foraging,  17,  69,  73,  123,  149-! 
glands,  7,  14;  larvae,  4;  length  of  life 
metamorphosis,  4,  12 ;  number  in  colon 


168 


Elbert  R.  Jaycox  was  educated  in  California,  where  he  re- 
ceived his  Ph.D.  in  entomology  from  the  University  of  Cali- 
fornia, Davis.  For  several  seasons,  he  worked  in  commercial 
honey  production  and  in  the  package  bee  and  queen  industry. 
He  was  Supervisor  of  Apiary  Inspection  for  the  California 
Department  of  Agriculture  and  later  became  Research  Ento- 
mologist with  the  U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture.  In  1963, 
he  moved  to  the  University  of  Illinois  at  Urbana-Champaign, 
where  he  is  Professor  of  Apiculture  in  the  Departments  of 
Horticulture  and  Entomology.  He  teaches  courses  in  bee 
behavior  and  beekeeping,  does  research  on  bee  behavior,  and 
serves  as  extension  beekeeping  specialist. 


Issued  in  furtherance  of  Cooperative  Extension  Work,  Acts  of  May  8  and 
June  30,  1914,  in  cooperation  with  the  U.S.  Department  of  Agriculture. 
JOHN  B.  CLAAR,  Director,  Cooperative  Extension  Service,  University  of 
Illinois  at  Urbana-Champaign.  The  Illinois  Cooperative  Extension  Service 
provides  equal  opportunities  in  programs  and  employment.  (September, 
1976)  10M— 9-76— 34696— MN 


169